AERMOD View™ Version 6.

© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All rights reserved.

This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No part of this document may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission of
Lakes Environmental Software, 419 Phillip St., Unit 3, Waterloo, ON , N2L 3X2, except as specified in the Product
Warranty and License Terms.

LAKES ENVIRONMENTAL SOFTWARE MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LAKES ENVIRONMENTAL SOFTWARE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS CONTAINED
HEREIN OR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING,
PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL. THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE
WITHOUT NOTICE.

WISE View, ISC-AERMOD View, CALPUFF View, FETS View, AUSTAL View, CALRoads View, EcoRisk View,
Emissions View, HIVE Grid, IRAP-h View, Mobile View, Screen View, SEVEX View, SLAB View, and SLAB 3D are
trademarks of Lakes Environmental Software.

Microsoft, Windows, and Excel are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.

Google Earth is a trademark of Google Inc.

All other trademarks mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners.

Published by

Lakes Environmental Software

450 Phillip Street, Suite 2
Waterloo, Ontario
N2L 5J2 Canada
Tel.: (519) 746-5995
Fax: (519) 746-0793
Web Site: http://www.weblakes.com
e-mail: [email protected]

User’s Guide Version AERView6.1UG

License Agreement

LAKES ENVIRONMENTAL SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

You should carefully read the following license and warranty information. Opening this package indicates your acceptance of
these terms and conditions. Lakes Environmental Software, a division of Lakes Environmental Consultants Inc., retains the
ownership of this copy of the software. This copy is licensed to you for use under the following conditions:

COPYRIGHT NOTICE
This software is owned by Lakes Environmental Software and is protected by both Canadian copyright law and international
treaty provisions. You must treat this software like any other copyrighted material (e.g., a book or musical recording). Lakes
Environmental Software authorizes you to make archive copies of the software to protect it from loss. Licensee may not
distribute, rent, sub-license, lease, alter, modify, or adapt the software or documentation, including, but not limited to,
translating, decompiling, disassembling, or creating derivative works without the prior written consent of Lakes Environmental
Software. Licensee agrees that in case of transference of ownership of the software, the transferee must expressly accept all
terms and conditions of this agreement.
The associated warranty is not applicable to any freely available software that may be included on the installation CD-ROM,
and Lakes Environmental Software assumes no liability for the use of any freely available software applications.

WARRANTY AND LIABILITY

Lakes Environmental Software warrants that, under normal use, the material of the CD-ROM, hardware key, and the
documentation will be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 60 days from the date of purchase. In the
event of notification of defects in material or workmanship, Lakes Environmental Software will replace the defective material or
documentation.
The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, whether written, expressed, or implied. Lakes Environmental Software
specifically excludes all implied warranties, including, but not limited to, loss of profit, and fitness for a particular purpose. In
no case shall Lakes Environmental Software assume any liabilities with respect to the use, or misuse, or the interpretation, or
misinterpretation, of any results obtained from this software, or for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages resulting from the use of this software.
Specifically, Lakes Environmental Software is not responsible for any costs including, but not limited to, those incurred as a
result of lost profits or revenue, loss of data, the costs of recovering programs or data, the cost of any substitute program,
claims by third parties, or for other similar costs. In no event will Lakes Environmental Software's liability exceed the amount of
the license fee.

HARDWARE KEY
In the event that this software was distributed with a hardware key (also known as a hardware dongle), this hardware key is
required to be attached to your computer for proper use of the software application. If the hardware key is lost the
replacement fee will be 80% of the retail price of the software. As a result, care should be taken to ensure the hardware key
is always kept in a safe location. If the hardware key is found to be defective, Lakes Environmental Software will provide a
replacement hardware key upon receipt of the defective hardware key from the client.

GOVERNING LAW
This license agreement shall be construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada. Any
terms or conditions of this agreement found to be unenforceable, illegal, or contrary to public policy in any jurisdiction will be
deleted, but will not affect the remaining terms and conditions of the agreement.

ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This agreement constitutes the entire agreement between you and Lakes Environmental Software.
Acknowledgements

The authors would like to thank all those who have helped with reviews and suggestions for the successful
completion of this software. We have received useful feedback from our users and for that we are truly grateful.

Our development effort was enormously facilitated by our team members:

Gareth Davis
Chamarie Perera
Ryan Freedman
Jason Redman
Cheryl Porter
Carley Spry
Julie Swatson
Igor Raskin
Oleg Shatalov
Christina Moulton
Valeriy Smotrikov
Charlie Li
Lorena Suarez
Inna Yankova
Adrienne Dandy
Cristiane Thé

All codes, executables, and user’s guides are the intellectual property of Lakes Environmental Software.

Disclaimer

This document and accompanying software follow the U.S. EPA models and documentation (ISCST3, ISC-PRIME,
AERMOD, AERMAP, BPIP, PCRAMMET, and AERMET) to the best of our understanding. The user is responsible
for checking the input data and the results for consistency.
Technical Support

Lakes Environmental is dedicated to providing full technical support to users under current maintenance. If you
need any assistance please contact the Lakes Environmental technical support staff during our technical support
hours (9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. EST), Monday through Friday.

Please have your serial number and version number ready when calling us.

Tel.: (519) 746-5995

Fax: (519) 746-0793

e-mail: [email protected]

Website: www.weblakes.com

Knowledgebase: http://tux.lakes-environmental.com/support/kb/
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction ...........................................................................................1
About AERMOD View™..................................................................................................... 1
The AERMOD Model ......................................................................................................... 2
About AERMOD MPI .................................................................................................. 2
The ISCST3 Model ........................................................................................................... 4
The ISC-PRIME Model ...................................................................................................... 4
Interface Overview .......................................................................................................... 5

Chapter 2 AERMOD View Workflow ........................................................................7

Getting Started ................................................................................................................ 7
Creating a New Project..................................................................................................... 7
Setting Up Projects .......................................................................................................... 8
Importing Maps......................................................................................................... 9
Specifying Control Pathway Options ............................................................................ 9
Specifying Sources ...................................................................................................10
Specifying Receptors ................................................................................................10
Specifying Meteorology Pathway Options....................................................................11
Specifying Buildings ..................................................................................................12
Specifying Terrain ....................................................................................................12
Specifying Output Options.........................................................................................13
Annotating a Project .................................................................................................13
Running Projects.............................................................................................................14
Checking Modeling Input Files ...................................................................................14
Running the Model ...................................................................................................15
Visualizing Your Output ...................................................................................................15
Viewing Model Results ..............................................................................................15
Changing Result Appearance...............................................................................16
Printing Results .................................................................................................16
Viewing 3D Model Results .........................................................................................17
Generating Reports ..................................................................................................17
Exporting to Google Earth™ ......................................................................................17

Chapter 3 Input Pathways ....................................................................................19

Control Pathway .............................................................................................................19
Dispersion Options ...................................................................................................19
Output Type......................................................................................................21
Plume Depletion ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME Only..........................................................22
TOXICS ISCST3 & AERMOD Only........................................................................23
Output Warnings AERMOD Only .........................................................................24
Pollutant/Averaging ..................................................................................................24
Terrain Options ........................................................................................................28
NOx to NO2 .............................................................................................................30

i
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Table of Contents AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Re-Start/Multi-Year Files ...........................................................................................32

Event/Error Files ......................................................................................................35
Debug Files..............................................................................................................36
Gas Dry Deposition...................................................................................................37
AERMOD ...........................................................................................................37
ISCST3 .............................................................................................................38
Seasonal Categories .................................................................................................39
Land Use Categories .................................................................................................40
Source Pathway ..............................................................................................................42
Source Summary ......................................................................................................42
Source Inputs ..........................................................................................................43
Point Sources ....................................................................................................44
Flare Sources ....................................................................................................46
Area Sources .....................................................................................................48
Open Pit Sources ...............................................................................................50
Volume Sources.................................................................................................53
Circular Area Sources .........................................................................................55
Polygon Area Sources.........................................................................................57
Line Sources......................................................................................................58
Building Downwash ..................................................................................................61
Gas & Particle Data ..................................................................................................64
Source Groups .........................................................................................................64
Auto-Generated Source Groups ...........................................................................66
Urban Groups ..........................................................................................................68
Variable Emissions....................................................................................................70
Hourly Emission File .................................................................................................73
Hourly Emission Rate File Format ........................................................................73
Emission Output Unit ................................................................................................75
NO2 Ratio for PVMRM and OLM .................................................................................75
OLM Source Groups - Combined Plumes Modeling .......................................................77
PSD Source Groups ..................................................................................................79
Receptor Pathway ...........................................................................................................82
Receptor Summary ...................................................................................................82
Terrain Options ........................................................................................................83
Uniform Cartesian Grid..............................................................................................85
Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid.......................................................................................87
Uniform Polar Grid....................................................................................................89
Non-Uniform Polar Grid.............................................................................................91
Multi-Tier Grid..........................................................................................................93
Nested Grid Receptors ..............................................................................................95
Discrete Cartesian Receptors .....................................................................................97
Discrete Polar Receptors ...........................................................................................98
Discrete ARC Receptors ............................................................................................99
Cartesian Plant Boundary ........................................................................................101
Polar Plant Boundary ..............................................................................................104

ii
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Table of Contents

Fenceline Grid ........................................................................................................105

Importing Receptors ...............................................................................................107
Terrain Grid Pathway ....................................................................................................108
Terrain Grid Options ...............................................................................................108
TG Grid Settings.....................................................................................................109
Terrain Grid Data File Format ..................................................................................110
Meteorology Pathway ....................................................................................................112
:Met Input Data .....................................................................................................112
AERMOD .........................................................................................................112
ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME .......................................................................................114
Data Period............................................................................................................117
Wind Speed Categories ...........................................................................................118
Wind Profile Exponents ...........................................................................................119
Vertical Temperature Gradients ...............................................................................120
SCIM Sampling.......................................................................................................121
Creating and Troubleshooting Meteorological Data Files.............................................123
Output Pathway............................................................................................................124
Tabular Outputs .....................................................................................................124
Contour Plot Files ...................................................................................................126
Threshold Violation Files .........................................................................................130
Post-Processing Files ..............................................................................................132
TOXX Files .............................................................................................................134
Season Hour Files...................................................................................................136
Rank Files..............................................................................................................138
Evaluation Files ......................................................................................................139
Percentiles/Rolling Average Settings.........................................................................141
Percentiles/Rolling Average Contour Plot Files ...........................................................142

Chapter 4 Other Project Inputs ..........................................................................145

Terrain Options.............................................................................................................145
Terrain Processor ...................................................................................................145
Terrain Processor - Terrain Tab ...............................................................................146
About Terrain File Formats ...............................................................................150
Terrain Processor - Region to Import Tab .................................................................152
Terrain Processor - Import Elevations Tab ................................................................154
Terrain Processor - Advanced Options Tab................................................................155
Building Options ...........................................................................................................156
Building Inputs.......................................................................................................156
Rectangular Building Inputs.....................................................................................157
Polygonal Building Inputs ........................................................................................159
Circular Building Inputs ...........................................................................................160
Running the EPA BPIP Model ...................................................................................162

Chapter 5 Multi-Chemical Run Utility .................................................................163

About the Multi-Chemical Run Utility ...............................................................................163
Setting Up a Multi-Chemical Run ....................................................................................164

iii
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Table of Contents AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Chemical Setup tab .......................................................................................................165

Output Options tab .......................................................................................................167
Chemical Database .......................................................................................................168
Warnings tab................................................................................................................169
Information tab ............................................................................................................169

Chapter 6 Running the U.S. EPA Model...............................................................171

Project Status ...............................................................................................................171
Details .........................................................................................................................172
Running the U.S. EPA EVENT Model ...............................................................................173
Running the U.S. EPA Model ..........................................................................................174

Chapter 7 Output ................................................................................................175

Plotfiles........................................................................................................................175
Contouring in AERMOD View ...................................................................................175
Concentration Converter .........................................................................................178
Import a Blanking File.............................................................................................181
Graphical Options .........................................................................................................182
Graphical Options - Levels.......................................................................................182
Graphical Options - Smoothing ................................................................................183
Graphical Options - Labeling....................................................................................185
Graphical Options - Color Ramp ...............................................................................186
Graphical Options - Posting .....................................................................................188
Graphical Options - Ruler Options ............................................................................189
Graphical Options - Color Mappings..........................................................................190
Graphical Options - Labels.......................................................................................191
Graphical Output Toolbar ........................................................................................192
Reports........................................................................................................................193
Printing Options ............................................................................................................194
Print Preview .........................................................................................................194
Preferences ...........................................................................................................195
Preferences - General .............................................................................................196
Preferences - Appearance .......................................................................................197
Preferences - Terrain Processor ...............................................................................197
Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - AERMOD ..............................................................198
Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - AERMAP...............................................................199
Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - ISCST3 ................................................................199
Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - ISC-PRIME ...........................................................201
Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - BPIP ....................................................................201
Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - Model Input Files ..................................................203
Preferences - Page Layout.......................................................................................203
Preferences - Labeling ............................................................................................204
Preferences - Font Options ......................................................................................205
Preferences - Logo .................................................................................................206
Preferences - Default Settings .................................................................................207

iv
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Table of Contents

Preferences - Default Palette ...................................................................................208

Chapter 8 User Interface Reference ...................................................................211

Menu Options ...............................................................................................................211
Menu Option - File..................................................................................................211
Menu Option - Model ..............................................................................................212
Menu Option - View ................................................................................................213
Menu Option - Import .............................................................................................214
Menu Option - Export .............................................................................................215
Menu Option - Data ................................................................................................215
Menu Option - Run .................................................................................................216
Menu Option - Risk .................................................................................................217
Menu Option - Output.............................................................................................218
Menu Option - Aermap............................................................................................218
Menu Options - Tools..............................................................................................219
Menu Option - Help ................................................................................................220
Menu Toolbar Buttons ...................................................................................................221
Annotation Toolbar .......................................................................................................223
Select Tool.............................................................................................................224
Zoom In Tool .........................................................................................................224
Zoom Out Tool.......................................................................................................225
Pan Tool................................................................................................................225
View Min. Extents Tool............................................................................................225
View Max. Extents Tool...........................................................................................225
Eagle Watch View Tool ...........................................................................................225
Delete Objects .......................................................................................................226
Rectangle Annotation..............................................................................................227
Circle Annotation ....................................................................................................227
Polygon Annotation ................................................................................................228
Text Annotation .....................................................................................................229
Marker Annotation..................................................................................................229
Arrow Annotation ...................................................................................................230
Web Annotation Tool ..............................................................................................230
North Arrow Annotation ..........................................................................................233
Measure Distances and Areas Tool...........................................................................233
Map Import ...........................................................................................................234
Importing Bitmap, JPEG, TIFF and MrSID Images ...............................................234
Importing DLG Base Maps ................................................................................235
Importing DXF Base Maps ................................................................................236
Importing LULC Base Maps ...............................................................................238
Importing ArcView Shapefiles............................................................................240
Site Domain ...........................................................................................................241
Overlay Control Tool ...............................................................................................243
Graphical Options ...................................................................................................244
Impact Tool ...........................................................................................................244
Cross Section Tool..................................................................................................246

v
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Table of Contents AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Identify Tool ..........................................................................................................248

Application Toolbar .......................................................................................................249
Point Source Tool ...................................................................................................250
Flare Source Tool ...................................................................................................250
Area Source Tool....................................................................................................251
Angled Area Source Tool .........................................................................................251
Open Pit Source Tool ..............................................................................................252
Volume Source Tool................................................................................................252
Circular Area Source Tool ........................................................................................253
Polygon Area Source Tool .......................................................................................253
Line Source Tool ....................................................................................................254
Discrete Cartesian Receptor Tool .............................................................................254
Discrete Polar Receptor Tool ...................................................................................255
Discrete Cartesian Receptor (ARC) Tool....................................................................255
Uniform Cartesian Grid Tool ....................................................................................256
Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid Tool .............................................................................256
Uniform Polar Grid Tool...........................................................................................257
Non-Uniform Polar Grid Tool....................................................................................257
Nested Grid Receptors Tool .....................................................................................258
Plant Boundary Tool ...............................................................................................258
Elevations/Flagpole Heights Tool .............................................................................259
Rectangular Building Tool........................................................................................259
Angled Rectangular Building Tool.............................................................................260
Circular Building Tool ..............................................................................................260
Polygonal Building Tool ...........................................................................................261
Show/Hide Structure Influence Zone (SIZ) Tool ........................................................261
Show/Hide GEP 5L Area of Influence Tool ................................................................262

Chapter 9 Tools & Utilities ..................................................................................263

Move Site .....................................................................................................................263
Rotate Site ...................................................................................................................264
MAXTABLE Viewer ........................................................................................................266
Ozone File Maker ..........................................................................................................267
Coordinate Converter ....................................................................................................268
MAXIFILE Converter ......................................................................................................269

Chapter 10 Risk ....................................................................................................271

Risk Mode ....................................................................................................................271
Risk Mode - Gas & Particle Data...............................................................................272
Starting a RiskGen Project .............................................................................................274
RiskGen Interface Overview ...........................................................................................275
Status Tab ...................................................................................................................276
Warning Tab ................................................................................................................276
The Sources Tab...........................................................................................................277
Point Sources tab ...................................................................................................277

vi
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Table of Contents

Area Sources tab ....................................................................................................278

Volume Sources tab................................................................................................280
Gas Dry Deposition.................................................................................................281
The Met Files Tab .........................................................................................................282
The Risk Input File Tab .................................................................................................283
The Generate & Run Tab ...............................................................................................284

Chapter 11 3D View ..............................................................................................285

Viewing 3D Model Results..............................................................................................285
Interface Overview .......................................................................................................286
Controls .......................................................................................................................287
3D View Control .....................................................................................................287
3D Settings Panel ...................................................................................................287
Multimedia Options.................................................................................................288
Advanced Settings ...........................................................................................289
Video Compression ..........................................................................................289
Visualization Tools ........................................................................................................290
Base Maps .............................................................................................................290
Importing DLG Base Maps ................................................................................290
Importing DXF Base Maps ................................................................................290
Scene Manager ......................................................................................................292
List of Views ..........................................................................................................293
Camera Settings.....................................................................................................294
Graphical Options ...................................................................................................295
Flat Terrain .....................................................................................................295
Building Options ..............................................................................................296
Source Options ................................................................................................297
Printing ........................................................................................................................298
Print Preview .........................................................................................................298
Preferences ...........................................................................................................299
Preferences - Appearance .................................................................................300
Preferences - Page Layout ................................................................................300
Preferences - Labeling......................................................................................301
Preferences - Font Options ...............................................................................302
Preferences - Logo...........................................................................................303
Preferences - Default Settings ...........................................................................304

References ...........................................................................................................307
Index ......................................................................................................... cccix

vii
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 1 - Introduction

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Introduction

About AERMOD View™

The AERMOD Model

The ISCST3 Model

The ISC-PRIME Model

Installing AERMOD View

Interface Overview

About AERMOD View™

AERMOD View is a complete and powerful air dispersion modeling package that seamlessly incorporates the
popular U.S. EPA models, ISCST3, ISC-PRIME and AERMOD, into one interface without any modifications to the
models. These models are used extensively to assess pollution concentration and deposition from a wide variety
of sources.

Features

Create impressive presentations of your model results with the easy and intuitive graphical interface of
AERMOD View. You can customize your project using display options such as transparent contour shading,
annotation tools, various font options, and specify compass directions.
Specify model objects such as sources, receptors and buildings graphically. After defining an object
graphically you automatically have access to the related text mode list, in which you can further modify
parameters.
Automatically eliminate receptors within the facility property line.
Import base maps in a variety of formats for easy visualization and source identification.
Use the major digital elevation terrain formats - USGS DEM, GTOPO30 DEM, UK DTM, UK NTF, XYZ Files,
CDED 1-degree, AutoCAD DXF.
Interpret the effects of topography by displaying your model results with 3D terrain using the powerful 3D
visualization built right into the interface .
Complete your building downwash analysis effectively and quickly using the necessary tools that AERMOD
View provides.
Prepare your meteorological data quickly and accurately using the step-by-step meteorological pre-
processing interface.
Take advantage of AERMOD View's integrated post-processing with automatic contouring of results,
automatic gridding, blanking, shaded contour plotting and posting of your results.
Compare models rapidly.
Summarize your modeling input in professionally designed reports using report-ready formats.
Use AERMOD View to its full potential and your best advantage by accessing context-sensitive “Help that
really helps”, which provides you with a clear explanation of the modeling requirements.

1
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 1 - Introduction AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The AERMOD Model

The AMS/EPA Regulatory Model (AERMOD) was specially designed to support the EPA’s regulatory modeling
programs. AERMOD is a regulatory steady-state plume modeling system with three separate components:
AERMOD (AERMIC Dispersion Model), AERMAP (AERMOD Terrain Preprocessor), and AERMET (AERMOD
Meteorological Preprocessor). The AERMOD model includes a wide range of options for modeling air quality
impacts of pollution sources, making it a popular choice among the modeling community for a variety of
applications. AERMOD contains basically the same options as the ISCST3 model:

AERMOD requires two types of meteorological data files, a file containing surface scalar parameters and a
file containing vertical profiles. These two files are provided by the U.S. EPA AERMET meteorological
preprocessor program.
PRIME building downwash algorithms based on the ISC-PRIME model have been added to the AERMOD
model.
Use of allocatable arrays for data storage.
Incorporation of EVENT processing for analyzing short-term source culpability.
Post-1997 PM10 processing.
A non-regulatory default TOXICS option that includes optimizations for area sources and the Sampled
Chronological Input Model (SCIM) option.
Explicit treatment of multiple-year meteorological data files and the ANNUAL average.
Options to specify emissions that vary by season, hour-of-day and day-of- week.
For applications involving elevated terrain, the user must also input a hill height scale along with the
receptor elevation. The U.S. EPA AERMAP terrain preprocessing program can be used to generate hill
height scales as well as terrain elevations for all receptor locations.
Deposition algorithms have been implemented in the AERMOD model - results can be output for
concentration, total deposition flux, dry deposition flux, and/or wet deposition flux.
The model contains algorithms for modeling the effects of settling and removal (through dry deposition) of
large particulates and for modeling the effects of precipitation scavenging for gases or particulates.
Two types of files of intermediate results for debugging purposes can be requested: one containing
information related to the model results and the other containing gridded profiles of meteorological
variables.
AERMOD does not make any distinction between elevated terrain below release height (simple terrain) and
terrain above release height (complex terrain).
AERMOD does not support the Open Pit type source.
The Polar Plant Boundary receptor type is not available in AERMOD. A new type of receptor was included,
the discrete Cartesian receptors that allows for grouping of receptors, e.g., along arcs. This receptor option
was designed to be used with the EVALFILE option which is described below.
Two additional output file options were included in AERMOD. One type of file lists concentrations by rank
(RANKFILE). The other type of output file (EVALFILE) provides arc maxima results along with detailed
information about the plume characteristics associated with the arc maximum.

About AERMOD MPI

The current USEPA AERMOD executable is not capable of using multiple processors, now the norm with new
computers, which come with at least a dual-core CPU (Central Processing Unit). However, the AERMOD source
code is structured in such a way that it can be modified to take advantage of these new computers with multiple
processors.

2
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 1 - Introduction

There are many ways to “parallelize” AERMOD. One would be to process each source, by hour, on different
processor. This approach would work fine for models with many similar source types, such as dozens of stacks.
Some of the major drawbacks of this approach are:

1: Models with few sources of the same type processors in a computer would be idle and therefore this
approach would not maximize the use of all available processors. This would be the case of a model with 3
stacks and a QUAD-Core CPU. In this case only 3 processors would be working.

2: Models with different source types will cause processors to stay on waiting states. This happens in cases
where a CPU would finish a source and have to wait for other processors to finish a slower-processing
source. For example, Point source will process faster than Area sources, forcing faster source processors to
wait for slower ones to complete, before proceeding to the next hour.

A better way to “parallelize” the AERMOD source code is to split receptors to the many processors. The two
problem described above, among other ones, are then resolved. Note that each sources type will process all the
receptors on different processors automatically eliminating issue number 2 above. That is for point sources all
the receptors are processed with about the same speed and processors do not have to wait for “slower”
receptors.

In particular, receptors are processed independently of each other (with some notable exceptions), allowing
them to be processed on different processors in a parallel fashion. The exceptions are the NOX to NO2
conversion algorithms: OLM and PVMRM.

Lakes Environmental has adjusted the AERMOD source code, and recompiled the model to parallelize the
processing of receptors, except where known AERMOD bugs exist (i.e. OLM and PVMRM). The modifications to
the source code have been kept as minimal as possible, with the intention of achieving identical results to those
of the original EPA executable.

Processing speed gains indicate that as the number of processors in the computer increases:

The reduction in processing time reduces approximate linearly with the number of processors.
For a 4-processor computer the gain in processing speed is approximately 3.75 faster.
For an 8-processor the total processing time is reduced by almost 8 times.

How to Activate AERMOD MPI

1: Make sure you have installed AERMOD MPI.

2: Open the Preferences dialog by clicking File | Preferences from the menu.

3: In the Preferences dialog, select EPA Models/Limits | AERMOD. The Preferences - EPA Models/Limits -
AERMOD dialog displays.

4: Make s sure that the Default radio button is selected, and select AERMOD_MPI_Lakes_07026.EXE
from the drop-down list.

5: Click the OK button to save the changes.

AERMOD View will automatically recognize this as a parallel version of the AERMOD executable and use it
accordingly.

3
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 1 - Introduction AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The ISCST3 Model

The ISCST3 (Industrial Source Complex - Short Term version 3) dispersion model is a steady-state Gaussian
plume model which can be used to assess pollutant concentrations and/or deposition fluxes from a wide variety
of sources associated with an industrial source complex. The ISCST3 dispersion model from the U. S.
Environmental Protection Agency, was designed to support the EPA’s regulatory modeling options, as specified in
the Guidelines on Air Quality Models (Revised). Some of the ISCST3 modeling capabilities are:

ISCST3 model may be used to model primary pollutants and continuous releases of toxic and hazardous
waste pollutants.
ISCST3 model can handle multiple sources, including point, volume, area, and open pit source types. Line
sources may also be modeled as a string of volume sources or as elongated area sources.
Source emission rates can be treated as constant or may be varied by month, season, hour-of-day, or other
optional periods of variation. These variable emission rate factors may be specified for a single source or
for a group of sources.
The model can account for the effects of aerodynamic downwash due to nearby buildings on point source
emissions.
The model contains algorithms for modeling the effects of settling and removal (through dry deposition) of
large particulates and for modeling the effects of precipitation scavenging for gases or particulates.
Receptor locations can be specified as gridded and/or discrete receptors in a Cartesian or polar coordinate
system.
ISCST3 incorporates the COMPLEX1 screening model dispersion algorithms for receptors in complex terrain.
ISCST3 model uses real-time meteorological data to account for the atmospheric conditions that affect the
distribution of air pollution impacts on the modeling area.
Results can be output for concentration, total deposition flux, dry deposition flux, and/or wet deposition
flux.

The ISC-PRIME Model

The Plume Rise Model Enhancements (PRIME) model was designed to incorporate the two fundamental
features associated with building downwash:

Enhanced plume dispersion coefficients due to the turbulent wake

Reduced plume rise caused by a combination of the descending streamlines in the lee of the building and
the increased entrainment in the wake.

The PRIME algorithms have been integrated into the ISCST model and called the ISC-PRIME model which
contains the same basic options as the ISCST3 model but with enhanced building downwash analysis. ISC-
PRIME uses the standard ISCST3 input file with some modifications. These modifications allow the specification
of three new inputs used to describe the building/stack configuration. These new inputs are as follows:

BUILDLEN: Projected length of the building along the flow

XBADJ: Along-flow distance from the stack to the center of the upwind face of the projected building.
YBADJ: Across-flow distance from the stack to the center of the upwind face of the projected building.

To be able to run the ISC-PRIME model, you must first run the BPIP-PRIME model. The BPIP-PRIME building
downwash output results are then used by the ISC-PRIME model.

All the remaining options for the ISC-PRIME model are the same as for the ISCST3 model. However, some
enhancements of the ISCST3 model are currently not being supported in ISC-PRIME such as:

4
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 1 - Introduction

Post-97 PM10 Processing

Memory Allocation
INCLUDED Option
TOXICS Option
Sampled Chronological Input Model (SCIM) Option
Optimized Area Source and Dry Depletion Algorithms
Gas Dry Deposition Algorithm
Season by Hour-of-Day Output Option (SEASONHR)

Note: See a detailed description on these options on the ADDENDUM for the User’s
Guide for the Industrial Source Complex (ISC3) Dispersion Models - Volume 1 –
User Instructions (February 2002).

Interface Overview
AERMOD View features a friendly, intuitive interface which provides easy access to all modeling tools and
simultaneous visualization of your project.

The components of the AERMOD View interface are briefly described below:

5
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 1 - Introduction AERMOD View™ User's Guide

1: Menu Bar: Displays menu names. To open a menu, move the mouse over the menu name and then click
the left mouse button. A drop-down menu appears displaying a list of related commands.

2: Toolbar Buttons: These are a series of buttons that provide a fast method of selecting some of the menu
commands.

3: Tree View: This display option can be turned on or off at any time. The Tree View has four tabs -

Input tab: displays the AERMOD input options specified for the current project.
Labels tab: allows you to turn the layer labels on or off.
Overlays tab: enables you to specify which layers are visible in the drawing area.
Plots tab: displays the available output plot files for the current project run. This tab is displayed only
after you have successfully run your project.

4: Application Toolbar: The tools available in the Application Toolbar allow you to graphically define the
location of your sources, buildings, grids, and other objects. The Application Toolbar can be docked or
floating.

5: Annotation Toolbar: The tools available in the Annotation Toolbar allow you to manage the contents of
the drawing area and enhance the presentation of your modeling project. With these tools you can select
objects, delete, zoom in and out of a section of the drawing area, control the display of overlays and import
base maps. The Annotation Toolbar can be docked or floating.

6: Drawing Area: This is the large white area of the main interface in which your project objects such as
sources, buildings and grids are displayed graphically. Here, you can visualize maps, graphically specify
objects and view model results.

7: Axis Labels: X and Y-axis labels are placed on the top and left side of the drawing area. These labels
display the real coordinate values for the modeling area. The Axis can be modified in the Ruler Options
page.

8: Site Domain Boundary: This is the gray dashed line that indicates the limits of the modeling domain.

9: Color Ramp: The Color Ramp displays the colors you selected for your contours from the Graphical
Options dialog. You have the option of displaying or hiding the color ramp and choosing its location in the
main window

10: Coordinates Panel: This area displays the X and Y coordinates of the location where the mouse cursor is
pointing.

11: Graphical Output Toolbar: The tools available on the Graphical Output Toolbar allow you to easily turn
on and off contouring, posting of results, and select the plotfile to be displayed in the drawing area.

6
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow

CHAPTER 2 AERMOD VIEW WORKFLOW

AERMOD View Workflow

Getting Started

Creating a New Project

Setting Up Projects

Running Projects

Visualizing Your Output

Getting Started
AERMOD View projects have four essential stages. This chapter provides a high-level overview of each stage and
its constituent steps.

1. Creating a new project — When you create a new project, you can opt to create a project from scratch or
based on an existing modeling file.
2. Setting up a modeling project — When setting up a modeling project, you must specify the inputs that the
model requires, including meteorological data, sources, buildings, and receptors.
3. Running the model — After your project inputs are defined, you can run the model. This stage also includes
checks to ensure that your project is complete.
4. Visualizing model results — After a successful modeling run, AERMOD View provides several powerful
methods to view and analyze your results.

While AERMOD View provides many tools and options for your project, these are the basic stages necessary to
create and run a modeling project.

Creating a New Project

You create new projects with the New Project Wizard. In order to create a new project, you must know the
following parameters before you start:

the map projection and datum for your modeling area

the coordinates, expressed in the correct projection, for the project's reference point
the modeling area dimensions that you wish to use

How to Create a New Project

1: Start the New Project Wizard. There are two ways to access the wizard:

Select File | New Project from the menu

Click the New ( ) button on the Menu Toolbar.

2: The New Project Wizard contains several panels, which you must complete sequentially:

The Create New Project panel, in which you can elect to create a project from scratch, or from an
importing from an existing model input file.

7
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The Project File Name panel, in which you must supply a name and location for the project.
The Project Coordinate System panel, in which you must set the project projection and projection
parameters.
The Reference Point panel, in which you must set a reference point and the modeling area dimensions.

Use the Back and Next buttons to navigate through the wizard.

Note: The Project Reference Point panel only displays if you are creating a new
project from scratch.

3: On the final panel, click the Finish button to create the new project.

Setting Up Projects
To set up a new AERMOD View project, you must create a project file, and then configure the model inputs.

The model inputs for an AERMOD View project can be separated into two groups: those that are required by a
model run, and those that assist with visualizing your projects.

While base maps are not strictly required, it is helpful to start by importing one or more base maps.

Required Inputs

Control Data - control data includes information about the location of the project, including the coordinates
and surface roughness length.
Source Data- source data includes location and pollutant and emission rates information.
Receptor Data - receptor data can be specified for discrete receptors and receptor grids.
Meteorological Data - meteorological data includes wind speed and direction, as well as date and
anemometer information.
Building Inputs Data - building inputs include the type, location, and size of relevant buildings that could
affect the model run.
Terrain Data - terrain inputs include the type of terrain (flat or complex) and the terrain data file, which
specifies the elevation data for the surrounding area.
Output Data - output data includes output options for a particular run such as contour plot files and
threshold violation files

Visualization Inputs

Base Maps - maps can be imported into your project to allow you to visualize the existing buildings and
terrain.
Annotation Tools - several annotation tools allow you to mark important features of the project.

8
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow

Importing Maps

Imported base maps allow you to visualize your inputs within the context of the actual modeling site. AERMOD
View allows you to import base maps of the following types:

Bitmap/JPEG/TIFF/GeoTIFF/MrSID
DLG
DXF
LULC
Shapefile

How to Import Maps

1: Choose a base map file to import by:

Selecting Import | Base Maps > {Map Type} from the menu, or

Clicking the Map Import ( ) button on the Annotation toolbar and selecting the base map type from
the popup menu.

2: Depending on the type of map file you are importing, specify the required inputs:

For Bitmap/JPEG/TIFF/GeoTIFF/MrSID files, select a file; refer to Define Map Extents.

For DLG files, you must specify the file and parameters, which are outlined in Import DLG Base Map.
For DXF files, you must specify the file and parameters, which are outlined in Import DXF Base Map.
For LULC files, you must specify the file and parameters, which are outlined in Import LULC Base Map.
For Shapefile files, you must specify the file and parameters, which are outlined in Import ArcView
Shapefile.

3: After you have completed the import, you can show and hide the map using the Overlays tab of the Tree
View.

Specifying Control Pathway Options

Control options allow you to set the general project options.

How to Specify Control Pathway Options

1: Open the Control Pathway dialog. There are two ways to access the dialog:

Select Data | Control Pathway from the menu

Click the Control ( ) button on the Menu Toolbar.

2: Enter the required parameters. A full explanation of each field is available in the Control Pathway dialog
interface description.

3: To finalize your changes, click the OK button.

9
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Specifying Sources

Source data allows you to specify all required information about one or more emission sources. In order to set
up the source data for your project, you must first specify your source(s).

Sources can be entered using the Source Inputs dialog or by importing from an external file.

How to Specify Sources

1: Open the Source Pathway dialog. There are three ways to access the dialog:

Select the appropriate source tool from the Application toolbar and click the GIS display in the location
where the source should be located.
Select Data | Source Pathway from the menu

Click the Source ( ) button on the Menu Toolbar.

2: Enter the required parameters. A full explanation of each field is available in the Source Pathway dialog
interface description.

3: If you wish to enter more than one source, click the New button on the Record Navigator.

4: To finalize your changes, click the Close button.

How to Import Sources

1: Select Import | Sources from the menu.

2: Select the appropriate file and click Open.

3: A confirmation dialog will appear confirming the number of sources that were imported. Click the OK button.

Specifying Receptors

AERMOD View allows you to receptor locations for a particular run, define the number and type of receptors in
your project, delete selected receptors, define receptor groups, and flagpole options. AERMOD View allows
receptor grids, discrete receptors, fenceline receptors, and terrain grids.

How to Specify Receptors

1: Open the Receptor dialog. There are three ways to access the dialog:

Select the appropriate receptor from the Application toolbar and click the GIS display in the location
where the receptor should be located to start drawing the grid. When you complete the grid, the dialog
will open.
Select Data | Receptor Pathway... from the menu.

Click the Receptor button ( ) on the Menu Toolbar.

2: Enter the required parameters. A full explanation of each field is available in the appropriate Receptor
Pathway interface description.

10
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow

The available receptor pathway options are:

Receptor Summary Terrain Options

Uniform Cartesian Grid Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid
Uniform Polar Grid Non-Uniform Polar Grid
Multi-Tier Grid Discrete Cartesian Receptors
Discrete Polar Receptors Discrete ARC Receptors
Cartesian Plant Boundary Polar Plant Boundary
Fenceline Grid Terrain Grid Options

3: If you wish to enter more receptor entries, click the New button on the Record Navigator.

4: To finalize your changes, click the Close button.

Specifying Meteorology Pathway Options

Meteorology options allow you to specify the meteorological (met) data files you want to use for your modeling
project. In order to set up the met data for your project, you must know the following parameters before you
start:

the name and location of the met data files

the location information for the met stations
the surface station primary met tower elevation

How to Specify Meteorology Pathway Options

1: Open the Meteorology Pathway dialog. There are two ways to access the dialog:

Select Data | Meteorology Pathway from the menu

Click the Met ( ) button on the Menu Toolbar.

2: Enter the required parameters. A full explanation of each field is available in the Meteorology Pathway
dialog interface description.

3: To finalize your changes, click the OK button.

11
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Specifying Buildings

Building data allows you to specify all required information about one or more buildings. Buildings that are close
to a source can affect the dispersion of pollution from the source. In order to set up the building data for your
project, you must know the location and parameters of the buildings.

Buildings can be entered using the Building Inputs dialog or by importing from an external file.

How to Specify Buildings

1: Open the Building Inputs dialog. There are three ways to access the dialog:

Select the appropriate building tool from the Application toolbar and click the GIS display in the location
where the receptor should be located to start drawing the building. When you complete the building,
the dialog will open.
Select Data | Building Options > Building Inputs from the menu

Click the Building button ( ) on the Menu Toolbar.

2: Enter the required parameters. A full explanation of each field is available in the Building Input dialog
interface description.

3: If you wish to enter more than one building, click the New button on the Record Navigator.

4: To finalize your changes, click the Close button.

How to Import Buildings

1: Select Import | Buildings from the menu, and the appropriate building type from the sub-menu. Buildings
can be imported from AutoCAD DXF files and BPIP input files.

2: Select the appropriate file to import and click Open.

3: A confirmation dialog will appear confirming the number of buildings that were imported. Click the OK
button.

Specifying Terrain

Specifying terrain data allows you to include the effects of terrain on pollution dispersion in the model run. Flat
terrain has a neutral effect on the model run. The effect of complex terrain on the dispersion of pollutants
depends on the parameters of the terrain.

If you are running a project with flat terrain, which is the default, you will not have to configure any settings. If
your project requires complex terrain, you will need to specify a digital terrain data file in the supported format,
and then configure settings on the Region to Import, Import Elevations and Advanced tabs.

How to Specify Complex Terrain Options

1: Open the Terrain Processor dialog by clicking the Terrain button ( ) on the Menu Toolbar.

2: In the Terrain Options panel, determine whether the terrain will be Flat or Elevated.

3: Select a Map Type from the drop down list.

12
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow

4: Import the appropriate terrain data files in the Terrain tab.

5: Set the extent of the terrain files that should be used when converting the terrain data file to a GridASCII
Terrain File in the Region to Import tab.

6: Set the elevations in the Import Elevations tab, and the point selection and point sampling options in the
Advanced tab.

7: Click the Process + Run AERMAP button to process the data. Click OK to close the Terrain Processor.

Specifying Output Options

Meteorological options allow you to specify the meteorological (met) data file you want to use for your modeling
project. In order to set up the met data for your project, you must know the following parameters before you
start:

How to Specify Output Pathway Options

1: Open the Output Pathway dialog. There are two ways to access the dialog:

Select Data | Output Pathway from the menu

Click the Output ( ) button on the Menu Toolbar.

2: Enter the required parameters. A full explanation of each field is available in the Output Pathway dialog
interface description.

3: To finalize your changes, click the OK button.

Annotating a Project

AERMOD View provides several tools to annotate your project. These tools are located on the Annotation
Toolbar. The tools provided can be grouped into several types:

Region Annotation Tools: These tools allow you to draw a shape covering part of the drawing area in order
to mark some feature of the modeling domain. For instance, all residential areas within the modeling
domain could be denoted with a red border and yellow hatching.
Rectangle Annotation Tool
Circle Annotation Tool
Polygon Annotation Tool
Spot Annotation Tools: These tools allow you to place an annotation at a specific point on the drawing area.
For instance, you can use the Text Annotation Tool to label a discrete receptor on the drawing area as a
school.
Text Annotation Tool
Marker Annotation Tool
Arrow Annotation Tool.
Directional Annotation Tools: These tools allow you to give context to the modeling domain. For instance,
you can annotate the drawing area with a North Arrow, or a polar grid to indicate scale for graphical
visualization of the modeling area and its dimensions.
North Arrow Annotation Tool
Web Annotation Tool

13
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Annotations can be displayed or hidden using the Overlays Tab of the Tree View. Hiding annotations does not
remove them from the project; they can still be accessed by showing them again.

How to Annotate Projects

1: Click the annotation tool you wish to use on the Annotation Toolbar.

2: Click on the drawing area in the location that you wish to annotate; some annotation tools require you to
draw a shape; refer to the links above for specific details about each annotation tool. Once the annotation is
complete, the appropriate dialog displays.

3: Enter any necessary parameters within the dialog, and click the OK button. The annotation displays on the
drawing area.

Running Projects
To run an AERMOD View project, you must first determine that you have a complete project, and then run the
project.

Checking Modeling Input Files

Before running the model, you can check the input to make sure that nothing is missing or incomplete. An
example of missing info would be if somehow no sources were specified in the project. An example of
incomplete information would be if elevated terrain was specified in the project, but no hill heights were
specified for discrete receptors.

If there is any missing or incomplete data, you must fix it before running the project.

How to Check Project Completeness

1: Select Run | Details from the menu.

2: The Details dialog opens with a status message displayed:

If the project is complete, the dialog displays ALL Data Completed!

If the project is incomplete, the dialog displays The Following Information is Missing or
Incomplete !!!

3: If there is missing or incomplete data in the project, you can print the Details report, in order to have a list
of items to fix, by clicking the Print button.

4: Close the dialog:

If the project is complete, you can run the project.

If the project is incomplete, fix the missing or incomplete data, and recheck the project.

14
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow

Running the Model

Before running the model, you should check the input files to make sure that nothing is missing or incomplete.

How to Run the Model

1: Access the Project Status dialog. There are two ways to access this dialog:

Select Run | Run AERMOD... from the menu.

Click the Run ( ) button.

2: The Project Status dialog displays a brief summary of your selected options (e.g. number of sources,
monitor points, type of calculation grid, etc.) You will also be asked some questions about your run.

If you have not checked your project and it is incomplete, the bottom of the dialog will contain a message
stating that the project appears to be incomplete. Click the Details button to see the missing or incomplete
data.

3: If the project is complete, you can run the project by clicking the Run button.

Visualizing Your Output

Once you have completed a successful model run, AERMOD View provides multiple tools to view and analyze
output results.

Viewing Model Results - Calculation results can be displayed graphically in the drawing area in the form of
contours (isopleths) or shaded cells.

Viewing 3D Model Results - Calculation results can be displayed in 3D using in 3D View.

Generating Reports - The output results can be viewed as a report.

Exporting to Google Earth™ - Output results, along with inputs like sources and buildings, can be output to a
KML file that can then be opened in Google Earth.

Viewing Model Results

The results output read from the DMNA files created after the model run can be viewed in the drawing area.

How to View Model Results

1: After the run is complete, you will see a status message stating that the run was successful and asking if
you wish to view the log file or output file.

2: On the drawing area, you will see the shaded cells, which display the results by a range of colors according
to results for the currently selected model results. The Color Ramp on the right displays the key to the
contours. To see the pollutant and averaging time specific output file results, click the Plots tab of the
navigation tree.

3: To see the pollutant and averaging time specific output file results, click the Plots tab of the navigation tree.

15
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Changing Result Appearance

The appearance of the results in the drawing area can be changed using the many options available in the
Graphical Options dialog. In order to better analyze your results, you can change the appearance of:

Posting - configurable settings include the label font, size, color, format, and orientation, as well as the
marker style
Contours - the levels, smoothing, labeling, and color ramp are configurable
Terrain - the levels, smoothing, labeling, and color ramp are configurable
Ruler Options- configurable settings include the scale font, size, and color, and the appearance of the axis
titles
Labels - font appearance settings are configurable for each layer of the inputs (for example, for point
sources or monitor points) and include the font face, format, orientation, and anchor.
Color Mappings - Color and display settings are configurable for discrete receptors and imported
shapefiles.

How to Change the Appearance of Results

1: Open the Graphical Options dialog. There are two ways to access the dialog:

Select Output | Graphical Options from the menu.

Click the Options button on the Menu Toolbar.

2: Locate the item you wish to modify. For example, to change the appearance and scale of the contours,
select Levels under the Contours folder.

3: Make the necessary changes and click the Apply button. Check to see if the options you selected are
correct. In the example above, you could add an additional level, and change the values and colors of the
existing levels.

4: When you are done, click the OK button to close the dialog or the Cancel button to cancel your changes.

Printing Results

You can print the model results as they are displayed in the drawing area.

How to Print

1: Open the Print Preview dialog. There are two ways to access the dialog:

Select File | Print from the menu.

Click the Print ( ) button on the Menu Toolbar.

2: In the Print Preview dialog, you can set several options to optimize your printed output. These include the
page orientation and margin, and an ability to set a user defined scale. As well, you can access the
Preferences dialog, where you can set global printing preferences.

3: When you are finished setting your printing options, click the Print button.

16
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow

Viewing 3D Model Results

The results output read from the files created after the model run can be viewed in 3D View.

How to View 3D Model Results

1: After a successful run, launch 3D View by clicking the 3D View ( ) button.

2: On the drawing area of 3D View, you will see a 3-dimensional visualization of buildings, sources, monitor
points, calculation grid, and modeling results.

3: You can zoom in and rotate your site, and change the view by setting the rotation and zoom speed, and
vertical exaggeration.

Generating Reports

AERMOD View allows you to generate reports, which summarize the source emission and source parameter
information specified for your project, as well as the location and parameters of all your monitor and analysis
points.

Reports can be printed, as well as exported to multiple formats, including PDF and Microsoft® Word®
documents and Excel® spreadsheets.

How to Generate a Report

1: Open the Reports dialog. There are two ways to access the dialog by clicking the Report ( ) button on
the Menu Toolbar.

2: The preview pane on the left displays a sample report. To specify the report contents:

select the model results to report by selecting the appropriate radio button
select, using the checkboxes, the desired report(s)

3: Click the Print ( ) button.

Exporting to Google Earth™

You can export layers/overlays from your modeling project to a KML (Keyhole Markup Language) file that can
then be opened in Google Earth. This allows you to clearly envision your project and its results using the high
quality images provided by Google Earth. Layers/overlays must be present in a project to be exported to Google
Earth.

For information about using Google Earth, please see the Google Earth webpage.

See Also: Refer to Google Earth Licensing in the help files for
important information about using Google Earth.

17
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 2 - AERMOD View Workflow AERMOD View™ User's Guide

How to Export to Google Earth

1: Select Export | Google Earth... from the menu.

2: Select the folder in which to save the KML files; by default, the folder is named <projectName>.KML, and is
located inside the project folder. To change this, select the Select Folder button ( ) and specify a new
location.

3: In the Layers to Export list, leave checked all of the layers that you wish to include in the exported KML file.
Click the checkbox to uncheck any layers that you do not wish to include.

Click to see the layers that can be exported from a modeling project.
Buildings - The list below shows the types of building layers that can be exported to Google Earth.
Buildings are exported as 3D shapes according to their specified locations and dimensions.
Circular Buildings
Polygonal Buildings
Rectangular Buildings
Contours - The currently displayed contours for the model results, also known as isopleths, are
exported to Google Earth as they are shown in the drawing area. Each contour level/color will be
exported separately allowing you to turn on/off the display of a specific level. A representation of the
color ramp is also exported and can be turned on/off under the Legend layer. Use the Alpha Blend color
option for transparency effects in Google Earth.
Receptor Grids - each receptor grid (discrete Cartesian, nested, etc) can be exported to Google Earth
discretely
Site Domain Border - This layer displays the site domain border, as defined in the Site Domain dialog
Sources - This layer displays the location and 3D representation of the several source types:
Point Sources
Flare Sources
Area Sources (Area, Angled Area, Circular Area, and Polygon Area)
Line Sources
Volume Sources
Terrain Contours - This layer displays the isopleths (contours) for the terrain data that is currently
displayed in your project. Use the Alpha Blend color option for transparency effects in Google Earth

4: By default, Google Earth will be launched after the project is exported to a KML file. If you do not wish to
launch Google Earth right away, uncheck the Launch Google Earth Automatically box; AERMOD View will
only generate the KML files for future use.

5: If you wish to change the map projection/datum of the project, click the Map Projection button and set the
Projection, Datum, and UTM Zone for the exported file in the Map Projection dialog.

Note: It is extremely important that before you export to Google Earth, you check the
map projection/datum for the project. This ensures that AERMOD View will
output your project layers to the correct position on Earth.

6: Click the Export button to export the project layers to the KML file.

18
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

CHAPTER 3 INPUT PATHWAYS

Input Pathways

Control Pathway

Source Pathway

Receptor Pathway

Terrain Grid Pathway

Meteorology Pathway

Output Pathway

Control Pathway
The Control Pathway allows you to specify the overall job control options such as dispersion options, pollutant
and averaging times. You have access to the Control Pathway dialog by select Data | Control Pathway...
from the menu or by clicking on the Control menu toolbar button.

The Control Pathway dialog uses a two-pane view. The tree located on the left side of the dialog is used for
navigation and item selection. Select an item (marked as ) in the tree to display the available options on the
right panel.

As a rule, you should start inputting data first on this window, since most of the information requested here will
be needed to complete other inputs. The Control Pathway contains several pages; some pages are only
available when certain options are selected (e.g. the NOx to NO2 page is only available once the non-default
option for modeling conversion of NOx to NO2 is enabled). The settings available on each page of the Control
Pathway are described in the sections below.

Dispersion Options

In the Dispersion Options page, you can specify project titles and dispersion options such as output type,
plume depletion and non-default options. Select Control Pathway - Dispersion Options from the tree
located on the left side of the Control Pathway dialog, to display the available dispersion options.

Control Pathway dialog - Dispersion Options

19
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The following options must be specified:

Titles

Specify your project title. You may specify up to two lines of title information, each line accepts 68 characters
including spaces. AERMOD View places the name and location of your project as the default title in the first title
text box but you may change this at any time. The first title line is mandatory, you must specify a title here but
the second title line is optional.

Dispersion Options

For each model you have two main options in the Dispersion Options panel -

Regulatory Default

This option specifies that the following regulatory default options will be used for each model:

AERMOD Model
Use stack-tip downwash (except for Schulman-Scire downwash)
Incorporate the effects of elevated terrain
Use the calms processing routines
Use missing data processing routine
Use upper-bound concentration estimates for sources influenced by building downwash from super-
squat buildings
Use a 4-hour half life for exponential decay of SO2 for urban sources

ISCST3 & ISC PRIME Models

Use stack-tip downwash (except for Schulman-Scire downwash)
Use buoyancy-induced dispersion (except for Schulman-Scire downwash)
Do not use gradual plume rise (except for building downwash)
Use the calms processing routines
Use upper-bound concentration estimates for sources influenced by building downwash from super-
squat buildings
Use default wind speed profile exponents
Use default vertical potential temperature gradients

Non-Default Options

If this option is selected you must specify at least one of the following non-default options -

ISCST3 & ISC PRIME Models

No stack-tip downwash
Missing data processing routine
Bypass the calms processing routine
Gradual plume rise
No buoyancy-induced dispersion

20
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Vertical term adjustment if HE>ZI ISCST3 Only

TOXICS ISCST3 Only

AERMOD Model
No stack-tip downwash
Run in screening mode
By-pass date checking for non-sequential met data file
Option for modeling conversion of NOx to NO2 (see NOX to NO2)

Note: If the option for modeling conversion of NOx to NO2 is checked, the pollutant
type is automatically set to NO2.

TOXICS
Flat terrain
Capped and Horizontal Stack Releases (BETA)

If you select the Output Type

Regulatory Default Plume Depletion
option, you must specify:
Output Warnings

If you choose the Non- Output Type

Default Options you Output Warnings
must specify:
At least one of the Non-Default Options. Check the box of the specific non-
default option you wish to use. If you check the TOXICS option, several
additional parameters become available for selection.

Output Type

For each model, as you specify your Dispersion Options you must specify the output type.

You may select any or all of the following output types available:

Concentration: This specifies that concentration values will be calculated. This is the default option and
is automatically selected by AERMOD View.
Total Deposition: Check this option to calculate total deposition (dry and wet) flux values.
Dry Deposition: This option specifies that dry deposition flux values only will be calculated.
Wet Deposition: Select this option to calculate wet deposition flux values.

21
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Note: If you wish to model Total Deposition, Dry Deposition, and/or Wet Deposition
using AERMOD you must select the TOXICS option as the deposition algorithms
for the AERMOD model are non-regulatory default options.

Note: If you select the Total Deposition option or the Wet Deposition option, then you
MUST define scavenging coefficients for particulate sources or gaseous sources
on the Gas & Particle Data window.

Note: When modeling with the Total Deposition option or the Dry Deposition option,
you MUST include particle information for each source on the Gas & Particle Data
window.

Plume Depletion ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME Only

When particles are modeled, a settling velocity and a deposition velocity are calculated for each size category.
The settling velocity causes the plume to "tilt" towards the surface (if the plume is elevated) as it travels
downwind, while the deposition velocity is used to calculate the flux of the matter deposited at the surface.
When the plume depletion option is included, particle mass is removed from the plume as it is deposited on the
surface, thereby conserving mass.

If plume depletion (either dry or wet removal) is not included, then the mass of particles deposited on the
surface from gravitational settling and/or precipitation scavenging is not removed from the plume. The no
depletion option may be acceptable if deposition is weak, and it will result in an overestimate of both
concentrations and deposition.

Note: In AERMOD version 04300 and up, dry and wet depletion are no longer optional
for deposition applications. These options for removal of mass from the plume
due to dry and/or wet deposition processes will automatically be invoked for
applications in which dry and/or wet deposition are considered. You may still
import older AERMOD input files, the DRYDPLT and WETDPLT options will be
ignored and the model will still run.

You can select either one, both, or none of the following plume depletion options -

Dry Removal: Specifies that plume depletion due to dry removal mechanisms will be included in the
calculations.
Wet Removal: Specifies that plume depletion due to wet removal mechanisms will be included in the
calculations.

Note: If the Wet Removal option is selected, than you MUST specify scavenging
coefficients in the Gas & Particle Data window.

22
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Note: If the Dry Removal option is selected, than you MUST specify particle information
in the Gas & Particle Data window.

Note: Plume depletion calculations will result in significantly longer execution times for
the model, since the model must integrate along the plume path between the
source and receptor. The amount of increase in execution time will vary
depending on source characteristics and the terrain.

TOXICS ISCST3 & AERMOD Only

The TOXICS option is a non-default dispersion option and therefore only available if the Non-Default Options
and the TOXICS option are selected for your modeling project.

ISCST3

AERMOD

The following non-default TOXICS options are available:

SCIM: The non-default SCIM (Sampled Chronological Input Model) option is used to reduce model runtime
and is primarily applicable to multi-year model simulations. The SCIM option samples the meteorological
data at a user-specified regular interval to approximate the long-term average impacts. The SCIM option
has the following restrictions:
It can only be used with the ANNUAL average option.
You must specify the SCIM sampling parameters in the SCIM Sampling window.
ISCST3 Only —The Total Deposition option is ignored. You are advised to calculate dry and wet
deposition rates separately using the Dry Deposition and Wet Deposition options and to add the two to
obtain the total deposition rate when the SCIM option is used.
Gas Dry Deposition: This non-default option allows you to model the effects of dry deposition for
gaseous pollutants. If this option is selected, the Gas Dry Deposition screen becomes available where you
must specify gas dry deposition parameters. In addition, you are requested to specify source parameters
for the gas dry deposition option only if the deposition velocities are being calculated by the model. These
source parameters must be specified in the Gas & Particle Data screen in the Source Pathway.

Note: ISCST3 Only —If you are using this option, your meteorological file must be
preprocessed using MPRM (Meteorological Preprocessor for Regulatory Models)
due to the fact that PCRAMMET does not support preprocessing for gas dry
deposition. The deposition algorithms require additional meteorological

23
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

variables, which can be provided by the U.S. EPA MPRM meteorological

preprocessor. If the gas dry deposition algorithm option is being used, then the
unformatted met data file option cannot be used.

Optimized Area Source and Dry Depletion: ISCST3 Only—This option is available to reduce model
runtime for area sources. The model will apply a single “effective” depletion factor to the undepleted area
source integral, rather than applying the numerical integration for depletion within the area source integral.
If this option is selected, then the Plume Depletion due to Dry Removal option for non-area sources is
automatically selected.
Season by Hour-of-Day Output Option: ISCST3 Only—When selecting this non-default option, you
may request an output file containing the average results (Concentration, Total Deposition, Dry Deposition,
Wet Deposition) by season and hour-of-day. To select this option you must specify the required parameters
in the Season Hour Files window, located in the Output Pathway.
Output Type: AERMOD Only —The deposition algorithms for the AERMOD model are non-regulatory
default TOXICS options. Specify your deposition Output Type. In AERMOD version 04300 and higher, dry
and wet depletion will automatically be invoked for applications in which dry and/or wet deposition are
considered. You may still import older AERMOD input files, the DRYDPLT and WETDPLT options will be
ignored and the model will still run.

Output Warnings AERMOD Only

By default, warning messages are written to the output file. If you check the No Output Warnings box, the
detailed listing of warning messages in the main output file is suppressed. The number of warning messages is
still reported and warning messages are still included in the error listing file.

Pollutant/Averaging

In the Pollutant/Averaging page, you can specify the pollutant being modeled, averaging time and dispersion
coefficient. Select Control Pathway - Pollutant/Averaging from the tree located on the left side of the
Control Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Control Pathway dialog - Pollutant/Averaging

24
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

The following options are available:

Pollutant

In this panel you can select from the drop-down list the pollutant being modeled for a particular run. The
following pollutants are available:

SO2 - Sulfur Dioxide

NOx - Nitrogen Oxides
CO - Carbon Monoxide
TSP - Total Suspended Particulates
PM10 NAAQS - Particle Matter (10 Microns) National Ambient Air Quality Standard (see PM10 NAAQS
Analysis)
PM-2.5 NAAQS - AERMOD Only: Particle Matter (2.5 Microns) National Ambient Air Quality Standard
(see PM-2.5 NAAQS Analysis)
OTHER - If you wish to specify an alternate pollutant not in the list, you can select this option and enter the
pollutant name in the displayed text box.

Note: The only pollutant choices that currently have any impact on the results are
-
The selection of SO2 in conjunction with Urban Dispersion and the Regulatory Default
option. In this case, the model uses a half life of 4 hours for exponential decay.
The selection of PM10 NAAQS with the option for generating the high-sixth-high in five
years.

Exponential Decay

The Exponential Decay option is only available:

If you have selected the Regulatory Default option, the AERMOD model forces the use of a 4-hour half life
when modeling SO2 in Urban settings, and does not allow for exponential decay for other applications. If
these options were selected then AERMOD View automatically inputs the 4-hour half life and this cannot be
changed.
If you have selected the Non-Regulatory Default option.

Note: This option is not available with the Regulatory Default option + Rural Dispersion
Coefficient for any pollutant or with the Regulatory Default option + Urban
Dispersion Coefficient for any pollutant other than SO2.

To specify the pollutant exponential decay with the Non-Regulatory Default option, select Yes. The following
two options become available:

Half Life: Specify in the text box the half life for exponential decay in seconds.
Decay Coef: This option can be used to specify the decay coefficient in units of s-1. The relationship
between these parameters is-
Decay Coef. = 0.693 / Half Life

Averaging Time Options

The following averaging time options are available:

25
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Short-Term Averaging Periods: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 24
hours, and Month.
Period: Refers to the average for the entire data period.
Annual: Refers to the an annual average.

For ISCST3 and AERMOD you can select an unlimited number of short-term averages for a given run (memory
allocation). The original ISC-PRIME model has a maximum number of four short-term averages that can be
specified per run.

Note: For Concentration calculations, the Period and Annual averaging time options
produce the same results. Either one may be used to calculate the annual
average for a full year of meteorological data, or to calculate the period average
for a period other than a year.

Note: For Deposition calculations, the Hours option will not calculate an hourly
average deposition, instead, deposition will be expressed by the model output as
the mass of pollutants deposited over a unit area within a period of concern (i.e.
three hours if you have selected an hourly averaging time of three). The Period
option will provide a total deposition flux for the full period of meteorological
data that is modeled in units of g/m2, including multiple-year data files. The
Annual option will provide an annualized rate of the deposition flux in units of
g/m2/yr. For meteorological periods of less than a year, the Annual deposition
rate is determined by dividing by the length of the period in years. For
meteorological periods longer than a year, the model will assume that full years
of data are provided and divide by the number of years, rounded to the nearest
whole number.

Dispersion Coefficient

In this panel you may select either the Rural or Urban dispersion coefficient, depending on the characteristics
of the source location. The classification of a site as urban or rural, and thus the selection of either urban or
rural dispersion coefficients should be based upon either the Land Use Procedure or Population Density
Procedure:

Land Use Procedure: Circumscribe a 3 km radius circle, Ao, about the source using the meteorological
land use typing scheme -
if land use types I1, I2, C1, R2, and R3 account for 50 % or more of Ao, select the Urban option,
otherwise use the Rural option.
Population Density Procedure: Compute the average population density, p, per square kilometer with
Ao as defined above-
If p > 750 people/km2, select the Urban option,
If p <= 750 people/km2, select the Rural option.

Of the two methods above, the Land Use Procedure is considered a more definitive criterion. The
Population Density Procedure should be used with caution and should not be applied to highly industrialized
areas where the population density may be low and thus a rural classification would be indicated, but the area is
sufficiently built-up so that the urban land use criteria would be satisfied. In this case, the classification should
already be urban and urban dispersion parameters should be used.

26
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Urban Dispersion Option

This option is available in AERMOD only. Here you can incorporate the effects of increased surface heating
from an urban area on pollutant dispersion under stable atmospheric conditions. Choose either Urban or
Rural. If you select Urban, you must set values for the urban areas in the Urban Groups screen. This value will
also be set by checking or unchecking Urban Groups checkbox on the Urban Groups screen:

If the Urban Groups checkbox is checked, the Urban radio button will be selected
If the Urban Groups checkbox is cleared, the Rural radio button will be selected

PM-2.5 NAAQS Analysis

The AERMOD model version 07026 incorporates changes for the new PM-2.5 National Ambient Air Quality
Standard (NAAQS), promulgated by EPA in 1997 with revisions to the 24-hour standard in 2006.

For the PM-2.5 option, the model will compute an average of the 8th highest concentrations at each receptor
across the number of years of meteorological data being processed. If you are using a single year of met data,
then the model will report the 8th highest concentration at each receptor. If you are using a multi-year met file,
the model will calculate the eighth-highest concentration at each receptor for each year modeled, averages
those eight-highest concentrations across the number of years of data, and then selects the highest across all
receptors of the N-year averaged eighth-highest values.

AERMOD View automatically selects the following options for processing if the pollutant selected from the
Pollutant Type drop-down list is PM-2.5NAAQS:

Averaging Time Options: 24-Hour and/or Annual (all other averaging time options will be disabled).
High Values: 8th highest value (all other high values will be disabled).

The following restriction applies to the PM-2.5 processing:

Multi-Year Analyses: This option will become disabled. Multiple year analyses cannot be used with the
PM-2.5 NAAQS. Multiple year analyses should be accomplished by including the multiple years of met data
in a single file.
Met Data: The model will only accept met data that spans complete years, although the met data period
does not need to follow calendar years (i.e., the period can span from June 1, 2001 to May 31, 2002). If
less than one complete year of data is processed, a fatal error message will be generated. If additional met
data remains after the end of the last complete year of data, the remaining data will be ignored and a non-
fatal warning message will be generated in the output file.
EVENT Input File: The EVENT Input File option (EVENFIL) can only be used in conjunction with the
MAXIFILE option.

PM10 NAAQS Analysis

The 24-hour NAAQS for particulate matter with aerodynamic particle diameters of 10 microns or less (PM-10) is
in the form of an expected exceedance value, which cannot be exceeded more than once per year on average
over a three year period for purposes of attainment demonstrations. Modeling demonstrations of compliance
with the PM-10 NAAQS are based on the High-N+1-High value over N years, or in the case of five years of NWS
meteorological data, the High-6th-High (H6H) over five years. In the AERMOD model, the H6H 24-hour average
over five years can be modeled in one of two ways:

Running five individual years and combining the results using the CO MULTYEAR option
Using a single five-year meteorological data file and specifying the SIXTH (or 6TH) highest value on the OU
RECTABLE card.

27
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

If applied properly, the results of these two approaches will be equivalent. The special processing consisting of
the 99th percentile 24-hour value averaged over N years for PM-10 in previous versions of AERMOD, referred to
as the “Post-1997” PM-10 option, has been removed since that standard was vacated.

Terrain Options

In the Terrain Options page, you can specify whether you will be modeling the effects of terrain above stack
base, in order to be able to input elevated receptor heights and also specify receptor elevations above ground
level to model flagpole receptors. Select Control Pathway - Terrain Options from the tree located on the left
side of the Control Pathway dialog, to display the available terrain height and flagpole receptor options.

Control Pathway dialog - Terrain Options - ISC

The following options are available:

Terrain Height Options

You may select from two terrain height options -

Flat: This option assumes that the terrain height does not exceed stack base elevation, that is, terrain
height assumed to be 0.0 m. All receptors are assumed to be at the same elevation as the base elevation
for the source as the default mode of operation. Flat Terrain calculations are used throughout, and any
terrain elevations entered in the Receptor Pathway will be ignored.
Elevated: This option assumes terrain height exceeds stack base elevation. Select this option if you wish
to model receptors on elevated terrain. You must then enter terrain elevations for your receptors in the
Receptor Pathway. If elevated terrain is selected and receptor heights are not specified, then it is assumed
to have a value of 0.0 meters.

28
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Terrain Calculation Algorithms

ISCST3 and ISC-PRIME Only - In this panel you may select one of the following terrain calculation
algorithms:

Simple + Complex Terrain: This is the default option where the model implements both simple and
complex terrain algorithms and also applies intermediate terrain processing. In this case, the model will
select the higher of the simple and complex terrain calculations on an hour-by-hour, source-by-source and
receptor-by-receptor basis for receptors in intermediate terrain, that is, terrain between release height and
plume height.
Simple Terrain Only: This option specifies that no complex terrain calculations will be made and only
ISCST algorithms are used. You should not use this option if you are modeling with complex terrain (terrain
above the release height of the source).
Complex Terrain Only: This option is only available for the Elevated terrain height option. This option
specifies that no simple terrain calculations will be made, and only COMPLEX1 algorithms are used.

Note: For terrain above the release height of the source, the model automatically
truncates or chops the terrain to the physical release height when modeling
impacts at those receptors using the simple terrain algorithm (Simple Terrain
Only option). Terrain above the release height is not truncated when the
COMPLEX1 algorithm is used in ISCST3 (Complex Terrain Only option).

Note: There is no distinction in AERMOD between elevated terrain below release height
and terrain above release height, as with ISCST3 and ISC-PRIME that distinguish
between simple terrain and complex terrain.

Receptor Elevations/Hill Heights

AERMOD Only - In this panel you can select whether or not you wish to use the AERMAP ROU file as an
INCLUDED parameter.

Control Pathway dialog - Terrain Options - AERMOD

Run AERMOD using the AERMAP *.ROU: With this option, AERMOD View reads the receptors
elevations directly from the *.ROU file generated once AERMAP has run. You cannot modify receptor
elevations within the interface using this option.

29
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Run AERMOD using the Elevations/Hill Heights specified in your project: With this option,
AERMOD View copies the receptors elevations directly from the *.ROU file into the project input file. You
will then be able to modify receptor elevations directly within the interface.

NOx to NO2

AERMOD Only

The NOx to NO2 screen allows you to specify the modeling options for the conversion of NOx to NO2. Select
Control Pathway - NOx to NO2 from the tree located on the left side of the Control Pathway dialog, to
display the available options.

The NOx to NO2 screen is unavailable until you take the following steps:
Enable the Non-Default Option for modeling conversion of NOx to NO2 in the Dispersion Options screen of
the Control Pathway
Enable Modeling conversion of NOx to NO2 in the Dispersion Options screen of the Control Pathway.

Control Pathway dialog - NOx to NO2

Two modeling options are available for conversion of NOx to NO2:

OLM (Ozone Limiting Method): Select this option if you wish to use the Ozone Limiting Method for the
conversion of NOx to NO2.
PVMRM (Plume Volume Molar Ratio Method): Select this option if you wish to use the Plume Volume
Molar Ratio Method for the conversion of NOx to NO2.

Note: For a technical description of the PVMRM and OLM algorithms, please see the
Addendum to the AERMOD Model Formulation Document (MFD) available in the
US EPA SCRAM web site:
http://www.epa.gov/scram001/dispersion_prefrec.htm#aermod

Depending of the modeling option you selected (OLM or PVMRM), the following parameters are available:

Default In-Stack NO2/NOx Ratio: The PVMRM and OLM options require that an in-stack NO2/NOx ratio
be specified. A default value of 0.10 (10%) will be used for OLM for all sources unless a user-specified
value is provided for the source in the N02 Ratios screen of the Source Pathway dialog. For the PVMRM
option, the user must specify the in-stack NO2/NOx ratio by either a default value in the Control Pathway or
a source-specific value in Source Pathway - N02 Ratios or both. Please note that the default value specified
here will also be used in case the user did not specify a value sources in Source Pathway - N02 Ratios.

30
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

NO2/NOx Ambient Equilibrium Ratio: This option is applicable to the PVMRM option only. The default
value used by the model is 0.90 (90%). A user-specified value can be defined here between 0.10 and 1.0
(10% and 100%), inclusive.

Ozone Concentration Options

In this panel you can specify a default value for ozone concentration that will be used for all hours during the
model run, and/or specify the hourly ozone data file you wish to use.

Default Value: Background ozone concentrations can be input as a single value using this field, or can be
specified through the ozone hourly data file. If you are specifying the ozone file, then the value entered in
this field will be used to substitute the missing values in the hourly ozone data file. Missing values in the
ozone data file should be represented by values <0 and >=900 (e.g., -99, 900)
Units: From the drop-down list, select the units of the ozone concentration, either PPB, PPM or ug/m3.
Hourly Ozone Data File: Check the box to specify that an hourly ozone data file will be used instead of
the Default Value; you must then fill in the following fields:

File Name: Click the button to specify the name and location of the hourly ozone data file to be
used.
Format: Here you can select from the drop-down list the format of the file, either Default or Fortran.
The default format should be I2, 3I3, F9.3
Units: Select the units from the drop-down list, either PPB, PPM or ug/m3.

Click on this button to open the Ozone File Maker utility where you can create an hourly
ozone data file.

31
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Re-Start/Multi-Year Files

In the Re-Start/Multi-Year Files page, you can specify whether or not you wish to generate some optional
files. Select Optional Files - Re-Start/Multi-Year Files from the tree located on the left side of the Control
Pathway dialog, to display the options for Re-Start, Init and Multi-Year Analysis files.

Control Pathway dialog - Re-Start/Init Files

Re-Start Files

This option allows you to store intermediate results into an unformatted file, so that the model run can be
continued later in case of a power failure or a user interrupt.

Note: This option is not available if you select the PM10-NAAQS option from the
Pollutant drop-down list.

Check the Re-Start Files box in the Optional Files panel to display the following options:

Save calculations every x days: Here you specify the number of days of meteorological data between
the saving of intermediate results. This is not the number of actual days in real world time. This is the
number of days of meteorological data that should be processed between the saving of intermediate results.
AERMOD View uses 5 days as the default but this can be changed to any value you choose.
File to save intermediate results: Here you specify the filename for saving intermediate results. Click
the button to specify the name and location to save the file which will then be displayed in the panel.
The default filename ProjectName.sv1 will be used if you do not specify a different filename and it will be
saved in the project folder.
File to alternate save of intermediate results: When you save intermediate results they are saved to
the same file (and overwritten) each time. Check this option if you wish to specify a file for the model to
alternate the save between the two files for storing intermediate results. This approach requires additional
disk space but selecting two files avoids the potential problem that the power failure or interrupt might
occur while the temporary file is open and the intermediate results are being copied to it. In such a case,
the temporary results file would be lost. Click the button to specify the name and location to save the
file which will then be displayed in the panel. The default filename ProjectName.sv2 will be used if you do
not specify a different filename and it will be saved in the project folder.

32
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Init File

This option instructs the model to initialize the results arrays from a previously saved file and is available only if
you have selected the Re-Start Files option. Check the Init File check box located on the Optional Files
frame to make the Init File frame available for use.

Note: This option is not available if you select the PM10 (Pre 97 NAAQS) option from
the Pollutant drop-down list.

Click the button to specify the name and location of the unformatted file of intermediate results to be used
for initializing the model.

Multi-Year Analyses

The Multi-Year Analyses option allows you to perform a multiple year analysis to determine the high-sixth-
high in five years design value needed for determining PM-10 impacts.

Control Pathway dialog - Multi-Year Analyses Files

Note: The Multi-Year Analyses option is only available when the PM10 - Pre 97 NAAQS
option is selected from the Pollutant drop-down list.

The Multiple Year Analyses option is not compatible with the Re-Start File option, since the multiple year option
makes use of the model re-start capabilities. For this reason, only one of these two options can be selected in a
single run. AERMOD View will automatically disable the Re-Start File option if the PM10 - Pre 97 NAAQS
pollutant option is selected.

The Multiple Year Analyses works by accumulating the high short-term average results from year to year through
the mechanism of the re-start save file. The model may be setup to run in a batch file with several years of
meteorological data, and at the end of each year of processing the short-term average results reflect the
cumulative high values for the years that have been processed. The PERIOD average results are given for only
the current year, but the model carries the highest PERIOD values from year to year and includes the cumulative
highest PERIOD averages in the summary table at the end of each run.

Multiple runs are necessary to access long-term risk assessments where the average impacts over a long time
period are of concern rather than the maximum annual average determined from five individual years. The
following inputs are necessary for the Multi-Year Analyses option:

33
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

1st Year: Select this option if you are performing multiple year analysis for the first year. If the 1st Year
option is selected, then only the Save File must be specified.
Subsequent Year: Select this option if you are performing multiple year analysis for years other than the
first year. You must enter the number of subsequent years in the text box. If the Subsequent Year option
is selected, then both filenames, the Save File and the Init File, must be specified.
Save File: This is the file for saving the results arrays at the end of each year of processing. For the first
year in the multi-year series of runs, AERMOD View uses a default filename ProjectName.sa1. Click the
button if you wish to change the filename. For the Subsequent Years, AERMOD View uses default filenames
as shown in Table 1 below.
Init File: This is the file for initializing the result arrays at the beginning of the current year. For the
Subsequent Years option, you should specify here the file used as the Save File in the previous year run.
See the table below for an example of how to setup the Multiple Year Analyses option for each run.

Year Save File Init File

First Year ProjectName.sa1 ---------
Second Year ProjectName.sa2 ProjectName.sa1
Third Year ProjectName.sa3 ProjectName.sa2
Fourth Year ProjectName.sa4 ProjectName.sa3
Fifth Year ProjectName.sa5 ProjectName.sa4
Setup for the Multiple Year Analyses series of runs.

Note: For the Subsequent Years option, you should save the AERMOD View input file
that you setup for the previous year with a different filename (select File | Save
As from the menu). Change the necessary information such as the year
parameters and meteorology filename in the Meteorology Pathway, the title of
the project (if desired), and setup the inputs in the Multiple Year Analyses option
for the year being analyzed.

Note: To obtain the PM-10 design value, be sure to include the sixth highest value for
the highest values option in the Tabular Outputs window.

34
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Event/Error Files

In the Event/Errors Files page, you can specify whether or not you wish to generate an event input file or a
detailed error listing file. Select Optional Files - Event/Errors Files from the tree located on the left side of
the Control Pathway dialog, to display the options available.

Control Pathway dialog - Event/Errors Files

Input File for the Short Term EVENT Model

Specify whether you wish the model to generate an input runstream file that can be used directly with the
EVENT model. To select this option, check the box. The following information must then be specified:

Level in EVENT Output File: You need to specify the level of detail in the EVENT output file. Two
options are available -
Detail: This option produces more detailed summary in the output file. The basic source contribution
information is provided along with the hourly average concentration (or total deposition) values for
each source for every hour in the averaging period, and a summary of the hourly meteorological data
for the event period.
Source Contribution: This option produces only the source contribution information in the output
file. The average concentration or total deposition value (i.e., the contribution) from each source for
the period corresponding to the event for the source group is provided.
Filename: AERMOD View uses the default filename ProjectName.evi for the EVENT input file but if you
wish to change this click the button and specify an alternate name.

Note: The EVENT model can only process one type of output at a time. Therefore, if
more than one Output Type (Concentration, Total Deposition, Dry Deposition,
and Wet Deposition) is selected in the CO-Dispersion Options window, only the
events associated with the first output type, in the order stated above, will be
included in the EVENT model input file.

Detailed Error Listing File

Here you can request a detailed listing file of all messages generated by the model. The detailed error listing file
includes:

The error and warning messages that are listed as part of the message summaries provided in the main
output file.

35
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Any information messages such as occurrences of calm winds.

Quality assurance messages.

To select this option, check the box. The following information must then be specified:

Extensive output results: ISCST3 and ISC PRIME Only - Select the Yes option to obtain detail
output results including plume heights, sigmas, etc., for each hour calculated for debugging purposes. No is
the default for this option and means that no detail output results will be generated.

Note: When using the Extensive Output Results option, be aware that ISCST3
model will generate very large files, in some cases several hundred megabytes or
more. AERMOD View gives you a warning message every time you select this
option.

Filename: AERMOD View uses the default filename ProjectName.err for the detailed error listing file but if
you wish to change this click the button and specify an alternate name.

Debug Files

AERMOD Only

In the Debug Files page, you can specify whether or not you wish to generate debug files. Select Optional
Files - Debug Files from the tree located on the left side of the Control Pathway dialog, to display the options
available.

Control Pathway dialog - Debug Files

Model Debug File

This option produces an debugging output file containing intermediate calculations related to the model results
for each source and receptor, such as dispersion parameters, and plume heights. AERMOD View uses the
default filename ProjectName.db1 for the model debug file but if you wish to change this click the button
and specify an alternate name.

Note: The Model Debug File option can produce a very large file.

36
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Met Profile Debug File

This option allows you to request a detailed file with gridded profiles of meteorological variables for each hour of
data for debugging purposes. AERMOD View uses the default filename ProjectName.db2 for the model debug
file but if you wish to change this click the button and specify an alternate name.

Note: The Met Profile Debug File option can produce a very large file.

Gas Dry Deposition

ISCST3 & AERMOD Only

In the Gas Dry Deposition page, you can specify the gas dry deposition parameters. Select Control
Pathway - Gas Dry Deposition from the tree located on the left side of the Control Pathway dialog, to display
the available options.

Note: The Gas Dry Deposition option is available only if you have selected the Non-
Default - TOXICS - Gas Dry Deposition option in the Dispersion Options window.

The gas dry deposition parameters required are different for the ISCST3 and AERMOD models. See below for a
description of the parameters required for each model:

AERMOD

Control Pathway dialog - Gas Dry Deposition (AERMOD)

Here you can either use the default values for the gas dry deposition parameters or specify your own values to
override the default. The default values used are 0 for the pollutant reactivity factor, 0.5 for the fraction of
maximum green leaf area index during Autumn and 0.25 for the fraction of maximum green leaf area index
during Transitional Spring. If you use the User-Specified option, you may also specify an optional name for the
Reference Pollutant.

37
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Note: A pollutant reactivity factor of 1 should be used for ozone (O3), titanium
tetrachloride (TiCl4) and divalent mercury (Hg2+) and a value of 0.1 should be
input for nitrogen dioxide (NO2).

Note: For midsummer, late autumn and winter, a value of 1 is used for the fraction of
maximum green leaf area index.

ISCST3

Control Pathway dialog - Gas Dry Deposition (ISCST3)

The following gas dry deposition parameters must be specified for the ISCST3 model:

Deposition Velocity

Here you are requested to either specify a deposition velocity in meters per second or allow the model to
calculate the deposition velocities.

Calculated by the Model: If this option is selected the deposition velocities are calculated by the model.
You will then also need to specify the State of Vegetation, Reference Parameters, Source Parameters, and
the Meteorological Data File with the additional meteorological variables.
User-Specified: If this option is selected, then a single deposition velocity can be input for a given model
run, and is used for all sources of gaseous pollutants. This option will by-pass the algorithm for computing
deposition velocities for gaseous pollutants, and should only be used when sufficient data to run the
algorithm are not available. Results of the ISCST3 model based on a user-specified deposition velocity
should be used with extra caution. If using this option, you also need to specify the Meteorological Data
File with the additional meteorological variables.

Note: A non-fatal warning message is generated if a value greater than 0.05 m/s is
input for the deposition velocity.

38
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

State of Vegetation

For the gas dry deposition algorithm option, you are requested to define the state of the vegetation. The state
of vegetation is used in the model, along with ambient temperature and incoming short-wave radiation, to
determine the resistance to transport through the stomatal pores. Four options are available:

Irrigated (Active & Unstressed)

Unirrigated (Active & Unstressed)
Unirrigated (Active & Stressed)
Unirrigated (Inactive)

For unirrigated vegetation, you should select the appropriate option based on existing soil moisture conditions.

Reference Parameters

You can either use the default values for the references parameters or specify your own values to override the
default. The reference parameters required for the gas dry deposition algorithm are:

Cuticle Resistance
Ground Resistance
Pollutant Reactivity
Reference Pollutant (optional)

Note: The gas dry deposition parameters for the pollutant being modeled may be
found in chemical engineering handbooks and various publications, such as the
Air/Superfund National Technical Guidance Study Series (EPA, 1993).

Seasonal Categories

AERMOD Only

The AERMOD deposition algorithms include land use characteristics and gas resistance terms based on five
seasonal categories. You must correlate these seasonal categories to each calendar month. In the Seasonal
Categories page, you can specify the seasonal category for each month of the year. Select Control Pathway
- Seasonal Categories from the tree located on the left side of the Control Pathway dialog, to display the
available options.

39
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Control Pathway dialog - Seasonal Categories

Default seasonal categories have been applied to each month, you can change these at any time. You can
either simply check the seasonal category box you wish to use instead for the corresponding month, or click the
button to clear all the boxes.

The seasonal categories available are -

Midsummer, with lush green vegetation

Autumn, with unharvested cropland
Late Autumn, after frost and harvest, or winter with no snow
Winter, with snow on ground
Transitional Spring, with partial green coverage or short annuals

Note: Some of the seasonal categories defined above may not apply for certain
regions, for example the Winter category for southern latitudes.

Land Use Categories

AERMOD Only

The AERMOD deposition algorithms include some gas deposition resistance terms based on five Seasonal
Categories and on nine land use categories. For each wind direction sector, you must define the land use
category. In the Land Use Categories page, you can define the land use category by wind direction. Select
Control Pathway - Land Use Categories from the tree located on the left side of the Control Pathway dialog,
to display the available options.

Control Pathway dialog - Land Use Categories

There are 36 wind direction sectors, one for every 10 degrees. For example, the wind direction sector 5-15
corresponds to winds blowing toward 10 degrees plus or minus 5 degrees.

The land use categories available are -

Urban land, no vegetation

Agricultural land
Rangeland

40
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Forest
Suburban areas, grassy
Suburban areas, forested
Bodies of water
Barren land, mostly desert
Non-forested wetlands

For each wind direction sector, you can click in the land use category cell and from the drop-down list select one
of the above land use categories. If you wish to apply the same category to several wind direction sectors you
may select the cells by pressing down the Shift key while you select multiple items in sequence or the Ctrl key to
make disjoint selections. Once the cells are selected, choose the category you wish to use for the selected cells
from the drop-down list at the bottom of the table and click the button.

If you wish to apply the same land use category to all the wind direction sectors, click the button, select
the land use category from the drop-down list at the bottom of the table and click the button.

41
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Source Pathway
The Source Pathway allows you to specify the source input parameters and source group information such as
source types, building downwash and variable emissions. You have access to the Source Pathway dialog by
select Data | Source Pathway... from the menu or by clicking on the Source menu toolbar button.

The Source Pathway dialog uses a two-pane view. The tree located on the left side of the dialog is used for
navigation and item selection. Select an item (marked as ) in the tree to display the available options on the
right panel.

The Source Pathway contains several pages; some pages are only available when certain options are selected.
The settings available on each page of the Source Pathway are described in the sections below.

Source Summary

In the Source Summary page, you can specify information on the number of sources specified for your current
project, pollutant information and source base elevation information. Select Source Pathway - Source
Summary from the tree located on the left side of the Source Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Source Pathway dialog - Source Summary

The following options are available -

Pollutant

For each run, you need to specify the type of pollutant being modeled. The pollutant displayed here will be same
pollutant selected in the Pollutant/Averaging screen of the Control Pathway. Changes in the pollutant type in the
Source Pathway will be automatically displayed in the Control Pathway and vice-versa.

Source Base Elevation

Here you can select from the drop-down list the unit in which the source base elevation is specified, either
meters or feet.

Click on this button to import sources into your project.

42
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Source Summary

The Source Summary displays a summary of all the sources defined in your project. The following information
is displayed for each source:

No: AERMOD View automatically creates an entry number for each source created.
Source ID: The ID for the source is displayed here.
Source Type: This column displays source type.
X Coord: The X Coordinate for the source is displayed here.
Y Coord: The Y Coordinate for the source is displayed here.
Base Elevation: This column displays the base elevation for the sources.
Description: This column displays the description for the source.
Release Type: This column displays the release type if you have defined a point source - either vertical,
capped or horizontal.

You cannot directly modify the information in the Source Summary table. If you wish to change source
information, select the source and double click to display the Source Inputs dialog where you can modify
information. You can also select the source and click the button.

The buttons at the bottom of the Source Summary window, called the Record Navigator buttons, will help you in
managing the information that is defined for your sources.

Source Inputs

You can specify all your sources in the Source Inputs dialog. You have access to this dialog by:

Selecting Data | Sources | Edit Sources... from the menu.

Clicking on the button located on the bottom of the Source Summary window.
Double-click on a source in the Source Summary table.
Right-click on a source in the Source Summary table to display the pop-up menu. Select the View/Edit
Source option.

Source Inputs dialog

43
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

You can either define your sources in text mode or in graphical mode. To define sources in the text mode,
simply enter all the necessary information directly into the Source Inputs dialog. To define sources in the
graphical mode, you can use any of the source tools located on the Application Toolbar. The Source Inputs
dialog opens automatically with some parameters already defined. Specify the additional parameters for your
source. Specify your source type, assign a source ID, source description and other parameters. Certain
parameters requested in the Source Inputs dialog depend on the type of source being defined. The following
source types are supported:

Point
Flare
Area
Open Pit
Volume
Circular Area
Polygon Area
Line

At the bottom of the Source Inputs dialog are the Record Navigator buttons, which will help you manage
information for multiple sources defined.

Point Sources

Point sources are used if you want to model releases from sources like stacks and isolated vents. For a point
source, you must provide the following information in the Source Inputs dialog:

Source Type

Type: Select POINT from the drop-down list.

Source ID: Enter an identification name for the source being defined. The ID can be up to 8 characters
long and are always in upper case. Click the button to get default Source IDs automatically set up for
you.
Release Type: AERMOD Only Specify whether your point source is a vertical, capped or horizontal point
source.

Note: This is a BETA Non-Default AERMOD option, available only if it has been
selected in the Control Pathway. It will be overridden if the Regulatory Default
Option is selected.

Description: Enter any description for the source up to 68 characters long, if you wish.

44
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Source Location

Note: All values entered in English units will be automatically written to the input file in
metric units as the U.S. EPA models require that inputs be in metric units (with
the exception of base elevation when ELEVUNIT equals FEET).

X Coordinate [m]: Enter the X coordinate for the source location in meters. The X coordinate may be
input as UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator) coordinates or may be referenced to a user-defined origin.
Y Coordinate [m]: Enter the Y coordinate for the source location in meters. The Y coordinate may be
input as UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator) coordinates or may be referenced to a user-defined origin.
Base Elevation [m]: Specify the source base elevation above mean sea level. The model only uses the
source base elevation if Elevated Terrain is being used. You can specify the source base elevation in either
meters [m] or in feet [ft].
Release Height [m]: Specify the release height above the ground in meters [m] or in feet [ft].

Source Release Parameters

Emission Rate: Enter the emission rate of the pollutant in grams per second [g/s] or in pounds per hour
[lb/hr]. The same emission rate is used for both concentration and deposition calculations.
Gas Exit Temperature: Enter the exit temperature of the stack gas in degrees Kelvin [K] or in degrees
Fahrenheit [F].

Click on this button to display the Stack Gas Exit Temperature dialog.

Stack Inside Diameter: Enter the stack inside diameter in meters [m] or in feet [ft].
Gas Exit Velocity: Enter the exit velocity of the stack gas in meters per second [m/s] or in feet per second
[ft/s]. The exit velocity can be determined from the following formula:

45
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

where:
Vs = Exit Velocity
V = Flow Rate
ds = Stack Inside Diameter

Gas Exit Flow Rate: Enter the exit flow rate of the stack gas in cubic meters per second [m^3/s] or in
cubic feet per second [ft^3/s]. The Gas Exit Flow Rate is calculated based on the Stack Inside Diameter and
the Gas Exit Velocity (see the formula for Gas Exit Velocity).

Note: If the NO2/NOx ratio is omitted for a specific source, the value specified in the
Control Pathway – NOx to NO2 for the option NO2/NOx Ratio will be used by the
model.

Flare Sources

Flare sources are used as control devices for a variety of sources. Flares must comply with requirements
specified in 40 CFR 60.18 and a minimum 98% reduction of all combustible components of the original emission
must be achieved (U.S. EPA 1992). The U.S. EPA models ISCST3, AERMOD, and ISC-PRIME do not have a
specific source type option for flare sources but AERMOD View implemented a flare source type option. Flare
sources can be treated in a similar way as point sources, except that there are buoyancy flux reductions
associated with radiative heat losses and a need to account for flame length in estimating plume height (U.S.
EPA 1992).

For a flare source, you must provide the following information in the Source Inputs dialog:

Source Type

Type: Select FLARE from the drop-down list.

Source ID: Enter an identification name for the source being defined. The ID can be up to 8 characters
long and are always in upper case. Click the button to get default Source IDs automatically set up for
you.
Description: Enter any description for the source up to 68 characters long, if you wish.

Source Location

Note: All values entered in English units will be automatically written to the input file in
metric units as the U.S. EPA models require that inputs be in metric units (with
the exception of base elevation when ELEVUNIT equals FEET).

46
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

X Coordinate [m]: Enter the X coordinate for the source location in meters. The X coordinate may be
input as UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator) coordinates or may be referenced to a user-defined origin.
Y Coordinate [m]: Enter the Y coordinate for the source location in meters. The Y coordinate may be
input as UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator) coordinates or may be referenced to a user-defined origin.
Base Elevation [m]: Specify the source base elevation above mean sea level. The model only uses the
source base elevation if Elevated Terrain is being used. You can specify the source base elevation in either
meters [m] or feet [ft].
Effective Release Height [m]: Specify the effective release height above the ground in meters [m] or
feet [ft]. The effective release height should be given as the stack height plus the flare height.

Click on this button to open the Effective Release Height dialog which allows you to calculate
the effective release height above ground for flare sources.

Source Release Parameters

Emission Rate [g/s]: Enter the emission rate of the pollutant in grams per second [g/s] or in pounds per
hour [lb/hr]. The same emission rate is used for both concentration and deposition calculations.
Gas Exit Temperature [K]: Enter the temperature of the released gas in degrees Kelvin [K] or in degrees
Fahrenheit [F].
Stack Inside Diameter [m]: Enter the stack inside diameter in meters [m] or in feet [ft].
Gas Exit Velocity [m/s]: Enter the exit velocity of the gas in meters per second. The exit velocity can be
determined from the following formula:

where:
Vs = Exit Velocity
V = Flow Rate
ds = Stack Inside Diameter

Gas Exit Flow Rate [m^3/s]: Enter the gas exit flow rate in cubic meters per second [m^3/s] or in cubic
feet per second [ft^3/s] .

47
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Area Sources

Area sources are used to model low-level or ground-level releases with no plume rise such as storage piles, slag
dumps, and lagoons. The U.S. EPA models ISCST3, ISC-PRIME, and AERMOD accept rectangular areas that may
also have a rotation angle specified relative to a north-south orientation. For an area source, you must provide
the following information in the Source Inputs dialog:

Source Type

Type: Select AREA from the drop-down list.

Source ID: Enter an identification name for the source being defined. The ID can be up to 8 characters
long and are always in upper case. Click the button to get default Source IDs automatically set up for
you.
Description: Enter any description for the source up to 68 characters long, if you wish.

Source Location

Note: All values entered in English units will be automatically written to the input file in
metric units as the U.S. EPA models require that inputs be in metric units (with
the exception of base elevation when ELEVUNIT equals FEET).

X Coordinate [m]: Enter the X coordinate for the vertex of the area source that occurs in the southwest
quadrant of the source.
Y Coordinate [m]: Enter the Y coordinate for the vertex of the area source that occurs in the southwest
quadrant of the source.
Base Elevation [m]: Specify the source base elevation above mean sea level. The model only uses the
source base elevation if Elevated Terrain is being used. You can specify the source base elevation in either
meters [m] or feet [m].
Release Height [m]: Enter the release height above ground in meters [m] or in feet [ft].

48
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Source Release Parameters

Emission Rate [g/(s-m2)]: Specify the emission rate of the pollutant. The emission rate for area sources
is input as an emission rate per unit area. The same emission rate is used for both concentration and
deposition calculations. The emission rate can be entered in grams per second per square meter [g/(s-m2)]
or in pounds per hour per square foot [lb/(hr-ft2)].

Click on this button to display the Auto-Calculate Area Emissions Tool dialog to calculate the
emission rate from grams per second [g/s] or from pounds per hour [lb/hr].

Length of the X Side [m]: If the angle is 0 degrees, then this is the length, in meters [m] or in feet [ft],
of the side of the area source that is in the east-west direction. If the angle is not equal to zero, then the X
side dimension is measured from the side of the area source that is counterclockwise along the perimeter
from the origin/vertex (x, y) defined by the X coordinate and Y coordinate values. See Figure 1 below for
an illustration of this parameter.
Length of the Y Side [m]: If the angle is 0 degrees, then this is the length, in meters [m] or in feet [ft],
of the side of the area source that is in the north-south direction. If the angle is not equal to zero, then the
Y side dimension is measured from the side of the area source that is clockwise along the perimeter from
the origin/vertex (x, y) defined by the X coordinate and Y coordinate values. See Figure 1 below for an
illustration of this parameter. If this parameter is omitted, then the model assumes that the area is a square
and will use the same value entered for the length of the X side of the area.
Orientation Angle from North [deg]: This the orientation angle for the rectangular area in degrees from
North. The angle parameter is measured as the orientation relative to North of the side that is clockwise
from the vertex (X and Y coordinate location), i.e. the side with Y side length. If this parameter is omitted,
then the model assumes that the area is oriented in the north-south and east-west directions, i.e., angle =
0.0 degrees. If the angle parameter is input and the value is different from 0.0 degrees, then the model will
rotate the area clockwise around the vertex defined in the X coordinate and Y coordinate input fields. The
angle parameter must be positive for clockwise rotation and negative for counterclockwise rotation. The
value range accepted for the orientation angle is between -180 degrees and 180 degrees.
Initial Vertical Dim. of the Plume (Opt.) [m]: This optional parameter may be used to specify an initial
vertical dimension of the area source plume in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. This parameter is similar to the
Initial Vertical Dimension parameter for Volume Sources. This parameter may be important when the area
source algorithm is used to model mechanically-generated emission sources, such as mobile sources. In
these cases, the emissions may be turbulently mixed near the source by the process that is generating the
emissions, and therefore occupy some initial depth. For more passive area source emissions, such as
evaporation or wind erosion, the Initial Vertical Dimension parameter may be omitted, which is equivalent to
using an initial sigma-z of zero.

49
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Figure 1. Relationship of area source parameters. Based on Figure 3-1 of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
1995 User’s Guide for the Industrial Source Complex (ISC3) Dispersion Models - Volume I, EPA-454/B-95-003a. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.

Note: The aspect ratio, Length/Width, for area sources should be less than 10 to 1. If
this is exceeded, the area should be divided to achieve a 10 to 1 aspect ratio, or
less, for all sub-areas.
Note: There are no restrictions on the location of receptors relative to area sources.
Receptors may be placed within the area and at the edge of an area. The U.S.
EPA models ISCST3, AERMOD, and ISC-PRIME will integrate over the portion of
the area that is upwind of the receptor. The numerical integration is not
performed for portions of the area that are closer than 1.0 meter upwind of the
receptor. Therefore, caution should be used when placing receptors within or
adjacent to areas that are less than a few meters wide.

Open Pit Sources

Open Pit sources are used to simulate fugitive emissions from below-grade open pits, such as surface coal mines
and stone quarries. The Open Pit algorithm uses an effective area for modeling pit emissions, based on
meteorological conditions, and then utilizes the numerical integration area source algorithm to model the impact
of emissions from the effective area sources. The models accept rectangular pits with an optional rotation angle
specified relative to a north-south orientation.

For an Open Pit source, you must provide the following information in the Source Inputs dialog: Source Type

Type: Select OPEN PIT from the drop-down list.

Source ID: Enter an identification name for the source being defined. The ID can be up to 8 characters
long and are always in upper case. Click the button to get default Source IDs automatically set up for
you.
Description: Enter any description for the source up to 68 characters long, if you wish.

50
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Source Location

Note: All values entered in English units will be automatically written to the input file in
metric units as the U.S. EPA models require that inputs be in metric units (with
the exception of base elevation when ELEVUNIT equals FEET).

X Coordinate [m]: Enter the X coordinate for the vertex of the open pit source that occurs in the
southwest quadrant of the source.
Y Coordinate [m]: Enter the Y coordinate for the vertex of the open pit source that occurs in the
southwest quadrant of the source.
Base Elevation [m]: Specify the source base elevation above mean sea level. The model only uses the
source base elevation if Elevated Terrain is being used. You can specify the source base elevation in either
meters [m] or feet [ft].
Release Height [m]: Enter the average release height above the base of the pit in meters [m] or in feet
[ft]. This parameter cannot exceed the effective depth of the pit, which is calculated by the model based on
the formula below. An average release height of 0.0 indicates emissions that are released from the base of
the pit.
Effective Pit Depth = Pit Volume / (Pit Width x Pit Length)

Click on this button to open the Open Pit Parameters dialog which allows you to calculate the
Average Release Height Above Pit Base.

Source Release Parameters

Open Pit Emission Rate [g/(s-m2)]: Specify the emission rate of the pollutant. The emission rate for
open pit sources is input as an emission rate per unit area. The same emission rate is used for both
concentration and deposition calculations. The emission rate can be entered in grams per second per square
meter [g/(s-m2)] or in pounds per hour per square foot [lb/(hr-ft2)].

Click the button to display the Auto-Calculate Area Emissions Tool dialog to calculate the emission
rate from grams per second [g/s] or from pounds per hour [lb/hr].

51
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Length of the X Side [m]: If the angle is 0.0 degrees, then this is the length, in meters [m] or in feet [ft],
of the side of the open pit that is in the east-west direction. If the angle is not equal to zero, then the X side
dimension is measured from the side of the open pit that is counterclockwise along the perimeter from the
origin/vertex (x, y) defined by the X coordinate and Y coordinate values. See Figure 1 below for illustration
of this parameter.
Length of Y the Side [m]: If the angle is 0.0 degrees, then this is the length, in meters [m] or in feet [ft],
of the side of the open pit that is in the north-south direction. If the angle is not equal to zero, then the Y
side dimension is measured from the side of the open pit that is clockwise along the perimeter from the
origin/vertex (x, y) defined by the X coordinate and Y coordinate values. See Figure 1 below for illustration
of this parameter.
Volume of Open Pit [m3]: This is the volume of the open pit in cubic meters [m^3] or in cubic feet
[ft^3].
Orientation Angle from North [deg]: This the orientation angle for the rectangular open pit in degrees
from North. The angle parameter is measured as the orientation relative to North of the side that is
clockwise from the vertex (X coordinate and Y coordinate location), i.e. the side with Y side length. If this
parameter is omitted, then the model assumes that the open pit is oriented in the north-south and east-
west directions, i.e., angle = 0.0 degrees. If the angle parameter is input and the value is different from 0.0
degrees, then the model will rotate the open pit clockwise around the vertex defined on the X coordinate
and Y coordinate input fields. The angle parameter may be positive for clockwise rotation and negative for
counterclockwise rotation. The value range accepted for the orientation is between -180 degrees and 180
degrees.

Relationship of open pit source parameters. Based on Figure 3-1 of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1995
User’s Guide for the Industrial Source Complex (ISC3) Dispersion Models - Volume I, EPA-454/B-95-003a. U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.

Note: The aspect ratio, Length/Width, of open pit sources should be less than 10 to 1.
However, since the pit algorithm generates an effective area for modeling
emissions from the pit, and the size, shape and location of the effective area is a
function of wind direction, an open pit cannot be subdivided into a series of
smaller sources. If the aspect ration is greater than 10 to 1 the model will
generate a warning message but it is allowed.

Note: Since open pit sources cannot be subdivided, you should characterize irregularly-
shaped pit areas by a rectangular shape of equal area.

Note: Receptors should not be located within the boundaries of the pit. The models will
set the concentration and/or deposition values at such receptors to zero. Such

52
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

receptors will be identified during model setup and will be flagged in the
summary of inputs.

Note: Since the open pit algorithm is applicable for particulate emissions, the particle
categories for an open pit source must be defined in the SO-Gas & Particle Data
window.

Volume Sources

Volume sources are used to model releases from a variety of industrial sources, such as building roof monitors,
multiple vents, and conveyor belts. For a volume source, you must provide the following information in the
Source Inputs dialog:

Source Type

Type: Select VOLUME from the drop-down list.

Source ID: Enter an identification name for the source being defined. The ID can be up to 8 characters
long and are always in upper case. Click the button to get default Source IDs automatically set up for
you.
Description: Enter any description for the source up to 68 characters long, if you wish.

Source Location

Note: All values entered in English units will be automatically written to the input file in
metric units as the U.S. EPA models require that inputs be in metric units (with
the exception of base elevation when ELEVUNIT equals FEET).

X Coordinate [m]: Enter the X coordinate for the source location in meters. This location is the center of
the volume source.
Y Coordinate [m]: Enter the Y coordinate for the source location in meters. This location is the center of
the volume source.
Base Elevation [m]: Specify the source base elevation above mean sea level. The model only uses the
source base elevation if Elevated Terrain is being used. You can specify the source base elevation in either
meters [m] or feet [ft].
Release Height [m]: Enter the release height above ground for the center of the volume source in meters
[m] or in feet [ft]. See the diagram below for an example of where the release height above ground is

53
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

measured.

Release Height Above Ground for Volume Sources

Source Release Parameters

Emission Rate [g/s]: Enter the emission rate of the pollutant in grams per second [g/s] or in pounds per
hour [lb/hr]. The same emission rate is used for both concentration and deposition calculations.
Length of Side [m]: Enter the length of the side of the volume source in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. The
volume source cannot be rotated and has the X side equal to the Y side.
Initial Lateral Dimension [m]: Specify the initial lateral dimension of the volume source.

Click on this button to display the Initial Lateral Dimension dialog to automatically calculate the
initial lateral dimension of the volume source.

Initial Vertical Dimension [m]: Specify the initial vertical dimension of the volume source.

Click on this button to display the Initial Vertical Dimension dialog to automatically calculate the
initial vertical dimension of the volume source.

54
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Circular Area Sources

ISCST3 & AERMOD Only

The Circular Area source may be used to specify a circular-shaped area source which is treated as an equal-area
polygon. The circular area source type uses the same numerical integration algorithm for estimating impacts
from area sources, and is merely a different option for specifying the shape of the area source.

For a circular area source, you must provide the following information in the Source Inputs dialog:

Source Type

Type: Select AREA CIRC from the drop-down list.

Source ID: Enter an identification name for the source being defined. The ID can be up to 8 characters
long and are always in upper case. Click the button to get default Source IDs automatically set up for
you.
Description: Enter any description for the source up to 68 characters long, if you wish.

Source Location

Note: All values entered in English units will be automatically written to the input file in
metric units as the U.S. EPA models require that inputs be in metric units (with
the exception of base elevation when ELEVUNIT equals FEET).

X Coordinate [m]: Enter the X coordinate for the center of the circular area source.
Y Coordinate [m]: Enter the Y coordinate for the center of the circular area source.
Base Elevation [m]: Specify the source base elevation above mean sea level. The model only uses the
source base elevation if Elevated Terrain is being used. You can specify the source base elevation in either
meters [m] or feet [ft].
Release Height [m]: Specify the release height above the ground in meters [m] or in feet [ft].

55
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Source Release Parameters

Emission Rate [g/(s-m2)]: Enter the emission rate of the pollutant. The emission rate for circular area
sources is input as an emission rate per unit area. The same emission rate is used for both concentration
and deposition calculations. The emission rate can be entered in grams per second per square meter [g/(s-
m2)] or in pounds per hour per square foot [lb/(hr-ft2)].

Click on this button to display the Auto-Calculate Area Emissions Tool dialog to calculate the emission
rate from grams per second [g/s] or from pounds per hour [lb/hr].
Radius of the Circular Area [m]: Enter the radius of the circular area source in meters [m] or in feet [ft].
No. of Vertices (or Sides) up to 20: This is the number of vertices or sides of the circular area source
polygon. The polygon will have the same area as that specified for the circle.

Note: The U.S. EPA model ISCST3 can generate a regular polygon of up to 20 sides to
approximate the circular area source. If a polygon with over 20 vertices is
created, the ISCST3 run will be aborted (unsuccessful run) and no error message
will be displayed in the Output File. The AERMOD model can have up to a
maximum of 50 sides, however, if a Polygon Area Source is used in the same
model run with over 50 vertices then the same number of vertices can also be
applied to the circular area source.

Initial Vertical Dim. of the Plume (Opt.) [m]: This optional parameter may be used to specify an initial
vertical dimension of the circular area source plume in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. This parameter is similar to
the Initial Vertical Dimension parameter for Volume Sources. The Initial Vertical Dimension parameter may
be omitted, which is equivalent to using an initial sigma-z of zero.

56
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Polygon Area Sources

ISCST3 & AERMOD Only

The Polygon Area source may be used to specify an area source as an arbitrarily shaped polygon. This source
type option gives considerable flexibility for specifying the shape of an area source. The polygon area source
type uses the same numerical integration algorithm for estimating impacts from area sources and is merely a
different option for specifying the shape of the area source.

For a polygon area source, you must provide the following information in the Source Inputs dialog:

Source Type

Type: Select AREA POLY from the drop-down list.

Source ID: Enter an identification name for the source being defined. The ID can be up to 8 characters
long and are always in upper case. Click the button to get default Source IDs automatically set up for
you.
Description: Enter any description for the source up to 68 characters long, if you wish.

Source Location

Note: All values entered in English units will be automatically written to the input file in
metric units as the U.S. EPA models require that inputs be in metric units (with
the exception of base elevation when ELEVUNIT equals FEET).

X Coordinate [m]: Enter the X coordinate for one of the vertices of the polygon area source.
Y Coordinate [m]: Enter the Y coordinate for one of the vertices of the polygon area source.
Base Elevation [m]: Specify the source base elevation above mean sea level. The model only uses the
source base elevation if Elevated Terrain is being used. You can specify the source base elevation in either
meters [m] or feet [m].
Release Height [m]: Enter the release height above ground in meters [m] or in feet [ft].

57
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Source Release Parameters

Emission Rate [g/(s-m2)]: Enter the emission rate of the pollutant. The emission rate for the polygon
area source is input as an emission rate per unit area. The same emission rate is used for both
concentration and deposition calculations. The emission rate can be entered in grams per second per square
meter [g/(s-m2)] or in pounds per hour per square foot [lb/(hr-ft2)].

Click on this button to display the Auto-Calculate Area Emissions Tool dialog to calculate the emission
rate from grams per second [g/s] or from pounds per hour [lb/hr].
No. of Vertices (or Sides): Click the button to display the Area Poly Vertex Coordinates
dialog were you can specify or verify the coordinates for the vertices of your polygon area. Once the
vertices are defined, the button will display the number of vertices for you polygon area.

Note: The U.S. EPA model ISCST3 can generate a regular polygon of between 3 and 20
sides. If a polygon with over 20 vertices is created, the ISCST3 run will be
aborted (unsuccessful run) and no error message will be displayed in the Output
File. For the AERMOD model, the maximum number of vertices is dynamically
allocated and is therefore limited only by the amount of memory available for
model execution.

Initial Vertical Dim. of the Plume (Opt.) [m]: This optional parameter may be used to specify an initial
vertical dimension of the polygon area source plume in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. This parameter is similar
to the Initial Vertical Dimension parameter for Volume Sources. The Initial Vertical Dimension parameter
may be omitted, which is equivalent to using an initial sigma-z of zero.

Line Sources

The U.S. EPA models ISCST3, ISC-PRIME, and AERMOD handle line sources as volume sources. AERMOD View
can automatically generate these volume sources to represent the line source that you specify. Examples of line
sources include conveyor belts and rail lines.

Note: At the present time AERMOD View uses the “Line Source Represented by
Separated Volume Sources” method as described in Volume II of the U.S. EPA
User’s Guide for the Industrial Source Complex (ISC3) Dispersion Models (US EPA
1992).

For a LINE source, you must provide the following information in the Source Inputs dialog:

58
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Source Type

Type: Select LINE from the drop-down list.

Source ID: Enter an identification name for the source being defined. The ID can be up to 8 characters
long and are always in upper case. Click the button to get default Source IDs automatically set up for
you.
Description: Enter any description for the source up to 68 characters long, if you wish.

Line Source Parameters (Represented by Separated Volume Sources)

Note: All values entered in English units will be automatically written to the input file in
metric units as the U.S. EPA models require that inputs be in metric units (with
the exception of base elevation when ELEVUNIT equals FEET).

Length of Side [m]: Enter the length of the side of the line source in meters [m] or in feet [ft].
Emission Rate [g/s]: Enter the emission rate of the pollutant in grams per second [g/s] or in pounds per
hour [lb/hr]. The same emission rate is used for both concentration and deposition calculations.
Vertical Dimension [m]: If your line is surface-based or elevated and not on or adjacent to a building,
then you must specify the vertical dimensions of the line source here. Note that if the source is on or
adjacent to a building this option is not available.
Building Height [m]: If your line source is elevated and is on or adjacent to a building, then you need to
specify the building height. The building height will be used to calculate the Initial Vertical Dimension of the
source. Note that if the source is surface-based, then this option is not available.
Source Elevation: In this panel, you should specify whether the source is surface-based or elevated. The
selection of one option or the other will determine how the Initial Vertical Dimension of the generated
volume sources will be calculated.

59
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Surface-Based (He ~ 0): Select this option if the effective emission height (Release Height above
Ground) is approximately zero. An example of a surface-based volume source is a surface rail line. See
below the procedure used to estimate the Initial Vertical Dimension of the source, if this option is
selected.
Initial Vertical Dimension = Release Height above Ground / 2.15

Elevated (He > 0): Select this option if the effective emission height (Release Height above Ground)
is greater than zero. An example of an elevated line/volume source is an elevated rail line. See below
the procedure used to estimate the Initial Vertical Dimension of the source, if this option is selected.

If on or Adjacent to a Building then

Initial Vertical Dimension = Building Height / 2.15

If NOT on or Adjacent to a Building then

Initial Vertical Dimension = Release Height above Ground / 4.3

Line source nodes are located at the center-line of a line source at the intersection of two line segments. If a line
source is composed of only one line segment, then the nodes will be located at the edges of the center-line
segment.

For each node of the line source, you must specify the following information:

X Coordinate [m]: Enter the X coordinate for the node in meters.

Y Coordinate [m]: Enter the Y coordinate for the node in meters.
Base Elevation [m]: Enter base elevation at the node location. The model only uses the source base
elevation if Elevated Terrain is being used. You can specify the source base elevation in either meters [m] or
feet [m].
Release Height [m]: Enter the release height above ground in meters [m] or in feet [ft] at the node
location.

There are a number of buttons located in the Line Source Parameters panel:

Click this button to immediately generate the volume sources that will represent your line
source. The number of volume sources generated for the current line source will then be
displayed in the panel.

Click this button to display the Generated Volume Sources dialog where you can view the
source parameters for each volume source generated.

Click this button to add a new row where you can enter the parameters for a node.

Click this button to delete the selected row/node.

60
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Building Downwash

In the Building Downwash page, you can specify the building downwash information for your point or flare
sources. Select Source Pathway - Building Downwash from the tree located on the left side of the Source
Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

The U.S. EPA models ISCST3, ISC-PRIME, and AERMOD include algorithms to model the effects of building
downwash on emissions from nearby or adjacent point sources. The building downwash algorithms only apply to
point sources however since AERMOD View implements the flare source as a point source, the flare sources can
also considered for building downwash calculations.

Note: Refer to Volume II of U.S. EPA’s ISC3 User’s Guide (US EPA 1995) for a technical
description of the building downwash algorithms.

Source Pathway dialog - Building Downwash

If you wish to specify building downwash for your point or flare sources you will need to check the Building
Downwash box to enable the Building Downwash panel. In this panel you have the option of specifying your
building downwash information in two ways -

Manually: When typing in the information you can also use the Edit/Mark tools which allow you to quickly
and easily enter data into the table. At the bottom of the Building Downwash panel are the Record
Navigator Buttons, which will help you manage information for multiple sources defined.
Import: You can import the building downwash information from a BPIP output file (*.pro). Click the
button to open the Source ID dialog where you can select the source for which you wish to import
downwash data. Once the source has been selected the source ID will be displayed. You can then click the
button to import the downwash information for the source.

If you have created your buildings and run BPIP from within AERMOD View, the building downwash information
will be automatically displayed for each source. The BPIP Primary Output File (* .pro) contains the essential
output data such as the Preliminary GEP stack height values and the BH (Building Height) and PBW (Projected
Building Width) input for an ISCST3 input runstream file as well as some additional downwash information to
perform enhanced downwash calculations required by the ISC-PRIME and AERMOD models. The primary
difference is the inclusion of values for the additional parameters XBADJ and YBADJ in the last portion of the
primary output file. AERMOD View will read this file and place all BH, PBW, PBL, XBADJ and YBADJ values for
each stack. The downwash information displayed differs depending on which model you are using -

61
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

ISCST3

The following information is requested for the building downwash option for ISCST3 -

Building Heights: This tab displays a table containing 6 columns and 6 rows with a total of 36 cells. You
must input all 36 direction-specific building heights in meters, beginning with the 10 degree flow vector
(wind blowing toward 10 degrees from north), and incrementing by 10 degrees in a clockwise direction. The
column heading displays the directions in degrees for the selected row while the row heading displays the
angle range for that specific row (e.g., 10 to 60 deg).
Building Widths: This tab displays a table containing 6 columns and 6 rows with a total of 36 cells. You
must input all the 36 direction-specific building widths in meters, beginning with the 10 degree flow vector
(wind blowing toward 10 degrees from north), and incrementing by 10 degrees in a clockwise direction.
Lower Bound: This optional tab displays a table containing 6 columns and 6 rows with a total of 36 cells
corresponding to an array of 36 lower bound wake option switches, beginning with the 10 degree flow
vector and incrementing by 10 degrees in a clockwise direction. The Lower Bound option is available only if
you have selected to use the Non-Regulatory Default option of calculating “low bound” concentration or
deposition values for downwash sources subject to enhanced lateral plume spread by super-squat buildings.
A super-squat building is a building whose width is more than five times the height. To indicate the use of
the lower bound wake option for a specific sector you should input the value 1 and for use of upper bound
input 0:
Value = 0 means to use the upper bound (regulatory default), or
Value = 1 means to use the lower bound for that sector (applicable for the Non-Regulatory Default
option only).

Note: If the Regulatory Default option has been selected then the Lower Bound tab
becomes invisible and any low bound inputs will be ignored, and the model will
calculate the upper bound estimates only (value = 0).

Tip: If a cell in the Lower Bound table is double-clicked, the upper bound value
(0) is switched to a lower bound value (1) and vice-versa.

62
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

AERMOD & ISC-PRIME

The following information is requested for the building downwash option for AERMOD and ISC-PRIME

Heights: The Heights tab displays a table containing 6 columns and 6 rows with a total of 36 cells. The
table must contain all 36 direction-specific building heights in meters, beginning with the 10 degree flow
vector (wind blowing toward 10 degrees from north), and incrementing by 10 degrees in a clockwise
direction. The column heading displays the directions in degrees for the selected row while the row heading
displays the angle range for that specific row (e.g., 10 to 60 deg).
Widths: The Widths tab displays a table containing 6 columns and 6 rows with a total of 36 cells. The table
must contain all the 36 direction-specific building widths in meters, beginning with the 10 degree flow vector
(wind blowing toward 10 degrees from north), and incrementing by 10 degrees in a clockwise direction.
Lengths: The Lengths tab displays a table containing 6 columns and 6 rows with a total of 36 cells. The
table must contain all the 36 projected length of the building along the flow in meters, beginning with the
10 degree flow vector (wind blowing toward 10 degrees from north), and incrementing by 10 degrees in a
clockwise direction.
Along Flow: The Along Flow tab displays a table containing 6 columns and 6 rows with a total of 36 cells.
The table must contain all the 36 along-flow distance, in meters, from the stack to the center of the upwind
face of the projected building, beginning with the 10 degree flow vector (wind blowing toward 10 degrees
from north), and incrementing by 10 degrees in a clockwise direction.
Across Flow: The Across Flow tab displays a table containing 6 columns and 6 rows with a total of 36 cells.
The table must contain all the 36 across-flow distance, in meters, from the stack to the center of the upwind
face of the projected building, beginning with the 10 degree flow vector (wind blowing toward 10 degrees
from north), and incrementing by 10 degrees in a clockwise direction.

63
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Gas & Particle Data

In the Gas & Particle Data dialog you can specify gas phase options, particle data, and scavenging
coefficients. Select Source Pathway - Gas & Particle Data from the tree located on the left side of the
Source Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Source Pathway dialog - Gas & Particle Data

The parameters requested in the Gas & Particle Data dialog depend on the type of calculations being
performed and the source phase being modeled:

Gas Phase Options

Particle Phase Options

Gas & Particle data can be specified for more than one source. The buttons at the bottom of the Gas & Particle
Data dialog called the Record Navigator buttons will help you manage information for multiple sources defined.

Source Groups

In the Source Groups screen, you can analyze group contributions from particular sources together by creating
source groups. Select Source Pathway - Source Groups from the tree located on the left side of the Source
Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Sources can exist in more than one group at a time. Source groups are disabled if the PSD Groups option is
used.

Source Pathway dialog - Source Groups

64
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Note: At least one source group must be defined for each run. By default, AERMOD
View automatically sets up a source group containing all sources you have
defined for the current run. The ID for this source group is ALL.

The Source Groups screen contains a navigation tree of existing source groups on the left, with a table
containing all sources in the project on the right. In this screen, you can:

create a source group comprising single sources

create a source group containing a source group range
delete a source group

In addition, the screen has the following options:

Include Group ALL: If you decided to create your own source groups, you still have the option of
including the Source Group ALL in you project. You can do this by checking the Include Group ALL box.
Search Function: At the top of the screen is a Search bar, which allows you to search for specific strings
to filter the sources. Select either the Search Using All Fields or Search Using Selected Field radio
button; the selected field is the field that the sources are being sorted by and is denoted by a triangle
beside the field name. Enter the text in the Text to Search box, set the search terms, and click the
button. View the entire, unfiltered list by clicking .

Auto: Click the button to access the Auto-Generated Source Groups dialog. In this dialog, you can
easily create source groups containing only one source, and perform other features. See Auto-Generated
Source Groups for more information.

How to Create a Source Group Containing a Single Source:

Note: You must define the sources for the current run before creating any source
groups.

1: Check the Source Groups box. Click the button to create a new source group. A default Source Group
ID will be displayed; you may change this if you wish. The ID identifies the source group and can be up to 8
alphanumeric characters.

2: From the list of sources on the right, select the sources to add to the source group. You can select multiple
sources from the list by pressing down the Shift key while you select the items in sequence or the Ctrl key
to make disjoint selections.

3: Once you have selected the sources:

with the source group selected, click the button to add the source(s) to the source group.
or

drag the source(s) into the source group

4: The selected sources should then be displayed underneath the source group you created.

5: You may repeat steps 1 to 3 to create more source groups.

65
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

How to Create a Source Group Containing a Source Range:

1: Check the Source Groups box. Click the button to create a new source group. A default Source Group
ID will be displayed; you may change this if you wish. The Source Group ID identifies the source group and
can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

2: From the list of sources on the right, select the first source in the range to add to the source group. Drag
the source into the source group, or click the button.

3: From the list of sources on the right, select the last source in the range. Then:

in the navigation tree, select the first source in the range, and click the button to add the
source(s) to the source range.
or

drag the source(s) on top of the first source in the range.

4: The source range will display within the source group you created.

5: Double check ranges to ensure that they are logical by double-clicking the range to open the Source ID
dialog.

6: You may repeat steps 1 to 4 to create more source groups containing source ranges. You can also add
additional single sources to the group; these sources cannot be within the source range.

How to Delete a Source Group:

1: In the tree view, select the source group you wish to delete.

2: Click the button to delete the source group.

Auto-Generated Source Groups

The Auto-Generated Source Groups dialog allows you to create source groups that contain only one source.
This is convenient if you have several sources in your project. For example if you have 50 sources and wish to
create a source group for each source, instead of repeating the same steps 50 times you can select the sources
and auto generate all the source groups in one simple step using this dialog. You have access to this dialog by
selecting the button in the Source Groups window.

66
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Auto-Generated Source Groups dialog

The following options are available in this dialog:

Select Sources: This list displays all the sources defined in your current project.
Source Group ID: Here you can select a name convention for the auto-generated source groups. The
Name drop-down list contains the following options -
Default: This is the AERMOD View default name convention for a source group, SRCGP1, SRCGP2,...etc.
Numeric (1,2,3...): Source groups IDs created using this option will be given a numeric ID starting from 1.
Prefix + Numeric: This option allows you to specify a prefix to be used together with a numeric portion.
The Prefix text box becomes available for you to specify the desired prefix. If you choose, for example,
GRP as the prefix then the source group IDs will be named as GRP1, GRP2, GRP3, and so on.
Numeric + Suffix: This option allows you to specify a suffix to be used together with a numeric portion.
The Suffix text box becomes available for you to specify the desired suffix. If you choose, for example
_GRP as the suffix, then the source group IDs will be named as 1_GRP, 2_GRP, 3_GRP, and so on.
Same as Source ID: You can also request that the auto-generated source groups have the same ID as the
source it contains. For example, the source group STCK1 contains the source STCK1.
Auto-Generated Source Groups: This panel displays the generated source groups with the total number
of source groups is displayed at the top of the panel. In the list the source group ID is displayed along with
the source contained in that source group. The following buttons are available in this panel -

Click this button to select all the source groups in the list.

Click this button to delete the selected source groups from the list.

Click this button to move the selected source group one row up.

Click this button to move the selected source group one row down.

How to Auto-Generated Source Groups:

1: From the Select Sources list, select the sources for which to make source groups. You can also select
multiple sources from the list by pressing down the Shift key while you select the items in sequence or the
Ctrl key to make disjointed selections. You can also click the button to select all the sources in the list or
use the button to clear your selections.

67
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

2: From the Source Group ID panel, specify the naming convention to be used for the generated source
groups.

3: Click the button to generate source groups for the selected sources. The generated source groups
will be displayed in the Auto-Generated Source Groups window.

4: Click the button to close the Auto-Generated Source Groups dialog and to transfer these
source groups to the main list of source groups located in the Source Groups window. If any of the auto-
generated source group IDs already exist in your project, the Conflicting Source Group IDs dialog will be
displayed.

Urban Groups

AERMOD Only

In the Urban Groups page, you can specify multiple urban areas within a single model run by creating urban
groups. Urban groups may be used, for example, to model large domains that encompass more than one
identifiable urban area, where the separation is large enough to warrant separate treatment of the urban
boundary layer effects. Select Source Pathway - Urban Groups from the tree located on the left side of the
Source Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

The latest version of the AERMOD model, 06341, allows you to create more than one urban group. Sources can
only exist in one urban group at a time.

Source Pathway dialog - Urban Groups

The Urban Groups screen contains a navigation tree of existing urban groups on the left, with a table containing
all sources in the project on the right. In this screen, you can:

create an urban group comprising discrete sources

delete an urban group

In addition, the screen contains the Search Function: At the top of the screen is a Search bar, which allows you
to search for specific strings to filter the sources. Select either the Search using All Fields or Search using
Selected Field radio button; the selected field is the field that the sources are being sorted by and is denoted
by a triangle beside the field name. Enter the text in the Text to Search box, set the search terms, and click
the button. View the entire, unfiltered list by clicking .

68
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

How to Create an Urban Group Containing a Single Source:

Note: You must define the sources for the current run before creating any urban
groups.

1: Click to place a checkmark in Urban Groups. Click the button to create a new urban group. A default
Urban Group ID will be displayed; you may change this if you wish. The Urban Group ID identifies the urban
group and can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

Note: When you place a checkmark in Urban Groups, the Dispersion Coefficient
setting in the Pollutant/Averaging screen is set to Urban. Likewise, if the
Dispersion Coefficient setting is set to Urban before you open the Control
Pathway, Urban Groups will be checked automatically.

2: From the list of sources on the right, select the sources to add to the urban group. You can select multiple
sources from the list by pressing down the Shift key while you select the items in sequence or the Ctrl key
to make disjoint selections.

3: Once you have selected the sources:

with the urban group selected, click the button to add the source(s) to the urban group.
or

drag the source(s) into the urban group

4: The selected sources should then be displayed underneath the urban group you created.

5: Set the urban dispersion options for each urban group:

Population: Specify the population of the urban area.

Name (Optional): Enter the name of the urban area if you wish.
Roughness Length (Optional): A default value of 1.0m is used for the urban roughness length. If
you wish, you may enter a user-specified value or click the button to display the Surface
Roughness Length dialog which can help you select a value to use.

6: You may repeat steps 1 to 3 to create more urban groups.

Note: You can only specify up to the maximum number of urban groups allowed for
each model. Please see the EPA Models/Limits pages for each model in the
Preferences dialog to determine the number of urban groups allowed

How to Delete an Urban Group:

1: In the navigation tree, select the urban group you wish to delete.

2: Click the button to delete the urban group.

69
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Variable Emissions

In the Variable Emissions screen, you can specify emission rate factors for individual sources or for groups of
sources that vary by the following scenario types:

by Season
by Month
by Hour-of-Day
by Wind Speed
by Season / Hour
by Season / Hour / Day
by Season / Hour / Seven Days
by Month / Hour / Day
by Month / Hour / Seven Days

Variable emission rate factors are a multiplier of the emission rate you have specified for the source in the
Source Inputs window. A factor of 0, for example, means the source is not emitting. A factor of 0.5 means that
the source is emitting 50% of the specified emission rate and a factor of 1 means that the source is emitting
100% of the specified emission rate.

After scenarios are created, single sources and source ranges can then be associated with a single scenario. A
particular source can only be associated with one scenario.

Select Source Pathway - Variable Emissions from the tree located on the left side of the Source Pathway
dialog, to display the available options.

Source Pathway dialog - Variable Emissions

70
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

The Variable Emissions screen contains a navigation tree with available scenario types on the upper left, with
a table containing all sources in the project on the upper right. Along the bottom is a panel that displays the
configuration details of a given scenario when one scenario is selected. In this screen, you can:

create, assign emission rate factors to, and assign sources to a scenario
delete a scenario

In addition, the screen has the following options:

Search Function: At the top of the screen is a Search bar, which allows you to search for specific strings
to filter the sources. Select either the Search Using All Fields or Search Using Selected Field radio
button; the selected field is the field that the sources are being sorted by and is denoted by a triangle
beside the field name. Enter the text in the Text to Search box, set the search terms, and click the
button. View the entire, unfiltered list by clicking .

How to Create, Assign Emission Rate Factors to, and Assign Sources to a Scenario :

Note: You must define the sources for the current run before creating any scenarios.

1: Select the scenario type you wish to add a scenario to. Click the button to create a new scenario. A
default Scenario ID will be displayed; you may change this if you wish. The ID can be up to 8 alphanumeric
characters.

2: On the table displayed on the bottom part of the screen, assign the emission rate factors for the scenario in
each cell.

to select rows in sequence, hold down the Shift key while selecting the first and last items in the
sequence
to select disjointed rows hold down the Ctrl key while selecting multiple items

3: After making the desired selections, enter the Emission Factor in the text box and click the
button.

4: The number and type of factors to be assigned will depend on the type of scenario:

Scenario Type
By Season For each season, (Winter, Fall, Summer, Spring) you must input the
Keyword=SEASON variable emission factor. The seasons are defined as:
# of Factors=4 WINTER: December, January, February
SPRING: March, April, May
SUMMER: June, July, August
FALL: September, October, November
By Month Specify the variable emission factor for each month of the year
Keyword=MONTH (January-February).
# of Factors=12
By Hour-of-Day Specify a variable emission factor for each hour of the day.
Keyword=HROFDY
# of Factors=24
By Wind Speed Specify a variable emission factor for each wind speed category.
Keyword=WSPEED
# of Factors=6

71
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Scenario Type
By Season / Hour Specify a variable emission factor for each hour of the day, for each
Keyword=SEASHR season.
# of Factors=96
By Season / Hour / Day Specify a variable emission factor for each hour of the day for
Keyword=SHRDOW Weekdays, Saturdays, and Sundays for each season. Move between
# of Factors=288 tabs to input the data for each season.
By Season / Hour / Seven Days Specify a variable emission factor for each hour of the day, for each
Keyword=SHRDOW7 day of the week for each season. Move between tabs to input the
# of Factors=672 data for each season.
By Month / Hour / Day Specify a variable emission factor for each hour of the day for
Keyword=MHRDOW Weekdays, Saturdays, and Sundays for each month. Move between
# of Factors=864 tabs to input the data for each month.
By Month / Hour / Seven Days Specify a variable emission factor for each hour of the day, for each
Keyword=MHRDOW7 day of the week for each season. Move between tabs to input the
# of Factors=2016 data for each month.

To add single sources:

1: From the list of sources on the right, select the sources to add to the scenario. You can select multiple
sources from the list by pressing down the Shift key while you select the items in sequence or the Ctrl key
to make disjointed selections.

2: Once you have selected the sources

with the scenario selected, click the button to add the source(s) to the scenario.
or

drag the source(s) into the scenario

3: The selected sources should then be displayed underneath the scenario you created.

To add source ranges:

1: From the list of sources on the right, select the first source in the range to add to the scenario. Drag the
source into the scenario, or click the button.

2: From the list of sources on the right, select the last source in the range. Then:

in the navigation tree, select the first source in the range, and click the button to add the
source(s) to the scenario.
or

drag the source(s) on top of the first source in the range.

3: The source range will display within the scenario you created.

4: You may repeat steps 1 to 2 to create more scenarios.

How to Delete a Scenario:

1: In the navigation tree, select the scenario you wish to delete.

2: Click the button to delete the scenario.

72
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Hourly Emission File

In the Hourly Emission File page, you can specify hourly emission rates for one or more sources. Select
Source Pathway - Hourly Emission File from the tree located on the left side of the Source Pathway dialog,
to display the available options.

Source Pathway dialog - Hourly Emission File

Check the Hourly Emission Rate File box to make this option available. Hourly emission rates must be
provided in a separate file and you can provide only one hourly emission file per run. Click the button to
specify the name and location of the hourly emission rate file to be used.

Select the sources to be modeled from the Single Sources dialog and click the button. The selected
sources will be displayed in the Sources in the Hourly File window. If a source is not included in the list, the
hourly emission rate file values will not be applied to it.

Click on this button to delete the selected sources from the Sources in the Hourly File window.

Click the button to clear all the sources from the Sources in the Hourly File window.

Hourly Emission Rate File Format

Each record or line of the hourly emission rate file must include the following parameters in the order given
below:

SO HOUREMIS
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Source ID
Emission Rate (g/s or user units)

73
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

For Point Sources add the following parameters:

Stack Gas Exit Temperature (K)

Stack Gas Exit Velocity (m/s)

See below for an example of the hourly emission rate file for a single point source:

If more than one source is referenced, multiple records will be required to define the emissions for one hour.
See below an example of an hourly emission rate file for two sources:

The above parameters must be separated by only one space. You do not need to include the SO HOUREMIS
pathway and keyword on each line, however the Year parameter cannot begin before column 13. The data in
the hourly emission file must include the exact same dates as are included in the meteorological input files, and
the Source IDs must correspond to the Source IDs defined on the SO-Source Inputs screen and be in the same
order.

Note: It is not necessary to process the entire hourly emissions file on each model run.
The correct emissions data will be read if the Data Period or the Days Range
option in the Data Period display are used, as long as all the dates (including
those that are processed and those that are skipped) match the meteorological
data files.
Note: The model will use the Stack Release Height and the Stack Inside Diameter
defined on the Source Inputs window, but will use the Emission Rate, Stack Gas
Exit Temperature and Stack Gas Exit Velocity from the hourly emission file. If the
Emission Rate, the Stack Gas Exit Temperature, and the Stack Gas Exit Velocity
are not included for a particular hour (any or all of these fields are blank), the
model will interpret emissions data for that hour as missing and will set the
parameters to zero. Since the emission rate will be zero, there will be no
calculations made for that hour and that source.

74
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Emission Output Unit

The Emission Output Unit dialog allows you to specify different output units for concentration and deposition
calculations. The U.S. EPA models ISCST3, AERMOD, and ISC-PRIME use default output units of micrograms per
cubic meter for concentration calculations and grams per square meter for deposition calculations. Select
Source Pathway - Emission Output Unit from the tree located on the left side of the Source Pathway dialog,
to display the available options.

Source Pathway dialog - Emission Output Unit

Default

If you do not specify user defined output units, AERMOD View will use the following default output units for
concentration and deposition calculations -

Source Type Input Unit Output Unit Concentration Output Unit Deposition
Grams/sec Micrograms/m**3 Grams/m**2
POINT and
VOLUME

AREA and OPEN Grams/sec/m** Micrograms/m**3 Grams/m**2

PIT 2

Concentration (Micrograms/m**3): The unit factor of 1000000 converts grams to micrograms.

Deposition (Grams/m**2): The unit factor of 3600 essentially converts grams/sec to grams/hour.

User-Defined

Select the User Defined option if you wish to specify output units other than the default for Concentration and/or
Deposition calculations. The following must be specified for the user defined output unit option:

Unit Factor: This is the unit factor used to convert the emission rate input units to the output units. The
emission rate unit factor applies to all sources for a given run.
Emission Unit Label: Specify the emission rate unit label, up to 40 characters in length with no blank
spaces.
Concentration/Deposition Unit Label: This is the output unit label for concentration or deposition
calculations. No blank spaces are allowed in this field.

NO2 Ratio for PVMRM and OLM

AERMOD Only

75
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The NO2 Ratio for PVMRM and OLM screen allows you to specify the NO2 Ratio for single sources or source
ranges; this ratio is used when modeling NO2 conversions. Select Source Pathway - N02 Ratios from the tree
located on the left side of the Source Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

The NO2 Ratio for PVMRM and OLM screen is unavailable until you take the following step:
Enable Modeling conversion of NOx to NO2 in the Dispersion Options screen of the Control Pathway.

The PVMRM and OLM options for modeling NO2 conversion assume a default in-stack NO2/NOx ratio of 0.10
(10%).

Note: If the NO2 Ratio is omitted for any source, the value specified in the Control
Pathway – NOx to NO2 for the option NO2/NOx Ratio will be used by the model.

Source Pathway dialog - N02 Ratios

The NO2 Ratio for PVMRM and OLM screen contains a table in which you can define the following:

the NO2 Ratio for any particular source

the NO2 Ratio for a source range

Note: You can only specify one ratio per source. If you duplicate a source, a message
will display in the Details dialog.

How to Define the N02 Ratio for a Particular Source or Source Range:

Note: You must define the sources for the current run before using this option.

1: Click the button to create a new entry in the table.

2: Click in the Source |Source Range cell for the new entry. The field becomes editable; click the button
to open the Source ID dialog. From the From/To drop-down lists, select a source. Close the Source ID
dialog.

3: In the N02 Ratio cell, enter the NO2 Ratio for the source or source range you just specified.

76
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

4: You may repeat steps 1 to 3 to define additional entries in the table.

How to Delete a Source Range:

1: Select the entry/row you wish to delete.

2: Click the button to delete the entry. Confirm the deletion.

OLM Source Groups - Combined Plumes Modeling

In the OLM Source Groups screen, you can analyze N02 conversion using the option to model sources as
combined plumes by creating OLM source groups. For a technical explanation of the OLM Source Group option,
refer to Specifying Combined Plumes for OLM in the Addendum to the User's Guide for the AERMOD Model (Dec.
2006) available in the US EPA SCRAM web site: http://www.epa.gov/scram001/dispersion_prefrec.htm#aermod.

OLM Source Groups are unavailable until you take the following steps:

Enable Modeling conversion of N0x to N02 in the Dispersion Options screen of the Control Pathway.
Select the OLM (Ozone Limiting Method) option in the NOx to NO2 screen of the Control Pathway.

Select Source Pathway - OLM Groups (OLM) from the tree located on the left side of the Source Pathway
dialog, to display the available options.

Note: Sources can only exist in one OLM source group at a time. If you place a source
in more than one group, the data in its In Groups column of the table will
display in red.

Source Pathway dialog - OLM Groups

As with source groups, you can specify the source group ALL, which applies OLM on a combined plume basis to
all sources. The results will only be output for an OLM source group if the same group of sources is also
identified in Source Groups.

The OLM Source Groups screen contains a navigation tree of existing OLM source groups on the left, with a table
containing all sources in the project on the right. In this screen, you can:

create an OLM source group comprising single sources

create an OLM source group containing source ranges
delete an OLM source group

In addition, the screen has the following options:

77
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Include Group ALL: You have the option of including the OLM Group ALL in you project, however this will
disable the ability to create new OLM source groups. You can do this by checking the Include Source
Group ALL box.
Search Function: At the top of the screen is a search bar, which allows you to search for specific strings to
filter the sources. Select either the Search Using All Fields or Search Using Selected Field radio
button. The selected field is the field that the sources are being sorted by and is denoted by a triangle
beside the field name. Enter the text in the Text to Search box, set the search terms, and click the
button. View the entire, unfiltered list by clicking .

How to Create an OLM Source Group Containing Single Sources:

Note: You must define the sources for the current run before creating any OLM source
group.

1: Click the button to create a new OLM source group. A default OLM Source Group ID will be displayed;
you may change this if you wish. The OLM Source Group ID identifies the OLM source group and can be up
to 8 alphanumeric characters.

2: From the list of sources on the right, select the sources to add to the OLM source group. You can select
multiple sources from the list by pressing down the Shift key while you select the items in sequence or the
Ctrl key to make disjoint selections.

3: Once you have selected the sources:

with the OLM source group selected, click the button to add the source(s) to the OLM source
group.
or

drag the source(s) into the OLM source group

4: The selected sources should then be displayed underneath the OLM source group you created.

5: You may repeat steps 1 to 3 to create more source groups.

How to Create an OLM Source Group Containing a Source Range:

1: Click the button to create a new OLM source group. A default Source Group ID will be displayed; you
may change this if you wish. The Source Group ID identifies the OLM source group and can be up to 8
alphanumeric characters.

2: From the list of sources on the right, select the first source in the range to add to the OLM source group.
Drag the source into the OLM source group, or click the button.

3: From the list of sources on the right, select the last source in the range. Then:

in the navigation tree, select the first source in the range, and click the button to add the
source(s) to the OLM source range.
or

drag the source(s) on top of the first source in the range.

78
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

4: The source range will display within the OLM source group you created.

5: Double check ranges to ensure that they are logical by double-clicking the range to open the Source ID
dialog.

6: You may repeat steps 1 to 4 to create more OLM source groups containing source ranges. You can also add
additional single sources to the group; these sources cannot be within the source range.

How to Delete an OLM Source Group:

1: In the navigation tree, select the OLM source group you wish to delete.

2: Click the button to delete the OLM source group.

PSD Source Groups

Note: The functionality of PSD source groups is a US EPA BETA-test option in the
AERMOD model. Consult with your reviewing authority for further guidance when
modeling increment credits for NO2.

In the PSD Source Groups screen, you can specify the sources to include when calculating increment
consumption when modeling PSD (Prevention of Significant Deterioration) increment credits for NO2. This allows
you to properly account for NOx conversion chemistry under the PVMRM option. For a technical explanation of
the PSD Source Group option, refer to Modeling N02 Increment Credits with PVMRM in the Addendum to the
User's Guide for the AERMOD Model (Dec. 2006) available in the US EPA SCRAM web site:
http://www.epa.gov/scram001/dispersion_prefrec.htm#aermod.

PSD source groups are fixed; you cannot add or delete PSD source groups, only add sources to the groups. The
three PSD source groups are:

INCRCONS - increment-consuming sources; these can be new sources or modifications to existing sources
NONRBASE - existing, non-retired baseline sources
RETRBASE - retired (increment-expanding or PSD credit) baseline sources

PSD Source Groups are unavailable until you take the following steps:

Enable Modeling conversion of N0x to N02 in the Dispersion Options screen of the Control Pathway.
Select the PVMRM (Plume Volume Molar Ratio Method) Modeling option in the NOx to NO2 screen of
the Control Pathway.
Enable PSD Source Groups - N02 Increment Credits Modeling with PVMRM (BETA) in the PSD
Groups screen.

Note: The Source Groups option is incompatible with PSD Source Groups. Enabling PSD
source groups will disable Source Groups.

Select Source Pathway - PSD Groups (PVMRM) from the tree located on the left side of the Source Pathway
dialog to display the PSD Group options.

79
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Note: Sources can only exist in one PSD source group at a time. If you place a source
in more than one group, the data in its In Groups column of the table will
display in red.

Source Pathway dialog - PSD Groups

The PSD Source Groups screen contains a navigation tree of the PSD source group on the left, with a table
containing all sources in the project on the right. In this screen, you can:

add a single source to any one of the three PSD source groups
add a source range to any one of the three PSD source groups.

In addition, the screen has the following options:

Search Function: At the top of the screen is a Search bar, which allows you to search for specific strings
to filter the sources. Select either the Search Using All Fields or Search Using Selected Field radio
button; the selected field is the field that the sources are being sorted by and is denoted by a triangle
beside the field name. Enter the text in the Text to Search box, set the search terms, and click the
button. View the entire, unfiltered list by clicking .

How to Add a Single Source to a PSD Source Group:

Note: You must define the sources for the current run before adding sources to any
PSD source group.

1: From the list of sources on the right, select the sources to add to the PSD source group. You can select
multiple sources from the list by pressing down the Shift key while you select the items in sequence or the
Ctrl key to make disjoint selections.

2: Once you have selected the sources:

with the PSD source group selected, click the button to add the source(s) to the PSD source
group.
or

drag the source(s) into the PSD source group

3: The selected sources should then be displayed underneath the PSD source group you created.

80
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

4: You may repeat steps 1 to 2 to add sources to the other PSD source groups.

How to Add a Source Range to a PSD Source Group:

1: From the list of sources on the right, select the first source in the range. With the PSD source group
selected, drag the source into the PSD source group, or click the button.

2: From the list of sources on the right, select the last source in the range. Then:

in the navigation tree, select the first source in the range, and click the button to add the
source(s) to the PSD source range.
or

drag the source(s) on top of the first source in the range.

3: The source range will display within the PSD source group you created.

4: Double check ranges to ensure that they are logical by double-clicking the range to open the Source ID
dialog.

5: You may repeat steps 1 to 3 to add source ranges to the other PSD source groups. You can also add
additional single sources to the group; these sources cannot be within the source range.

81
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Receptor Pathway
The Receptor Pathway allows you to specify the receptor locations for a particular run, define the number and
type of receptors in your project, delete selected receptors, define receptor groups, and flagpole options. You
have access to the Receptor Pathway dialog by select Data | Receptor Pathway... from the menu or by
clicking on the Receptor menu toolbar button.

The Receptor Pathway dialog uses a two-pane view. The tree located on the left side of the dialog is used for
navigation and item selection. Select an item (marked as ) in the tree to display the available options on the
right panel.

The Receptor Pathway contains several pages; some pages are only available when certain options are
selected. The settings available on each page of the Receptor Pathway are described in the sections below.

Receptor Summary

In the Receptor Summary page, you can view a summary of the type of receptors, number of grids, and total
number of receptors already specified for the current project. Select Receptor Pathway - Receptor
Summary from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor Pathway dialog, to display the available
options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Receptor Summary

Flagpole Receptors

In this panel you can select whether or not you wish to use flagpole receptors. A flagpole receptor is defined as
any receptor located above ground level and can be used, for example, to represent the roof or balcony of a
building. Two options are available:

No: Select this option if no flagpole receptors are to be considered. This is the default option, and assumes
a default flagpole receptor height of 0.0 m (i.e., ground-level receptors). Any flagpole heights that are
entered in the Receptor Pathway are ignored if the No option is selected.
Yes: This option indicates that flagpole receptors are to be used. When this option is selected, a text box is
displayed where you can input a default flagpole height (height above ground level) to be applied to any
unspecified flagpole heights at each receptor location. If the default height text filed is left blank, a default
value of 0.0 meters will be used.

82
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Receptor Terrain Elevation Units

If you select Elevated for the terrain height option in the Terrain Options window, then you have the choice of
selecting the units for the receptor terrain elevations. Select the elevation units from the drop down list, either
meters or feet.

Click on this button to Import Receptors into your project.

Receptor Summary

You can select a particular receptor type from the Receptor Summary Table; double-click on it and the screen for
that particular receptor type will be displayed. The following buttons are also found in this window:

Click on this button to delete selected receptors from the Receptor Summary Table. Click with
the left mouse button on the row for the receptor you want to delete and press this button.
For multiple selections in sequence press the Shift key while selecting the receptors or press
the Ctrl key to make disjoint selections.

Click on this button to display the Receptor Groups dialog from where you can define receptor
groups.

Terrain Options

In the Terrain Options page, you can specify whether you will be modeling the effects of terrain above stack
base, in order to be able to input elevated receptor heights and also specify receptor elevations above ground
level to model flagpole receptors. Select Receptor Pathway - Terrain Options from the tree located on the
left side of the Receptor Pathway dialog, to display the available terrain height and flagpole receptor options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Terrain Options - ISC

83
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The following options are available:

Terrain Height Options

You may select from two terrain height options:

Flat: This option assumes that the terrain height does not exceed stack base elevation, that is, terrain
height assumed to be 0.0 m. All receptors are assumed to be at the same elevation as the base elevation
for the source as the default mode of operation. Flat Terrain calculations are used throughout, and any
terrain elevations entered in the Receptor Pathway will be ignored.
Elevated: This options assumes terrain height exceeds stack base elevation. Select this option if you wish
to model receptors on elevated terrain. You must then enter terrain elevations for your receptors in the
Receptor Pathway. If elevated terrain is selected and receptor heights are not specified, then it is assumed
to have a value of 0.0 meters.

Terrain Calculation Algorithms

This option is available for ISCST3 and ISC-PRIME Only. In this panel you may select one of the following
terrain calculation algorithms:

Simple + Complex Terrain: This is the default option where the model implements both simple and
complex terrain algorithms and also applies intermediate terrain processing. In this case, the model will
select the higher of the simple and complex terrain calculations on an hour-by-hour, source-by-source and
receptor-by-receptor basis for receptors in intermediate terrain, that is, terrain between release height and
plume height.
Simple Terrain Only: This option specifies that no complex terrain calculations will be made and only
ISCST algorithms are used. You should not use this option if you are modeling with complex terrain (terrain
above the release height of the source).
Complex Terrain Only: This option is only available for the Elevated terrain height option. This option
specifies that no simple terrain calculations will be made, and only COMPLEX1 algorithms are used.

Note: For terrain above the release height of the source, the model automatically
truncates or chops the terrain to the physical release height when modeling
impacts at those receptors using the simple terrain algorithm (Simple Terrain
Only option). Terrain above the release height is not truncated when the
COMPLEX1 algorithm is used in ISCST3 (Complex Terrain Only option).
Note: There is no distinction in AERMOD between elevated terrain below release height
and terrain above release height, as with ISCST3 and ISC-PRIME that distinguish
between simple terrain and complex terrain.

AERMAP ROU Options

AERMOD Only In this panel you can select whether or not you wish to use the AERMAP ROU file.

84
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Receptor Pathway dialog - Terrain Options - AERMOD

Use AERMAP ROU File: With this option, AERMOD View reads the receptors elevations directly from the
*.ROU file generated once AERMAP has run. You cannot modify receptor elevations within the interface
using this option.
Do Not Use AERMAP ROU File: With this option, AERMOD View copies the receptors elevations directly
from the *.ROU file into the project input file. You will then be able to modify receptor elevations directly
within the interface.

Uniform Cartesian Grid

In the Uniform Cartesian Grid page, you can define Cartesian grid receptor networks with uniform grid
spacing. Select Grids - Uniform Cartesian from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor Pathway
dialog, to display the available options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Uniform Cartesian Grid

The following parameters are necessary to define a Uniform Cartesian Grid Receptor Network:

Network ID: This is the ID for the uniform Cartesian grid and can be up to eight alphanumeric characters.
AERMOD View automatically creates default IDs (UCART1, UCART2, etc.) but these IDs can be changed at
any time.
SW Coordinates: Select this radio button and specify the X (east-west) and Y (north-south) coordinates of
the grid origin (Southwest corner) in meters.

85
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Center Coordinates: Select this radio button and specify the X (east-west) and Y (north-south)
coordinates of the grid origin (center) in meters.

Tip: To select a source as the center of the grid, click the

button and select the source from the drop-down list.

No. of Points (Px, Py): This is the number of points on the X-axis and Y-axis.
Spacing (Dx, Dy): This is the spacing, in meters, between X-axis receptors and between Y-axis receptors.
Length: The final dimensions of the grid in the X direction and Y direction are automatically calculated by
AERMOD View and displayed here.

Note: If you have graphically defined the uniform Cartesian grid using the Uniform
Cartesian Grid Tool, the above fields will be automatically filled. You may modify
the values if you wish.

# Receptors: This field displays the total number of receptors defined for the current grid, and is
automatically filled. Receptor are defined at each grid node.

The following buttons are available:

Click this button to select from two options:

Convert to Discrete - coverts the current grid into discrete Cartesian receptors. This option is
used when there is a need to eliminate one or more receptors from the receptor network grid, for
example, eliminate receptors within a plant boundary.
Export to CSV File - exports the location of each grid node as discrete receptors, with each
receptor's parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y), terrain elevations (ELEV), hill
heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) to a file.

Click this button to open the Receptor Terrain Elevations dialog where you can specify
terrain elevations for each receptor. This button is available only is you have selected
the Elevated terrain option in the Terrain Options page. If no terrain elevations are
defined when you are modeling with Elevated terrain, then the elevations will default to
0.0 meters.

Click this button to open the Flagpole Heights dialog where you can specify flagpole
heights for each receptor. This is the receptor height above ground in meters. This
button is available only if you have selected Yes for the Flagpole Receptors option in
the Receptor Summary page.

If no flagpole receptor heights are defined when you are modeling with Flagpole Receptors, then the flagpole
receptor heights will default to the Default Height value. If no default height was specified, then the flagpole
height will default to 0.0 meters.

86
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

The buttons at the bottom of the Uniform Cartesian Grid window, called the Record Navigator buttons, will help
you in managing the information that is defined for your grids.

Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid

In the Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid page, you can define Cartesian grid receptor networks with non-uniform
grid spacing. Select Grids - Non-Uniform Cartesian from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor
Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid

The following parameters are necessary to define a Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid Receptor Network:

Network ID: This is the ID for the grid and can be up to eight alphanumeric characters. AERMOD View
automatically creates default IDs (NCART1, NCART2, etc.) but these IDs can be changed at any time.

You may select from the drop-down list the method of input: by Coordinates or by Spacing. The inputs required
for each method type differ slightly.

By Coordinates

X Axis Coordinates: These are the location values in meters for the first x-coordinate to the ‘n-th’ x-
coordinate. To input the location values in the table cells, you must first specify the number of x-coordinate
points on the No. X Points field. The table will automatically be divided with the number of rows equal to
the number of x points. You must then input all the x-coordinate location values on the table. You may
enter a value for the spacing in the Space text box to automatically calculate the coordinates.
Y Axis Coordinates: These are the location values in meters for the first y-coordinate to the ‘n-th’ y-
coordinate. To input the location values in the table cells, you must first specify the number of y-coordinate
points on the No. Y Points field. The table will automatically be divided with the number of rows equal to
the number of y points. You must then input all the y-coordinate location values on the table. You may
enter a value for the spacing in the Space text box to automatically calculate the coordinates.

By Spacing

X Axis Spacing: Here you must specify the X-coordinate for the origin and the No. of X Steps is requested.
Once you enter the number of steps the table will be automatically divided with the number of rows equal
to the number of x steps. You must then input all the spacing in meters between two consecutive x-axis
points. You may enter a value for the spacing in the Space text box to be applied to all points.

87
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Y Axis Spacing: Here you must specify the Y-coordinate for the origin and the No. of Y Steps is requested.
Once you enter the number of steps the table will be automatically divided with the number of rows equal
to the number of y steps. You must then input all the spacing in meters between two consecutive y-axis
points. You may enter a value for the spacing in the Space text box to be applied to all points.

Note: If you have graphically defined the non-uniform Cartesian grid using the Non-
Uniform Cartesian Grid Tool, the above fields will be automatically filled. You may
modify the values if you wish.

# Receptors: This field displays the total number of receptors defined for the current grid.

The following buttons are available:

Click this button to select from two options:

Convert to Discrete - coverts the current grid into discrete Cartesian receptors. This option is
used when there is a need to eliminate one or more receptors from the receptor network grid, for
example, eliminate receptors within a plant boundary.
Export to CSV File - exports the location of each grid node as discrete receptors, with each
receptor's parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y), terrain elevations (ELEV), hill
heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) to a file.

Click this button to open the Receptor Terrain Elevations dialog where you can specify
terrain elevations for each receptor. This button is available only is you have selected
the Elevated terrain option in the Terrain Options page. If no terrain elevations are
defined when you are modeling with Elevated terrain, then the elevations will default to
0.0 meters.

Click this button to open the Flagpole Heights dialog where you can specify flagpole
heights for each receptor. This is the receptor height above ground in meters. This
button is available only if you have selected Yes for the Flagpole Receptors option in
the Receptor Summary page.

Note: If no flagpole receptor heights are defined when you are modeling with Flagpole
Receptors, then the flagpole receptor heights will default to the Default Height
value. If no default height was specified, then the flagpole height will default to
0.0 meters.

The buttons at the bottom of the Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid window, called the Record Navigator buttons, will
help you in managing the information that is defined for your grids.

88
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Uniform Polar Grid

The Uniform Polar Grid screen allows you to define polar grid receptor networks with a uniform grid spacing.
Select Grids - Uniform Polar from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor Pathway dialog, to display
the available options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Uniform Polar Grid

The following parameters are necessary to define a Uniform Polar Grid Receptor Network:

Network ID: This is the ID for the grid and can be up to eight alphanumeric characters. AERMOD View
automatically creates default IDs (UPOL01, UPOL02, etc.) but these IDs can be changed at any time.
Origin (Center): Specify the X and Y coordinates in meters for the origin (center) of the grid.

Click on this button to display the Origin Coordinates dialog. Here you can select a source
already defined in your project from which to obtain the origin coordinates for the grid.

Distance from Origin to Rings

In this panel you must specify the distances in meters from the grid origin to each ring. To input the distances,
you must first specify the No. of Rings. The table will automatically be divided with the number of rows equal
to the number of rings. You can then input all the distances from the origin to the rings. You may enter a value
for the distance in the Distance text box to automatically assign the same distance between each ring.

Generated Direction Radials

In this panel you must specify the direction radials for the grid by supplying the following information -

No. of Directions Radials: Enter the number of directions used for the polar grid.
Initial Direction Radial: This is the starting direction of the polar grid in degrees.
Direction Increment (Theta): Specify the increment in degrees for defining directions.

Note: If you have graphically defined the grid using the Uniform Polar Grid Tool, the
above fields will be automatically filled. You may modify the values if you wish.

89
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

# Receptors: This field displays the total number of receptors defined for the current grid.

The following buttons are available:

Click this button to select from two options:

Convert to Discrete - coverts the current grid into discrete Cartesian receptors. This option is
used when there is a need to eliminate one or more receptors from the receptor network grid, for
example, eliminate receptors within a plant boundary.
Export to CSV File - exports the location of each grid node as discrete receptors, with each
receptor's parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y), terrain elevations (ELEV), hill
heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) to a file.

Click this button to open the Receptor Terrain Elevations dialog where you can specify
terrain elevations for each receptor. This button is available only is you have selected
the Elevated terrain option in the Terrain Options page. If no terrain elevations are
defined when you are modeling with Elevated terrain, then the elevations will default to
0.0 meters.

Click this button to open the Flagpole Heights dialog where you can specify flagpole
heights for each receptor. This is the receptor height above ground in meters. This
button is available only if you have selected Yes for the Flagpole Receptors option in
the Receptor Summary page.

If no flagpole receptor heights are defined when you are modeling with Flagpole Receptors, then the flagpole
receptor heights will default to the Default Height value. If no default height was specified, then the flagpole
height will default to 0.0 meters.

The buttons at the bottom of the Uniform Polar Grid window, called the Record Navigator buttons, will help you
in managing the information that is defined for your grids.

90
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Non-Uniform Polar Grid

The Non-Uniform Polar Grid screen allows you to define polar grid receptor networks with a non-uniform grid
spacing. Select Grids - Non-Uniform Polar from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor Pathway
dialog, to display the available options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Non-Uniform Polar Grid

The following parameters are necessary to define a Non-Uniform Polar Grid Receptor Network:

Network ID: This is the ID for the grid and can be up to eight alphanumeric characters. AERMOD View
automatically creates default IDs (NPOL01, NPOL02, etc.) but these IDs can be changed at any time.
Origin (Center): Specify the X and Y coordinates in meters for the origin (center) of the grid.

Click on this button to display the Origin Coordinates dialog. Here you can select a source
already defined in your project from which to obtain the origin coordinates for the grid.

Distance from Origin to Rings

In this panel you must specify the distances in meters from the network origin to each ring. To input the
distances, you must first specify the No. of Rings. The table will automatically be divided with the number of
rows equal to the number of rings. You can then input all the distances from the origin to the rings. You may

enter a value for the distance in the Distance text box and click the button to automatically assign the
same distance between each ring.

Discrete Direction Radials

In this panel you must specify the discrete direction radials (1 to 360 degrees) for the polar network. To input
the directions radials in the table cells, you must first specify the No. Radials. The table will automatically be
divided with the number of rows equal to the number of radials you have specified. You must then input the
direction in degrees for each radial. You may enter a value for the angle in the Angle text box to automatically
assign the same angle between each ring

91
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Note: If you have graphically defined the non-uniform polar grid using the Non-Uniform
Polar Grid Tool, the above fields will be automatically filled. You may modify the
values if you wish.

Total # Receptors: This field displays the total number of receptors defined for the current grid.

The following buttons are available -

Click this button to select from two options:

Convert to Discrete - coverts the current grid into discrete Cartesian receptors. This option is
used when there is a need to eliminate one or more receptors from the receptor network grid, for
example, eliminate receptors within a plant boundary.
Export to CSV File - exports the location of each grid node as discrete receptors, with each
receptor's parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y), terrain elevations (ELEV), hill
heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) to a file.

Click this button to open the Receptor Terrain Elevations dialog where you can specify
terrain elevations for each receptor. This button is available only is you have selected
the Elevated terrain option in the Terrain Options page. If no terrain elevations are
defined when you are modeling with Elevated terrain, then the elevations will default to
0.0 meters.

Click this button to open the Flagpole Heights dialog where you can specify flagpole
heights for each receptor. This is the receptor height above ground in meters. This
button is available only if you have selected Yes for the Flagpole Receptors option in
the Receptor Summary page.

Note: If no flagpole receptor heights are defined when you are modeling with Flagpole
Receptors, then the flagpole receptor heights will default to the Default Height
value. If no default height was specified, then the flagpole height will default to
0.0 meters.

The buttons at the bottom of the Non-Uniform Polar Grid window, called the Record Navigator buttons, will help
you in managing the information that is defined for your grids.

92
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Multi-Tier Grid

In the Multi-Tier Grid window, you can define a multi-tier grid. The multi-tier grid is defined by discrete
Cartesian receptors, square in shape, with the origin at the center of the grid and can be defined with different
tier spacing. The Multi-Tier grid can also be called a Risk Grid because it can be used to define the receptor grid
according to the 1998 U.S. EPA-OSW Human Health Risk Assessment Protocol (HHRAP) and the 1999 U.S. EPA-
OSW Screening Level Ecological Risk Assessment Protocol (SLERAP).

Select Receptor Pathway - Multi-Tier Grid from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor Pathway
dialog, to display the available options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Multi-Tier Grid

Two tabs are available in the Multi-Tier Grid screen -

Grid Settings tab

In this tab you must specify the following parameters to define a Multi-Tier Grid:

Grid Origin (Centroid of Sources Polygon): You must define the X and Y coordinates for the origin
(center) of the grid. Click the button to obtain the centroid of the polygon formed by linking the origin of
all the sources already defined in your project.
No. of Tiers: Specify the number of tiers for the grid. Tiers are the segments with different grid spacing.
Distance from Center (Origin): You must specify the distance in meters from the center of the grid to
each tier.
Tier Spacing: For each tier, you must specify the spacing between receptors in the X and Y directions.

Click this button to get the default grid settings according to the HHRAP and
SLERAP protocols. According to these two U.S. EPA-OSW protocols, the risk grid
should be:

A 100-meter spaced grid from the centroid of the emission sources out to a radius of 3 km.
A 500-meter spaced grid extending from 3 km to 10 km.
Origin of the grid should be the centroid of the polygon formed by all sources.

93
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Click this button to generate the Risk Grid. When AERMOD finishes generating
the grid, the total number of receptors created is automatically displayed. If you
wish to delete the generated receptors click the Delete All button.

Generated Receptors tab

This tab is automatically displayed once you have clicked on the button. The X and Y
coordinates for all Multi-Tier receptors are automatically calculated and displayed here.

Multi-Tier Grid - Generated Discrete Receptors tab

Depending on the modeling options you have selected, the following additional parameters must be specified:

Terrain Elevations: This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in the
Terrain Options page. Specify elevations for the multi-tier receptors. If no terrain elevations are defined
when you are modeling with Elevated terrain, then the elevations will default to 0.0 meters. If you have
processed and imported terrain elevation files, the elevations will be automatically displayed here.
Hill Heights: AERMOD Only This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in
the Terrain Options page. Here you can view the hill heights generated from AERMAP once you've
processed your terrain data.

Note: You may modify the hill heights, but this is only recommended for advanced
users.

Flagpole Heights: This column is displayed only if the Flagpole Receptors terrain option was selected in
the Receptor Summary page. Specify the receptor height above ground in meters. Any missing values in the
Flagpole Heights column will be interpreted by the U.S. EPA models as being equal to the default value
specified for the Flagpole Receptors option. If no default height was specified, then the flagpole height will
default to 0.0 meters.
Group Name: The group name, RISK, is automatically assigned to every multi-tier grid receptor. To
change this group name click within the cell to display the button. You can then click on this button to
open the Receptor Groups dialog.

94
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Nested Grid Receptors

The Nested Grid Receptors screen allows you to define a nested grid. Nested grids are grids with varying
mesh size which are embedded in each other (nested). Each individual grid in a nested grid is called a tier grid.
Generally, the grid with the smaller mesh size is used near the sources while further away from the sources, a
larger mesh size grid is used. Select Grids - Nested from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor
Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Nested Grid

Two tabs are available in the Nested Grid Receptors screen -

Grid Settings tab

In this tab you must specify the following parameters to define the Nested Grid:

Bounding Box: In this panel you need to define the parameters for your bounding box. This is the box
that bounds the sources in your project -
Origin (SW Corner): You must define the X and Y coordinates for the origin (south-west corner) of the
bounding box.
Size: Specify the width and the height of the bounding box.
Receptor Spacing: Specify the spacing between receptors in the X and Y directions within the bounding
box.
Grids: In this panel you can define the spacing for the individual grids -
Distance from Bounding Box: You must specify the distance in meters from the bounding box to each
tier.
Receptor Spacing: For each tier or nested grid, you must specify the spacing between receptors in the X
and Y directions.

Note: If you have graphically defined the grid using the Nested Grid Receptors Tool,
the above fields will be automatically filled. You may modify the values if you
wish.

95
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Note: The Nested Grid Receptors Tool automatically defines the grid extents based on
the location of your sources, according to Ontario Provincial MOE specifications
outlined in the Air Dispersion Modelling Guideline for Ontario (ADMGO).

# Receptors: This field displays the total number of receptors defined for the current receptor grid
network, and is automatically filled. Receptors are defined at each grid node.

Generated Receptors tab

The Generated Receptors tab displays the X and Y coordinates for the generated grid receptors. The Terrain
Elevations column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in the Terrain Options page.
Specify elevations for the nested grid receptors. If no terrain elevations are defined when you are modeling with
Elevated terrain, then the elevations will default to 0.0 meters. If you have processed and imported terrain
elevation files, the elevations will be automatically displayed here. The Hill Heights column is displayed only if the
Elevated terrain option was selected in the Terrain Options page. Here you can view the hill heights generated
from AERMAP once you've processed your terrain data.

Nested Grid - Generated Discrete Receptors tab

The following buttons are available:

Click this button to select from two options:

Remove Plant Receptors - Eliminates receptors that are within the plant boundary.
Convert to Discrete- coverts the grid into discrete Cartesian receptors. This option is used when
there is a need to eliminate one or more receptors from the receptor grid, for example, eliminate
receptors within a plant boundary.
Export to CSV File - exports the location of each grid node as discrete receptors, with each
receptor's parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y), terrain elevations (ELEV), hill
heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) to a file.

Click on this button if you wish to retrieve the discarded receptors within the plant
boundary, or to update the Generated Receptors list after a modification.

96
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Discrete Cartesian Receptors

The Discrete Cartesian Receptors screen allows you to define one or more discrete Cartesian receptors.
Select Discrete Receptors - Discrete Cartesian from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor
Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Discrete Cartesian

The following parameters are necessary to define a Discrete Cartesian Receptor:

No.: This column displays the entry number or record number for each receptor you have defined.
X Coord.: This is the X coordinate, in meters, for the receptor location.
Y Coord.: This is the Y coordinate, in meters, for the receptor location.

Note: If you have graphically defined a receptor using the Discrete Cartesian Receptor
Tool, the above fields will be automatically filled. You may modify the values if
you wish.

Terrain Elevations: This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in the
Terrain Options page. Specify elevations for the receptors. If you have processed and imported terrain
elevation files, the elevations will be automatically displayed here.

Note: If you are modeling with Elevated terrain and no value is input in the Terrain
Elevations column, then the missing terrain elevations will default to 0.0 meters.

Hill Heights: AERMOD Only—This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in
the Terrain Options page. Here you can view the hill heights generated from AERMAP once you've
processed your terrain data.

Note: You may modify the hill heights, but this is only recommended for advanced
users.

Flagpole Heights: This column is displayed only if the Flagpole Receptors terrain option was selected in
the Receptor Summary page. Specify the receptor height above ground in meters. Any missing values in the
Flagpole Heights column will be interpreted by the U.S. EPA models as being equal to the default value

97
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

specified for the Flagpole Receptors option. If no default height was specified, then the flagpole height will
default to 0.0 meters.
Group Name: Here, you can specify a group name for your receptors. To change this group name click
within the cell to display the button. You can then click on this button to open the Receptor Groups
dialog.

Note: It is possible to display discrete receptors in the drawing area with different
colors and markers. For example, if you have sensitive receptors that you would
like displayed differently from the rest of the receptors in your project you can do
so in the Graphical Options - Color Mappings page. The only requirement for this
option is that the receptor/s must be categorized in a separate group.

The following buttons are available:

Click this button to select from three options:

Import from File - Imports receptor parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y),
terrain elevations (ELEV), hill heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) from a file.
Export to CSV File - exports the receptor parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y),
terrain elevations (ELEV), hill heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) to a file.
Remove Plant Receptors - Eliminates receptors that are within the plant boundary.

The buttons at the bottom of the Discrete Cartesian Receptors window, called the Record Navigator buttons, will
help you in managing the information that is defined for your receptors.

Discrete Polar Receptors

The Discrete Polar screen allows you to define one or more discrete polar receptors. Discrete Polar Receptors
are defined by specifying a distance and a direction (angle) from an existing source. Select Discrete Receptors
- Discrete Polar from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor Pathway dialog, to display the available
options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Discrete Polar Receptors

98
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

The following parameters are necessary to define a discrete polar receptor:

No.: This column displays the record number for each discrete polar receptor you have defined.
Source ID: You must define which source is the origin for the polar receptor location. AERMOD View
automatically supplies you with the list of the Source IDs for all sources defined for your project. Click the
cell to display a drop-down list containing all the available sources.
Distance: This is the distance, in meters, from the source to the discrete polar receptor.
Angle: This is the direction, in degrees, measured clockwise from north for the discrete polar receptor
location.

Note: If you have graphically defined a receptor using the Discrete Polar Receptor Tool,
the above fields will be automatically filled. You may modify the values if you
wish.

Terrain Elevations: This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in the
Terrain Options page. Specify elevations for the receptors. If you are modeling with Elevated terrain and no
value is input in the Terrain Elevations column, then the missing terrain elevations will default to 0.0 meters
If you have processed and imported terrain elevation files, the elevations will be automatically displayed
here.
Hill Heights: AERMOD Only This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in
the Terrain Options page. Here you can view the hill heights generated from AERMAP once you've
processed your terrain data.

Note: You may modify the hill heights, but this is only recommended for advanced
users.

Flagpole Heights: This column is displayed only if the Flagpole Receptors terrain option was selected in
the Receptor Summary page. Specify the receptor height above ground in meters. Any missing values in the
Flagpole Heights column will be interpreted by the U.S. EPA models as being equal to the default value
specified for the Flagpole Receptors option. If no default height was specified, then the flagpole height will
default to 0.0 meters.
Group Name: Here may specify a group name. Click the Group Name cell to display the button. You can
then click on this button to open the Receptor Groups dialog.

The following buttons are available:

Click this button to select the following option:

Export to CSV File - exports the receptor parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y),
terrain elevations (ELEV), hill heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) to a file.

The buttons at the bottom of the Discrete Polar Receptors window, called the Record Navigator buttons, will help
you in managing the information that is defined for your receptors.

Discrete ARC Receptors

AERMOD Only

In the Discrete ARC page, you can define one or more Discrete Cartesian (ARC) Receptors. The Discrete
Cartesian (ARC) Receptor option is only applicable to AERMOD and is the only option that the grouping of
receptors is recognized by the U.S. EPA model. This Discrete Cartesian (ARC) Receptors option is designed to be

99
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

used with the EVALFILE option described in the Evaluation Files window. If the Discrete Cartesian (ARC)
Receptors option is used without the use of the EVALFILE option, then the receptor grouping is ignored.

Select Discrete Receptors - Discrete ARC from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor Pathway
dialog, to display the available options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Discrete ARC Receptors

The following parameters are necessary to define Discrete Cartesian (ARC) Receptors:

Unique ARC ID.: Check this box if you wish to have a unique ID for each receptor.
No.: This column displays the entry number or record number for each receptor you have defined.
X Coord.: This is the X coordinate, in meters, for the receptor location.
Y Coord.: This is the Y coordinate, in meters, for the receptor location.

Note: If you have graphically defined a receptor using the Discrete Cartesian Receptor
(ARC) Tool, the above fields will be automatically filled. You may modify the
values if you wish.

Terrain Elevations: This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in the
Terrain Options page. Specify elevations for the receptors. If you have processed and imported terrain
elevation files, the elevations will be automatically displayed here.

Note: If you are modeling with Elevated terrain and no value is input in the Terrain
Elevations column, then the missing terrain elevations will default to 0.0 meters.

Hill Heights: AERMOD Only—This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in
the Terrain Options page. Here you can view the hill heights generated from AERMAP once you've
processed your terrain data.

Note: You may modify the hill heights, but this is only recommended for advanced
users.

Flagpole Heights: This column is displayed only if the Flagpole Receptors terrain option was selected in
the Receptor Summary page. Specify the receptor height above ground in meters. Any missing values in the
Flagpole Heights column will be interpreted by the U.S. EPA models as being equal to the default value

100
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

specified for the Flagpole Receptors option. If no default height was specified, then the flagpole height will
default to 0.0 meters.
Receptor Group ID: The Receptor Group ID can be used to group receptors by ARC. This parameter is
mandatory for Discrete Cartesian (ARC) Receptors. The group name, ARCREC, is automatically assigned
every time you add a new receptor. This group name can be changed at any time by clicking within the cell
to display the button. You can then click on this button to open the Receptor Groups dialog.
ARC ID: This column is displayed instead of the Receptor Group ID column if you have checked the
Unique ARC ID box. A unique, default ID will be assigned and displayed for each receptor.

The following buttons are available:

Click this button to select from three options:

Remove Plant Receptors - Eliminates receptors that are within the plant boundary.
Import from File - Imports receptor parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y),
terrain elevations (ELEV), hill heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) from a file.
Export to CSV File - exports the receptor parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y),
terrain elevations (ELEV), hill heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) to a file.

The buttons at the bottom of the Discrete ARC Receptors window, called the Record Navigator buttons, will help
you in managing the information that is defined for your receptors.

Cartesian Plant Boundary

In the Cartesian Plant Boundary page, you can define the boundaries of your plant using discrete Cartesian
receptors. Select Fenceline - Cart. Plant Boundary from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor
Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Cartesian Plant Boundary

You can define your plant boundary or fenceline by assigning discrete Cartesian receptors for each node of the
fenceline polygon. The fenceline nodes, also called primary fenceline receptors, must be defined in a clockwise
direction or counter clockwise direction. Intermediate receptors are assigned between primary fenceline
receptors, equally spaced.

101
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

At the top of the list you can enter an identification name for the plant boundary being defined. The ID can be
up to 8 characters long and are always in upper case. Click the button to get default IDs automatically set up
for you.

Two tabs are available in the Cartesian Plant Boundary window:

Primary tab

In this tab you can define the primary fenceline receptors. The following parameters must be defined -

No.: This column displays the record number for each fenceline node (discrete Cartesian receptor) you have
defined.
X Coord.: This is the X coordinate, in meters, for the node location.
Y Coord.: This is the Y coordinate, in meters, for the node location.
Terrain Elevations: This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in the
Terrain Options page. Specify elevations for the receptors. If you have processed and imported terrain
elevation files, the elevations will be automatically displayed here.

Note: If you are modeling with Elevated terrain and no value is input in the Terrain
Elevations column, then the missing terrain elevations will default to 0.0 meters.

Hill Heights: AERMOD Only—This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in
the Terrain Options page. Here you can view the hill heights generated from AERMAP once you've
processed your terrain data.

Note: You may modify the hill heights, but this is only recommended for advanced
users.

Flagpole Heights: This column is displayed only if the Flagpole Receptors terrain option was selected in
the Receptor Summary page. Specify the receptor height above ground in meters. Any missing values in the
Flagpole Heights column will be interpreted by the U.S. EPA models as being equal to the default value
specified for the Flagpole Receptors option. If no default height was specified, then the flagpole height will
default to 0.0 meters.
Group Name: The group name, FENCEPRI, is automatically assigned every time you add a new fenceline
node. To change this group name click within the cell to display the button. You can then click on this
button to open the Receptor Groups dialog.

Intermediate tab

In this tab you can easily assign intermediate receptors to your fenceline.

102
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Cartesian Plant Boundary - Intermediate tab

In the Place Plant Boundary Receptors Every text box specify the spacing between intermediate receptors
in meters and click the button. Discrete receptors will be automatically placed between nodes, equally
spaced. The distance between receptors will be rounded to an even multiple of the spacing you have specified.
As an example, if between two fenceline nodes you have a distance of 100 meters and the specified spacing is
30 meters, then 3 intermediate receptors will be placed between the two primary nodes spaced every 25 meters.

The following buttons are available:

Click this button to select from these options:

Convert to Discrete - coverts the current grid into discrete Cartesian receptors. This option is
used when there is a need to eliminate one or more receptors from the grid, for example, eliminate
receptors within a plant boundary.
Remove Plant Receptors - Eliminates receptors that are within the plant boundary.
Import from File - Imports discrete ARC Cartesian receptor parameters, such as X coordinate (x),
Y coordinate (y), terrain elevations (ELEV), hill heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) from a
file.
Export to CSV File - exports the receptor parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y),
terrain elevations (ELEV), hill heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) to a file.
Export Blanking File - Select this option to export the plant boundary as a blanking file which
allows you to mask a specified portion of your plot file.

Note: If you defined a plant boundary in your AERMOD View project, a plant boundary
blanking file is automatically generated which masks the contour plot lines inside
your plant boundary. This Plant Blanking Boundary layer is placed in the Tree
View - Overlays tab, you can chose whether or not to display this layer.

The buttons at the bottom of the Cartesian Plant Boundary window, called the Record Navigator buttons, will
help you in managing the information that is defined for your receptors.

103
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Polar Plant Boundary

In the Polar Plant Boundary page, you can define the boundaries of your plant using polar plant boundary
receptors. For the polar plant boundary, you must define the distance from a specific source to the fenceline
every 10 degrees for 36 directions. Select Fenceline - Polar Plant Boundary from the tree located on the left
side of the Receptor Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Receptor Pathway dialog - Polar Plant Boundary

Three tabs are available in the Polar Plant Boundary screen-

Boundary Distances tab

To define polar plant boundary distances, you must specify the following -

Source ID (Origin): The location of the source will serve as the origin for 36 discrete polar receptors
located at every 10 degrees around the source. To specify the Source ID, click the button to display
the Source ID dialog from where you can select a source.
Boundary Distances: These are the distances in meters for each of the directions, beginning with the 10
degree radial and incrementing every 10 degrees clockwise. You must input these values in the table paying
attention to the exact direction of each cell. As you move from one cell to the other, AERMOD View displays
the degrees for each direction on the table heading.

Terrain Elevations tab

In this optional tab you may define boundary receptor elevations. Terrain elevations are only needed if you have
selected the Elevated terrain option in the Terrain Options page. Here you can input into the table the terrain
elevations for each of the 36 boundary receptor points. The default unit is meters, however you can use feet if
these were the units defined as the Terrain Elevations Unit. If you have processed and imported terrain elevation
files, the elevations will be automatically displayed here.

Note: There is no option for inputting boundary receptor flagpole heights. The easiest
way to input boundary receptors with flagpole receptor heights are to define
them as Cartesian Plant Boundary Receptors.
Note: For applications where a uniform flagpole receptor height is used for all
receptors, those flagpole receptor heights will also apply to any boundary
receptors defined as Polar Plant Boundary Receptors.

104
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Hill Heights tab

AERMOD Only In this optional tab you may view the hill heights generated from AERMAP once you've
processed your terrain data.

Note: You may modify the hill heights, but this is only recommended for advanced
users.

The following buttons are available:

Click this button to select from two options:

Convert to Cart. Plant Boundary - converts Polar Plant Boundary Receptors into Cartesian Plant
Boundary Receptors. Use this option when you need to eliminate receptors within plant boundary.
AERMOD View only eliminates receptors within a plant boundary that was specified as Cartesian
Plant Boundary.
Export to CSV File - exports the receptor parameters, such as X coordinate (x), Y coordinate (y),
terrain elevations (ELEV), hill heights (HILL), and flagpole heights (FLAG) to a file.

Fenceline Grid

The Fenceline Grid screen allows you to define a grid around your Cartesian Plant Boundary or fenceline. The
fenceline grid can have more than one tier with different grid spacings. Fenceline grid receptors are modeled in
ISCST3, ISC-PRIME, and AERMOD as Discrete Cartesian Receptors.

Select Fenceline - Fenceline Grid from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor Pathway dialog, to
display the available options. These options are available only if you have defined a Cartesian Plant Boundary.

Fenceline Grid

Note: The Fenceline Grid dialog is available only if you have created a Cartesian Plant
Boundary.

105
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

At the top of the dialog you can enter an identification name for the fenceline being defined. The ID can be up
to 8 characters long and are always in upper case. Click the button to get a default ID automatically set up
for you.

Two tabs are available in the Fenceline Grid dialog -

Grid Settings tab

To define the Fenceline Grid, you must specify the following:

Fenceline Spacing: Here you must define the spacing between receptors along the fenceline.
No. of Tiers: Specify the number of tiers. Tiers are the segments with different grid spacing.

Adds a new tier to the table.

Deletes the selected tier from the table.

Segment Distance: You must specify the distance between tiers. AERMOD View places some default
values for each tier you create. These values however can be changed to suit your modeling needs.
Tier Spacing: For each tier, you must specify the spacing between receptors perpendicular to the
fenceline. AERMOD View places some default values for each tier you create. These values however can be
changed to suit your modeling needs.

The following buttons are available:

Click this button to select the following option:

Convert to Discrete - converts the fenceline grid into discrete receptors.

Click this button to generate the Fenceline Grid. When AERMOD finishes
generating the grid, the total number of receptors created is automatically
displayed. If you wish to delete the generated receptors click the Delete All
button.

Generated Receptors tab

This tab is automatically displayed once you have clicked on the button. The X and Y
coordinates for all fenceline grid receptors are automatically calculated and displayed here.

106
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Depending on the modeling options you have selected, the following additional parameters must be specified:

Terrain Elevations: This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in the
Terrain Options page. Specify elevations for the fenceline grid receptors. If no terrain elevations are defined
when you are modeling with Elevated terrain, then the elevations will default to 0.0 meters. If you have
processed and imported terrain elevation files, the elevations will be automatically displayed here.
Hill Heights: AERMOD Only This column is displayed only if the Elevated terrain option was selected in
the Terrain Options page. Here you can view the hill heights generated from AERMAP once you've
processed your terrain data.

Note: You may modify the hill heights, but this is only recommended for advanced
users.

Flagpole Heights: This column is displayed only if the Flagpole Receptors terrain option was selected in
the Receptor Summary page. Specify the receptor height above ground in meters. Any missing values in the
Flagpole Heights column will be interpreted by the U.S. EPA models as being equal to the default value
specified for the Flagpole Receptors option. If no default height was specified, then the flagpole height will
default to 0.0 meters.
Group Name: The group name, FENCEGRD, is automatically assigned to every fenceline grid receptor. To
change this group name click within the cell to display the button. You can then click on this button to
open the Receptor Groups dialog.

Importing Receptors

You may import receptors into your project by clicking on the button found in the Receptor
Summary dialog or by selecting Import | Receptors... from the menu. The Import Receptors from file dialog
is displayed allowing you to specify the name and location of the file containing the receptors to be imported.

AERMOD View can import receptors from any of the following file types:

ISCST3 Input Files (*.inp): This file is generated when you run the ISCST3 model or when you select
Run | View Input File | ISCST3 from the menu.
ISC-PRIME Input Files (*.pin): This file is generated when you run the ISC-PRIME model or when you
select Run | View Input File | ISC-PRIME from the menu.
AERMOD Input Files (*.ain): This file is generated when you run the AERMOD model or when you select
Run | View Input File | AERMOD from the menu.

107
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

RE Pathway Partial Input Files (*.p2): This file can be generated by selecting Export | Pathway to
File | RE Pathway to File from the menu.
RE Included Files (*.rou): This file is generated by AERMAP and contains all the receptor information for
your AERMOD run in elevated terrain.

Note: For a detailed description of the standard ISCST3, ISC-PRIME, or AERMOD input
file format see the U.S. EPA User's Guide for ISCST3 and AMS/EPA User's Guide
for AERMOD.

During the receptor import process, if any Network IDs in the imported file conflict with existing Network IDs in
your project, then the Conflicting Network IDs dialog is displayed. From this dialog you can specify if a network
should be renamed or ignored.

Terrain Grid Pathway

Terrain Grid Options

ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME Only

The Terrain Grid Options screen allows you to define the input terrain grid data used in calculating dry
depletion in elevated or complex terrain.

Select Terrain Grid (TG) - Terrain Grid Options from the tree located on the left side of the Receptor
Pathway dialog, to display the available terrain grid options or select Data | Terrain Grid Pathway... from the
menu.

Terrain Grid Options

The following options are found in this window:

Terrain Grid Data: Check this box if you chose to use the terrain grid option and specify a terrain grid
data input file.

Note: The Terrain Grid option should only be used when modeling Dry Depletion in
Elevated Terrain. If the Dry Removal option was selected in the Control Pathway
and the Terrain Grid option is omitted, then the model will linearly interpolate
between the source base elevation and the receptor elevation when calculating

108
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

dry depletion. In all other cases when no dry depletion is calculated the model
will neglect the terrain grid data provided in Terrain Grid Pathway.

Terrain Grid Data File: Specify the name and location of the file containing the terrain grid data by
clicking on the button. Please note that the terrain grid data file must be in UTM coordinates. Grid
information for the specified file will be displayed in the panel.
Terrain Elevation Unit: Here you can select from the drop-down list the units of the elevations in your
terrain grid file. The default units for terrain elevations are meters above MSL (Mean Sea Level).

Click on this button to automatically generate a terrain grid file using the pre-
processed terrain elevations for the area you are modeling. By default the terrain grid data file will be placed in
your project folder with the project name (*.tgf). Grid information for the created file will also now be displayed.

Click on this button to display the TG Grid Settings dialog where you can specify the grid
settings for the generated terrain grid file.

Project Coordinate System

In this panel you must specify the Project Coordinate System. The following options are available -

UTM: Select UTM if you defined the source and receptor locations in UTM coordinates.
Local Cartesian: Select this option if you defined source and receptor locations in another coordinate
system. In this case, you also have to define the UTM coordinates of the Cartesian Coordinate System's
Origin by specifying the following -
X Coordinate (UTM): Enter the value to be added to the x coordinate locations of the sources and
receptors to translate them to UTM coordinates. The X Coordinate is the UTM coordinate for the origin of
the source/receptor coordinate system.
Y Coordinate (UTM): Enter the value to be added to the y coordinate locations of the sources and
receptors, to translate them to UTM coordinates. The Y Coordinate is the UTM coordinate for the origin of
the source/receptor coordinate system.
Units: Select from the drop-down list the unit used for the value input in the X Coordinate and Y
Coordinate text boxes, either meters, feet, or kilometers. The default unit is meters.

TG Grid Settings

The TG Grid Settings dialog allows you to change the default terrain grid spacing of 50 meters.

109
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

TG Grid Settings dialog

In the Specify Grid Settings panel, enter a value for the spacing between grid points and click the
button. AERMOD View calculates the number of data points in the X and Y directions that will be
created when the terrain grid is generated. It is important that you verify the calculated number of points in the
X and Y directions against the parameters MXTX and MXTY. These are the parameters in the U.S. EPA models
that control the maximum number of data points allowed in the terrain grid file. For the original U.S. EPA ISC-
PRIME model, these parameters have a limit of 201 points. In the ISCST3 model, on the other hand, the MXTX
and MXTY parameter limits are allocated dynamically at run time based on the number of grid points specified in
your terrain grid file.

Note: The creation of the terrain grid file may take hours of processing depending on
the number of data points and the domain extents of the pre-processed terrain
elevations. Please make sure you have the right spacing and domain extents
before creating the terrain grid file.

Create from Imported Terrain

When processing imported terrain elevations, such as USGS DEM, UK DTM, UK NTF, or XYZ files, AERMOD View
will create an intermediate database table where it stores terrain elevations for the selected domain. When you
click the button located in the Terrain Grid Options window, AERMOD View creates a Terrain
Grid Data File using these pre-processed terrain elevations. AERMOD View will read the database table
containing the pre-processed terrain elevation and resamples the data according to the spacing defined in the
TG Grid Settings dialog. By default, AERMOD View calculates terrain elevations for the specified domain (the
one specified when pre-processing the terrain elevations) for a grid spacing of 50 meters in the X and Y
directions. You can change this grid spacing in the TG Grid Settings dialog.

Terrain Grid Data File Format

The terrain grid file contains one header record, followed by any number of data records. The file is read as a
free-format ASCII file. The header record contains the following information:

nx, ny, xllm, yllm, xurm, yurm, sizem

110
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Where:

nx, ny: Number of data points in x (Easting) and Y (Northing) directions.

xllm, yllm: UTM coordinates (in meters) of the point at the lower left corner of the grid.
xurm, yurm: UTM coordinates (in meters) of the point at the upper right corner of the grid.
sizem: Spacing between grid points in both the x and y directions, in meters.

The data records are ordered by rows. The first row contains nx terrain elevations ordered from west to east,
starting at point (xllm, yllm). Row 2 contains the data for the next row to the north of the grid. There are a
total of ny rows of data in the terrain grid file. The maximum number of points in the terrain grid file is
controlled by the MXTX and MXTY parameters. See below a terrain grid data file that contains terrain elevations
for a 101x101 grid.

111
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Meteorology Pathway
The Meteorology Pathway allows you to specify the input meteorological data file and other meteorological
variables, including the period to process for the meteorological files. You have access to the Meteorology
Pathway dialog by selecting Data | Meteorology Pathway... from the menu or by clicking on the Met menu
toolbar button.

The Meteorology Pathway dialog uses a two-pane view. The tree located on the left side of the dialog is
used for navigation and item selection. Select an item (marked as ) in the tree to display the available options
on the right panel.

The Meteorology Pathway contains several panels; some panels are only available when certain options are
selected. The settings available on each panel of the Meteorology Pathway are described in the sections
below.

:Met Input Data

The Met Input Data screen allows you to specify the meteorological data file and information on the
meteorological stations. Meteorology Pathway - Met Input Data from the tree located on the left side of
the Meteorology Pathway dialog, to display the available met input options.

The inputs specified in the Met Input Data dialog differ slightly depending on the model being used. See
below the required inputs for each model -

AERMOD

The AERMOD model requires the following met inputs to be specified:

Surface Met Data

AERMOD uses hourly meteorological data from separate surface and profile data files. In this panel you must
specify the surface met data file you will be using for your project.

File Name: The surface met data file contains observed and calculated surface variables, one record per
hour. Click the button to specify the name and location of the profile met data file to be used. The full
path of the specified met data file will be displayed on the panel. If the specified met data file is located in
the same path as the project, then only the file name will be displayed.
Format: Select from the drop-down list the format of the surface meteorological data file. The default
format for the surface data file corresponds with the format of the files generated by the AERMET

112
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

meteorological preprocessor program. You also have the option of specifying the Fortran read format for
the surface met data file.

Profile Met Data

AERMOD uses hourly meteorological data from separate surface and profile data files. In this panel you must
specify the profile met data file you will be using for your project.

Note: If the Profile Met Data File has the same name as the Surface file and is in the
same location, it will be automatically loaded when the Surface file is specified.

File Name: The profile met data file contains the observations made at each level of an on-site tower, or
the one level observations taken from NWS data. Click the button to specify the name and location of
the profile met data file to be used. The full path of the specified met data file will be displayed on the
panel. If the specified met data file is located in the same path as the project, then only the file name will
be displayed.
Format: Select from the drop-down list the format of the profile meteorological data file. The default
format for the profile data file corresponds with the format of the files generated by the AERMET
meteorological preprocessor program. You also have the option of specifying the Fortran read format for
the profile met data file.

Surface Station Primary Met Tower (Anemometer)

This option allows you to specify the base elevation above mean sea-level (MSL) of the surface station's primary
met tower. If you wish to specify the base elevation in feet, click the down arrow beside the [m] indicator, and
choose ft.

Note: This does not denote the height of the anemometer.

Optional Wind Direction

This option allows you to correct the meteorological data for wind direction alignment problems. All input wind
directions or flow vectors are rotated by a user-specified amount. Since the model results at particular receptor
locations are often quite sensitive to the transport wind direction, this option should be used only with extreme
caution and with clear justification.

Rotation: Specify the angle in degrees to rotate the input wind direction measurements. The specified
value will be subtracted from the wind direction measurements. This option may be used to correct for
known (and documented) calibration errors, or to adjust for the alignment of a valley if the meteorological
station is located in a valley with a different alignment than the source location. Since the Short Term
models use the flow vector (direction toward which the wind is blowing) as the basic input, the rotate value
may also be used to convert input data as wind direction, (direction from which the wind is blowing), to flow
vector by setting the rotation equal to 180 degrees.

113
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Surface, Upper Air & On-Site Meteorological Stations

The following information is requested for the surface, upper air and on-site meteorological stations -

Station No.: This is the station number for the meteorological station. For National Weather Service
(NWS) stations this is a 5-digit WBAN (Weather Bureau Army Navy) number.
Year: This is the year of meteorological data being processed. If you are using more than one year of met
data, then you should specify the first year of the met data.
Station Name: This is an optional parameter specifying the name of the station. The model accepts a
name of up to 40 characters including spaces. Spaces in the name will be substituted by underscores in the
input file.

Note: AERMOD View will read the station number and year from the met file header
and display it automatically. If the meteorological station is a NWS station, then
AERMOD View will also display the station name.

X Coord.: If you wish, you can specify here the X coordinate for the location of the meteorological station.
At the present time, the U.S. EPA models do not use the station locations (X & Y Coordinates).
Y Coord.: If you wish, you can specify here the Y coordinate for the location of the meteorological station.
At the present time, the U.S. EPA models do not use the station locations (X & Y Coordinates).
Using On-Site Data: This box must be checked if your pre-processed met data includes on-site data. If
this box is checked, than you have access to the On-Site Station tab where you can specify the
parameters described above.

Note: It is important that the station number and met data year be provided correctly
since the EPA model will compare these parameters with the ones provided in
the meteorological data files. If a mismatch is found, non-fatal warning
messages will be issued.

ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME

The ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME models require the following met inputs to be specified -

Meteorology Pathway dialog - Met Input Data

114
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Meteorological Input Data File and Format

ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME uses hourly meteorological data as one of the basic model inputs. The meteorological data
is read into the models from a separate data file. In this panel you must specify the met data file you will be
using for your project.

File Name: Click the button to specify the name and location of the meteorological data file to be
used. The full path of the specified met data file will be displayed on the panel. If the specified met data
file is located in the same path as the project, then only the file name will be displayed.
Format: Select from the drop-down list the format of the meteorological data file specified. The following
formats are available for selection -
Default ASCII format: This is the default ASCII format for a sequential hourly file.
Specify FORTRAN ASCII read format: If this option is selected than the FORTRAN read format for
an ASCII sequential hourly file should be specified in the User Format field. The user specified ASCII
format can be up to 60 characters long and may be used to specify the READ format for files that differ
from the default format.
FREE-formatted reads: This is the free-formatted reads for an ASCII sequential hourly file.
UNFORMatted file (RAMMET or MPRM): Unformatted file generated by the RAMMET or MPRM
preprocessors. The UNFORMatted file format is no longer supported by ISCST3 (dated 00101) but is
still currently provided in ISC-PRIME.

Note: If Dry Deposition and/or Wet Deposition were selected on the Control Pathway,
the Unformatted file (RAMMET or MPRM)) cannot be used. This is due to the
fact that the deposition algorithms require additional meteorological variables not
found in this file format.

CARD image: “CARD image” data using a default ASCII format. This option differs from option 1 by
the addition of hourly wind profile exponents and hourly vertical potential temperature gradients in the
input file.

Note: If the Gas Dry Deposition option was selected in the Control Pathway, then you
must use the CARD Image format. This is due to the fact that PCRAMMET does
not support preprocessing for Gas Dry Deposition, thus MPRM must be used.

Anemometer Height

In this panel you must specify the height above ground at which the wind speed data was collected for the met
data being used. The models will adjust the input wind speeds from the anemometer height to the release
height. This way, the accurate specification of anemometer height is important to obtaining the correct model
results.

Height: This is the height of the anemometer measurement above ground. You can select the
measurement units of meters or feet.

Note: For National Weather Service (NWS) data, you should check records such as the
Local Climatological Data summary report for the particular station to determine
the correct anemometer height for the data period used in the modeling, since
the anemometer location and height may change over time.

115
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Optional Wind Direction

This option allows you to correct the meteorological data for wind direction alignment problems. All input wind
directions or flow vectors are rotated by a user-specified amount. Since the model results at particular receptor
locations are often quite sensitive to the transport wind direction, this option should be used only with extreme
caution and with clear justification.

Rotation: Specify the angle in degrees to rotate the input wind direction measurements. The specified
value will be subtracted from the wind direction measurements. This option may be used to correct for
known (and documented) calibration errors, or to adjust for the alignment of a valley if the meteorological
station is located in a valley with a different alignment than the source location. Since the Short Term
models use the flow vector (direction toward which the wind is blowing) as the basic input, the rotate value
may also be used to convert input data as wind direction, (direction from which the wind is blowing), to flow
vector by setting the rotation equal to 180 degrees.

Surface & Upper Air Meteorological Stations

The following information is requested for both the surface and the upper air meteorological stations -

Station No.: This is the station number for the meteorological station. For National Weather Service
(NWS) stations this is a 5-digit WBAN (Weather Bureau Army Navy) number.
Year: This is the year of meteorological data being processed. If you are using more than one year of met
data, then you should specify the first year of the met data.
Station Name: This is an optional parameter specifying the name of the station. The model accepts a
name of up to 40 characters including spaces. Spaces in the name will be substituted by underscores in the
input file.

Note: AERMOD View will read the station number and year from the met file header
and display it automatically. If the meteorological station is a NWS station, then
AERMOD View will also display the station name.

X Coord.: If you wish, you can specify here the X coordinate for the location of the meteorological station.
At the present time, the U.S. EPA models do not use the station locations (X & Y Coordinates).
Y Coord.: If you wish, you can specify here the Y coordinate for the location of the meteorological station.
At the present time, the U.S. EPA models do not use the station locations (X & Y Coordinates).

Note: It is important that the station number and met data year be provided correctly
since the EPA model will compare these parameters with the ones provided in
the meteorological data files. If a mismatch is found, non-fatal warning
messages will be issued.

116
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Data Period

The Data Period screen allows you to specify particular days or ranges of days to process from the sequential
meteorological file input if you do not want to read the entire met data file. Select Meteorology Pathway -
Data Period from the tree located on the left side of the Meteorology Pathway dialog, to display the available
data period options.

Meteorology Pathway dialog - Data Period

At the top of the dialog you can specify whether or not you want the model to read the entire meteorological
data file. If you select No, the following options become available for selection -

Specify Data Period to Process

Check this box if you wish to specify which period within the meteorological data file the model reads. The
following are the inputs necessary if this option is selected:

Start Date: You must specify the year, month, and day of the first record to be read from the
meteorological data file.
End Date: You must specify the year, month, and day of the last record to be read from the
meteorological data file.
Hour: These are optional parameters that may be used to specify the start and end hours for the data
period to be read. If either one is to be specified, then both must be specified. If the start and end hours
are not specified, then processing begins with hour 1 of the start date, and ends with hour 24 of the end
date.

Note: Any records in the data file that occur before the Start Date and after the End
Date are ignored.

Specify Particular Days and/or Ranges of Days to Process

Check this box if you wish to specify which days or range of days should be read by the model. Click the
button to display the Specify Days to Process dialog.

Once you have made your selections the days and/or range of days that you specified are displayed in the list.

117
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Click on this button to delete the selected entry from the list.

Click on this button to clear the entire list.

Note: Any Period averages calculated by the model will apply only to the period of data
actually processed. Therefore, if you want to calculate a six-month average you
can select Period average in the Pollutant/Averaging window, and then specify
the six-month period.

Wind Speed Categories

The Wind Speed Categories screen allows you to specify whether you want the model to use the default wind
speed categories or user specified values. Select Meteorology Pathway - Wind Speed Categories from the
tree located on the left side of the Meteorology Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Meteorology Pathway dialog - Wind Speed Categories

The US EPA models use six wind speed categories. These are defined by the upper bound wind speed which
must be defined for the first five categories. The sixth category is assumed to have no upper bound. If you
select the Default Values option, AERMOD View automatically inputs the default values for wind speed
categories in the panels and does not allow you to change these values. The default values used by the models
are as follows:

Category Wind Speed (m/s)

A 1.54
B 3.09
C 5.14
D 8.23
E 10.8
F No Upper Bound

If you chose the User Specified option, you can specify wind speed values other then the default values in the
text boxes for each category. These values are defined by the upper bound wind speed for the first five
categories, the sixth category is assumed to have no upper bound.

118
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Click on this button to place the default wind speed values in the fields.

Click on this button to clear all the values in the text boxes.

Wind Profile Exponents

ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME Only

The Wind Profile Exponents screen provides you the option of specifying wind profile exponent values other
than the default. Select Meteorology Pathway - Wind Profile Exponents from the tree located on the left
side of the Meteorology Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Meteorology Pathway dialog - Wind Profile Exponents

Wind profile exponents are the values of the exponent used to specify the profile of wind speed with height
according to the power law. The ISCST3 and ISC-PRIME models use default wind profile exponents if the
Regulatory Default option is selected in the Control Pathway. If the Non-Default Options is selected, you then
have the choice of specifying wind profile exponent values other than the default.

If you select the Default Values option, AERMOD View automatically inputs the default values for the wind
profile exponents and does not allow you to change these values. The default values used by the models for
rural and urban dispersion coefficients are as follows:

Pasquill Stability Wind Profile Exponents

Category
Rural Urban
A 0.07 0.15
B 0.07 0.15
C 0.10 0.20
D 0.15 0.25
E 0.35 0.30
F 0.55 0.30

If you chose the User Specified option, you can specify wind profile exponents other then the default values in
the table.

119
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Note: You can only specify wind profile exponents if the Non-Default Options was
selected in the Control Pathway.

Click on this button to place the default wind profile exponents in the table.

Click on this button to clear all values from the table.

Vertical Temperature Gradients

ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME Only

In the Vertical Temperature Gradients screen you have the option of specifying vertical temperature
gradients values other than the default. Select Meteorology Pathway - Vertical Temperature Gradients
from the tree located on the left side of the Meteorology Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Meteorology Pathway dialog - Vertical Temperature Gradients

Vertical potential temperature gradient is the change of potential temperature with height, used in modeling the
plume rise through a stable layer, and indicates the strength of the stable temperature inversion. A positive
value means that potential temperature increases with height above ground and indicates a stable atmosphere.

The ISCST3 and ISC-PRIME models use default vertical temperature gradients if the Regulatory Default option is
selected in the Control Pathway. If the Non-Default Options is selected, you then have the choice of specifying
vertical temperature gradients values other than the default.

If you select the Default Values option, AERMOD View automatically inputs the default values for the vertical
potential temperature gradients and does not allow you to change these values. The default values used by the
models for rural and urban dispersion coefficients are as follows:

Pasquill Stability Wind Profile Exponents

Category
Rural (K/m) Urban (K/m)
A 0.0 0.0
B 0.0 0.0
C 0.0 0.0

120
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Pasquill Stability Wind Profile Exponents

Category
Rural (K/m) Urban (K/m)
D 0.0 0.0
E 0.02 0.02
F 0.035 0.035

If you chose the User Specified option, you can specify vertical potential temperature gradients other then the
default values in the table.

Note: You can only specify vertical temperature gradients if the Non-Default Options
was selected in the Control Pathway.

Click on this button to place the default vertical potential temperature gradients in the
table.

Click on this button to clear all values from the table.

SCIM Sampling

ISCST3 & AERMOD Only

The SCIM Sampling screen provides you with the option to reduce model runtime and is primarily applicable to
multi-year model simulations. The SCIM (Sampled Chronological Input Model) option samples the
meteorological data at a user-specified regular interval to approximate the long-term (Annual) average impacts.

Select Meteorology Pathway - SCIM Sampling from the tree located on the left side of the Meteorology
Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Meteorology Pathway dialog - SCIM Sampling (ISCST3)

Note: The SCIM Sampling option is available only if you have selected the Non-Default,
TOXICS, SCIM option in the Control Pathway and can only be used with the
Annual averaging period.

121
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The SCIM Sampling parameters to be specified differ depending on the model, ISCST3 or AERMOD. See below
the required parameters -

ISCST3

For the ISCST3 model, the SCIM option has the following restrictions:

Can only be used with the Annual averaging option.

The Total Deposition (Dry and Wet) option is ignored. The user is advised to calculate dry and wet
deposition rates separately using the Dry Deposition and Wet Deposition options and to add the two to
obtain the total deposition rate when the SCIM option is used.

The following parameters should be defined -

Save Met Data for Sampled Hours: By default this file will be have the same name as your project
(projectname.scm) and will be saved to your project folder. If you wish to specify the name and location of
this file click the button. This output file will contain the meteorological data for the sampled hours.
Regular or Dry Sample: You must specify the starting hour and the number of hours to skip (sampling
interval) for the regular or dry sample. The starting hour can range from 1 to 24 and must be on the first
day in the meteorological data file. The number of hours to skip must be greater than 1.
Wet Sample: Check this option if you want to specify the starting hour and the number of hours to skip
(sampling interval) for the wet sample. The only restriction for the wet sample option is that the starting
hour cannot be greater than the number of hours to skip. Since wet deposition does not occur at regular
intervals, you can also specify the wet sampling interval to reduce uncertainty introduced by sampling for
wet deposition.

AERMOD

The following parameters should be defined -

Meteorology Pathway dialog - SCIM Sampling (AERMOD)

Optional Files to Store the Met Data for the Sampled Hours: By default these files will be have the
same name as your project (projectname.sc1 and projectname.sc2) and will be saved to your project folder.
If you wish to specify a different name and location for these files click the button. These output files
will contain the surface and profile meteorological data for the sampled hours.

122
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Regular or Dry Sample: You must specify the starting hour and the number of hours to skip (sampling
interval) for the regular or dry sample. The starting hour can range from 1 to 24 and must be on the first
day in the meteorological data file. The number of hours to skip must be greater than 1.

Creating and Troubleshooting Meteorological Data Files

If you are manually creating a meteorological data file in one of the standard formats (e.g. SAMSON), or are
attempting to determine why meteorological processing is producing errors, consider the following:

Spacing - General: Many formats require that each field not only have a specific number of spaces, but
that the field must occupy specific spaces on each row. For example, a format might specify that the wind
speed must be places in spaces 46-50 on a line. These spaces are reserved for the wind speed and wind
speed only, and nothing else should appear there; conversely, the wind speed should not appear anywhere
aside from these spaces.
Spacing - End of File: Sometimes AERMET will crash if there blank spaces at the end of lines, or extra
lines at the end of a data file. If you receive error messages where the source of the problem is not
immediately obvious, this is a good thing to check.
Minimum and Maximum Values: Some formats only allow minimum and maximum values. Even if there
are no specific maximum and minimum values, you should check to make sure values are reasonable; as an
example, a wind speed of 120 miles per hour may be legal for a surface measurement, but is extremely
improbable unless a hurricane was passing by.
Headers: Some formats have specific requirements for the header ; similar to the format of the data, the
header may have certain spaces reserved for specific information (such as location name, latitude/longitude,
etc.)
Missing Indicators: Most formats have certain numbers or strings that are used to represent missing
values. SAMSON files will use -999 in many cases for missing data; you should make sure to use the
indicators in your data file.

123
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Output Pathway
The Output Pathway allows you to specify the output options for a particular run such as contour plot files and
threshold violation files. You have access to the Output Pathway dialog by selecting Data | Output
Pathway... from the menu or by clicking on the Output menu toolbar button.

The Output Pathway dialog uses a two-pane view. The tree located on the left side of the dialog is used for
navigation and item selection. Select an item (marked as ) in the tree to display the available options on the
right panel.

The Output Pathway contains several pages. The settings available on each page of the Output Pathway
are described in the sections below.

Tabular Outputs

In the Tabular Outputs screen you can define tabular output options for each short-term averaging period
selected in the Pollutant/Averaging screen in the Control Pathway. The tabular output options do not apply to
the Period or Annual averaging time. Select Output Pathway - Tabular Outputs from the tree located on the
left side of the Output Pathway dialog, to display the available tabular output options.

Output Pathway dialog - Tabular Outputs

Note: If no short-term averaging period was selected in the Pollutant/Averaging

screen in the Control Pathway, then the tabular output options are not available
for use. AERMOD View displays a message advising you that no short-term
averaging periods were selected for the current run.

There are three tabular outputs available for selection -

Highest Values

This option produces tables of high values summarized by receptor for each short-term averaging period. For
each short-term averaging period, you should check the high values that are applicable to your modeling. You
can choose up to the 10th highest value to be reported for ISCST3 and AERMOD. ISC-PRIME will only report up
to the 6th highest value.

In the output file, the highest values table is displayed with the following format:

124
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

The above example shows that the first highest concentration value at the specified receptor location
(439100.00, 5298300.00) is 1078.51770 micrograms/m**3 and occurs on November 4, 1988 at hour 24.

The following buttons are available to facilitate the selection of the highest values check boxes:

Checks all the High Value check boxes for the current row.

Clears all selected High Value check boxes for the current row.

For cases where you want the same high values to be applied to all the short-term averaging periods being
modeled, the input may be simplified by checking which high values are to be summarized by receptor for the
ALL averaging period option.

Maximum Values

This option defines the number of overall highest values that will be summarized in the output file for each
short-term averaging period being modeled. A separate maximum overall value table is produced for each
source group.

If, for example, you specify 50 for the maximum values option then the model will produce a table for each
short-term averaging period and each source group containing the 50 highest values.

In the output file, the maximum values table is displayed with the following format:

The above example shows that the first ranked concentration value out of the 50 has a concentration of
101.44812 micrograms/m**3 and occurs on May 21, 1988 at hour 23 for the specified receptor location
(439900.00, 5299200.00).

For cases where you want the same maximum value to be applied to all the short-term averaging periods being
modeled, the input may be simplified by entering the maximum value for the ALL averaging period option.

Note: The number of overall maximum values that the model can store is unlimited for
ISCST3 and AERMOD but is set at 50 for ISC-PRIME.

125
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Daily Values

This option controls the output options for tables of concurrent values summarized by receptor for each day
processed. For each averaging period for which the daily values option is selected, the model will print in the
main output file the concurrent averages for all receptors for each day of data processed. Results are output for
each source group.

For example, if 2 and 4-hour averages are calculated and the daily values option is selected for both averages,
then for the first day of data processed (Day 1), there will be:

12 sets of tables for the 2-hr average (one for each 2-hour period in the day)
6 sets of tables for the 4-hr average (one for each 4-hour period in the day)

For cases where you want to define daily tables for all the short-term averaging periods being modeled, the
input may be simplified by only checking the DAYTABLE - Daily Values Table check box for the ALL averaging
period option.

Note: The Daily Values option can produce very large output files, especially when
used with a full year of data and very short period averages, such as 1 hour and
3 hour. You should use this option with caution.

Contour Plot Files

The Contour Plot Files screen allows you to produce files that are suitable for generating contour plots of the
concentration and deposition results. Select Output Pathway - Contour Plot Files from the tree located on
the left side of the Output Pathway dialog, to display the available contour plot file options.

Output Pathway dialog - Contour Plot Files

There are two alternatives to choose from for contour plot files, Auto Generated and User Defined. See
below the options for both -

Auto Generated

Contour plot files can be automatically defined by AERMOD View with the Auto-Generated option. By selecting
this option, AERMOD View will automatically setup all possible combinations for generating plotfiles for each run.
The following fields are displayed for each plotfile -

126
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Active: This field controls if the plotfile should be created or not. AERMOD View will only generate plotfiles
that are checked (active). By default, all boxes will be checked for plotfile generation, if you do not want to
include one or more of these plotfiles click the Active check box to uncheck.
Source Group ID: This field displays the Source Group ID for which the plotfile is being created.
Averaging Period: This field displays the Averaging Period for which the plotfile is being created.
High Value: This field displays the High Value (1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc.) for which the plotfile is being created.
File Name: This field displays the file name for the plotfile to be created.

Tip: The convention for the default name for the plot files is avphvsg.plt,
where:
avp = averaging period
hv = high value
sg = source group
Example: 03H1GALL.PLT
03 = 3 hour averaging period
H1 = 1st High Value
GALL = Source Group ALL

Specify Path for PLOTFILES: By default, all plot files will be saved to preset locations. If you wish to
specify an alternate location for the plotfiles, click the button and select the location to save the files. If
you wish to return to the default location, click the button.

Tip: The default locations where the plotfiles are saved are determined
according to the model that is run:
ISCST3 Runs: project directory\projectname.IS\
ISC-PRIME Runs: project directory\projectname.PR\
AERMOD Runs: project directory\projectname.AD\

There are a number of buttons available in the Auto-Generated Contour Plot Files panel. Their functions are
described below:

Select this option to preview the contents of the selected plotfile. Please note that you can preview the
contour plot file only after running the model.

Click on this button to select all plotfiles in the list.

Click on this button to unselect any selected plotfiles in the list.

Click on this button to mark the selected plotfiles as Active. Only active plotfiles will be generated.

Click on this button to mark the selected plotfiles as inactive.

Click on this button to mark all plotfiles in the list as Active. Only active plotfiles will be generated.

Click on this button to mark the selected plotfiles as inactive.

127
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

User Defined

The User Defined option should be used if you prefer to define your own plotfiles.

Output Pathway dialog - Contour Plot Files - User Defined

How to Create User Defined Contour Plot Files:

1: Select from the Averaging Period drop-down list the averaging period for the plot file. This drop-down list
will contain all the averaging periods selected for your project in the Pollutant/Averaging screen in the
Control Pathway.

2: Select from the Source Group ID drop-down list the source group ID for the plot file. This drop-down list
will contain a list of all Source Group IDs created in the Source Groups window.

3: Enter a file name for the contour plot file in the File Name panel.

Note: At the present time, the original U.S. EPA ISCST3 model can only accept file
names up to eight characters long, with a three character extension to
successfully create the file. The AERMOD and ISC-PRIME models have no such
limitations.

4: Select from the High Value drop-down list the short-term high value for the plot file. This drop-down list
will contain all the high values specified for each averaging period from the Tabular Outputs window. Note
that the High Value parameter is not applicable for PERIOD or ANNUAL averages, since there is only one
period or annual average for each receptor.

5: Click the button to add the specified plot file to the List of Output Files window. You can repeat
Steps 1-5 as many times as necessary to created all the desired plot files. The list is used to store all
contour plot files specified. Only those combinations contained in the List of Output Files will be considered
when running the model.

Note: If more than one Output Type is selected in the Control Pathway, then the
contour plot file will include all of the output types selected in the following
order: Concentration, Total Deposition, Dry Deposition, and/or Wet Deposition.
The results for each output type will be printed in separate columns, one record
per receptor, in the order given above.

128
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

6: By default, all plotfiles will be saved to preset locations. If you wish to specify an alternate location for the
plotfiles, click the button in the Specify Path for PLOTFILES panel and select the location to save the
files. If you wish to return to the default location, click the button.

Tip: The default locations where the plotfiles are saved are determined
according to the model that is run:
ISCST3 Runs: project directory\projectname.IS\
ISC-PRIME Runs: project directory\projectname.PR\
AERMOD Runs: project directory\projectname.AD\

There are a number of buttons available in the User Defined Contour Plot Files panel. Their functions are
described below:

Click this button to view the contents of the selected file. Please note that you can preview
the contour plot file only after running the model.

Click on this button to clear all the files from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to remove the selected file from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to replace the selected file in the List of Output Files with the alternate
parameters specified.

Click on this button to add the specified file parameters to the List of Output Files window.

Note: If you are using the PSD Source Group option, you will notice that the following
hard-coded source groups are available in this screen:
NAAQS - for compliance to the National Ambient Air Quality Standards
(NAAQS).
PSDINC - for compliance with Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD)
increment consumption

129
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Threshold Violation Files

In the Threshold Violation Files screen you can produces files of all occurrences of violations equal to or
above the user-specified threshold values. Select Output Pathway - Thresh. Violation Files from the tree
located on the left side of the Output Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Output Pathway dialog - Threshold Violation Files

If you wish to specify threshold violation files, check the Threshold Violation Files (MAXIFILE) box. If this
box is not checked, no threshold violation files will be generated for the current run, although you still can store
any information already added to the List of Output Files to be used in later runs.

How to Define Threshold Violation Files:

1: Select from the Averaging Period drop-down list the averaging period for the threshold violation file. This
drop-down list will contain all the averaging periods selected for your project in the Pollutant/Averaging
screen in the Control Pathway.

2: Select from the Source Group ID drop-down list the source group ID for the threshold violation file. This
drop-down list will contain a list of all Source Group IDs created in the Source Groups window.

Note: Only one threshold violation file may be used for each Averaging Period/Source
Group combination.

3: Enter a file name for the threshold violation file in the File Name panel. The default extension is *.MAX.

Note: At the present time, the original U.S. EPA ISCST3 model can only accept file
names up to eight characters long, with a three character extension to
successfully create the file. The AERMOD and ISC-PRIME models have no such
limitations.

4: Enter in the Threshold Value text box the user-specified threshold value to be used to identify the
receptor locations where the concentration or deposition values are equal to or exceed this threshold value.

5: The File Unit optional parameter allows you to specify the Fortran logical file unit for the output file. The
user-specified file unit must be in the range of 20-100, inclusive. If the File Unit is omitted, then the model

130
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

will dynamically allocate a unique file unit for this file. You can combine results for different Averaging
Periods and/or Source Groups into a single file, by specifying the same File Name and File Unit.

6: Click the button to add the specified threshold violation file to the List of Output Files window. You
can repeat Steps 1-5 as many times as necessary to created all the desired files. The list is used to store all
threshold violation files specified. Only those combinations contained in the List of Output Files will be
considered when running the model.

Note: If more than one Output Type is selected in the Control Pathway, then the
threshold violation file will only apply to the first output type selected among:
Concentration, Total Deposition, Wet Deposition, and/or Dry Deposition options
and only the corresponding value will be output in the threshold violation file
output file.
Note: The Threshold Violation Files option may produce very large files for runs
involving a large number of receptors if a significant percentage of the results
exceed the threshold value. These files can get extremely large in certain
circumstances, even up to several hundred megabytes. Thus, please be sure
you have adequate space on your hard drive.

7: By default, all threshold violation files will be saved to preset locations. If you wish to specify an alternate
location for the threshold violation files, click the button in the Specify Path for MAXIFILES panel
and select the location to save the files. If you wish to return to the default location, click the button.

Tip: The default locations where the threshold violation files are saved are
determined according to the model that is run:
ISCST3 Runs: project directory\projectname.IS\
ISC-PRIME Runs: project directory\projectname.PR\
AERMOD Runs: project directory\projectname.AD\

Note: A plotfile is automatically created and saved to the same directory as the
generated MAXIFILE (e.g., CONC10.MAX and CONC10_exceedance.PLT). Plotfiles
(*.PLT) created from MAXIFILES (*.MAX) contain information on the number of
times the specified threshold value was exceeded at each receptor location. If
you open a project created in an older version of AERMOD View, this plotfile will
be created as long as the MAXIFILE options are specified in the Output Pathway.

There are a number of buttons available in the Threshold Violation Files panel. Their functions are described
below:

Click this button to view the contents of the selected file. Please note that you can preview
the threshold violation file only after running the model.

Click on this button to clear all the files from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to remove the selected file from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to replace the selected file in the List of Output Files with the alternate
parameters specified.

131
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Click on this button to add the specified file parameters to the List of Output Files window.

Post-Processing Files

The Post-Processing Files screen allows you to produce files of concurrent (raw) results at each receptor
suitable for post-processing. Select Output Pathway - Post-Processing Files from the tree located on the
left side of the Output Pathway dialog, to display the available post-processing file options.

Output Pathway dialog - Post-Processing Files

If you wish to specify post-processing files, check the Post-Processing Files (POSTFILE) box. If this box is
not checked, no post-processing files will be generated for the current run, although you still can store any
information already added to the List of Output Files list to be used in later runs.

How to Define Post-Processing Files:

1: Select from the Averaging Period drop-down list the averaging period for the post-processing file. This
drop-down list will contain all the averaging periods selected for your project in the Pollutant/Averaging
screen in the Control Pathway.

2: Select from the Source Group ID drop-down list the source group ID for the post-processing file. This
drop-down list will contain a list of all Source Group IDs created in the Source Groups window.

3: Enter a file name for the post-processing file in the File Name panel. The default extension is *.POS.

Note: At the present time, the original U.S. EPA ISCST3 model can only accept file
names up to eight characters long, with a three character extension to
successfully create the file. The AERMOD and ISC-PRIME models have no such
limitations.

4: Specify whether you wish the POSTFILE output file to be either Unformatted or Formatted. The
Unformatted option produces a POSTFILE in binary format while the Formatted option produces a POSTFILE
in ASCII format.

5: The File Unit optional parameter allows you to specify the Fortran logical file unit for the output file. The
user-specified file unit must be in the range of 20-100, inclusive. If the File Unit is omitted, then the model
will dynamically allocate a unique file unit for this file. You can combine results for different Averaging
Periods and/or Source Groups into a single file, by specifying the same File Name and File Unit.

132
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

6: Click the button to add the specified post-processing file to the List of Output Files window. You can
repeat Steps 1-5 as many times as necessary to created all the desired files. The list is used to store all
post-processing files specified. Only those combinations contained in the List of Output Files will be
considered when running the model.

Note: If more than one Output Type is selected in the Control Pathway, then the
specified Post-Processing File (POSTFILE) will include all of the output types
selected in the following order: Concentration, Total Deposition, Dry Deposition,
and/or Wet Deposition.

Note: The Post-Processing Files (POSTFILE) option can produce very large
files and should be used with some caution. To estimate the size of the file (in bytes),
use the following equation:

where:
# of Hrs/Yr = Number of hourly values for a full year (8760 records)
# of Hrs/Ave = Number of hours per average period
# of Rec = Number of receptors
Divide the result by 1000 to estimate the number of kilobytes (KB) and divide by 1.0E6 to
estimate the number of megabytes (MB).

7: By default, all post-processing files will be saved to preset locations. If you wish to specify an alternate
location for the post-processing files, click the button in the Specify Path for POSTFILES panel and
select the location to save the files. If you wish to return to the default location, click the button.

Tip: The default locations where the post-processing files are saved are
determined according to the model that is run:
ISCST3 Runs: project directory\projectname.IS\
ISC-PRIME Runs: project directory\projectname.PR\
AERMOD Runs: project directory\projectname.AD\

There are a number of buttons available in the Post-Processing Files panel. Their functions are described
below:

Opens the Auto-Generated POSTFILE Option dialog which allows you to set up all possible
combinations for selected averaging periods and source groups.

Click this button to view the contents of the selected file. Please note that you can preview
the post-processing file only after running the model.

Click on this button to clear all the files from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to remove the selected file from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to replace the selected file in the List of Output Files with the alternate
parameters specified.

133
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Click on this button to add the specified file parameters to the List of Output Files window.

TOXX Files

In the TOXX Files screen you can produce unformatted (binary) files of raw results above a threshold value
with a special structure for use with the TOXX model component of TOXST. Select Output Pathway - TOXX
Files from the tree located on the left side of the Output Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Output Pathway dialog - TOXX Files

If you wish to specify TOXX files, check the TOXX Model Input Files (TOXXFILE) box. If this box is not
checked, no TOXX files will be generated for the current run, although you still can store any information already
added to the List of Output Files list to be used in later runs.

How to Define TOXX Files:

1: Select from the Averaging Period drop-down list the averaging period for the TOXX file. This drop-down
list will contain all the short-term averaging periods selected for your project in the Pollutant/Averaging
screen in the Control Pathway.

Note: Only one TOXX file may be used for each averaging period. While the
TOXXFILE option may be specified for any of the short-term averaging periods
that were specified in the Control Pathway, the model will generate a non-fatal
warning message if a period other than the 1-hour average is specified. This is
because the TOXST model currently supports only 1-hour averages.

2: Enter in the Threshold Cutoff text box the user-specified threshold cutoff value. Note that the units of the
Threshold Cutoff parameter are in g/m3, regardless of the input and output units selected in the Emission
Output Units window.

3: Enter a file name for the TOXX file in the File Name panel. The default extension is *.TOX.

Note: At the present time, the original U.S. EPA ISCST3 model can only accept file
names up to eight characters long, with a three character extension to
successfully create the file. The AERMOD and ISC-PRIME models have no such
limitations.

134
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Note: The TOXXFILE option can be specified for each averaging period, but a different
File Name should be used for each file. Different filenames should be specified
for each file since the structure of the output file generated by the TOXXFILE
option does not allow for a clear way to distinguish between results for different
averaging periods.

4: The File Unit optional parameter allows you to specify the Fortran logical file unit for the output file. The
user-specified file unit must be in the range of 20-100, inclusive. If the File Unit is omitted, then the model
will dynamically allocate a unique file unit for this file. You can combine results for different Averaging
Periods and/or Source Groups into a single file, by specifying the same File Name and File Unit.

Note: When using the TOXXFILE option, the user will normally place a single source in
each source group.

5: Click the button to add the specified TOXX file to the List of Output Files window. You can repeat
Steps 1-5 as many times as necessary to created all the desired files. The list is used to store all TOXX files
specified. Only those combinations contained in the List of Output Files will be considered when running the
model.

Note: If more than one Output Type is selected in the Control Pathway, the TOXXFILE
threshold will only apply to the first output type selected among the
Concentration, Total Deposition, Wet Deposition, and/or Dry Deposition options,
and only the corresponding value will be output in the TOXXFILE output file.
Note: The TOXXFILE option may produce very large files for runs involving a large
number of receptors if a significant percentage of the results exceed the
threshold value. These files can get extremely large in certain circumstances,
even up to several hundred megabytes. Therefore, please be sure you have
adequate space on your hard drive.

6: By default, all TOXX files will be saved to preset locations. If you wish to specify an alternate location for
the TOXX files, click the button in the Specify Path for TOXXFILES panel and select the location to
save the files. If you wish to return to the default location, click the button.

Tip: The default locations where the TOXX files are saved are determined
according to the model that is run:
ISCST3 Runs: project directory\projectname.IS\
ISC-PRIME Runs: project directory\projectname.PR\
AERMOD Runs: project directory\projectname.AD\

There are a number of buttons available in the TOXX Model Input Files panel. Their functions are described
below:

Click this button to view the contents of the selected file. Please note that you can preview
the TOXX file only after running the model.

Click on this button to clear all the files from the List of Output Files window.

135
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Click on this button to remove the selected file from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to replace the selected file in the List of Output Files with the alternate
parameters specified.

Click on this button to add the specified file parameters to the List of Output Files window.

Note: The TOXXFILE option is not compatible with the Re-Start File option. If you have
selected the Re-Start File option on the Optional Files window, then AERMOD
View will disable the options in the TOXX Model Input Files screen and will
display a message indicating this option is not available.

Season Hour Files

ISCST3 Only

The Season Hour Files screen allows you to produce output files containing average results for concentration,
deposition, dry deposition and/or wet deposition by season and hour-of-day. Select Output Pathway -
Season Hour Files from the tree located on the left side of the Output Pathway dialog, to display the available
options.

Output Pathway dialog - Season Hour Files

Note: The Season Hour Files option is available only if you have selected the Non-
Default, TOXICS, Season by Hour-of-Day Output Option in the Control Pathway.

If you wish to specify season hour files, check the Average Results by Season and Hour-of-Day Output
Files (SEASONHR) box. If this box is not checked, no season hour files will be generated for the current run,
although you still can store any information already added to the List of Output Files dialog to be used in later
runs.

How to Define Season Hour Files:

1: Select from the Source Group ID drop-down list the source group ID for the season hour file. This drop-
down list will contain a list of all Source Group IDs created in the Source Groups window.

136
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

2: Enter a file name for the season hour file in the File Name panel. The default extension is *.SHD.

Note: At the present time, the original U.S. EPA ISCST3 model can only accept file
names up to eight characters long, with a three character extension to
successfully create the file. The AERMOD and ISC-PRIME models have no such
limitations.

3: The File Unit optional parameter allows you to specify the Fortran logical file unit for the output file. The
user-specified file unit must be greater than 20. If the File Unit is left blank, then the model will dynamically
assign a file unit.

4: Click the button to add the specified season hour file to the List of Output Files window. You can
repeat Steps 1-5 as many times as necessary to created all the desired files. The list is used to store all
season hour files specified. Only those combinations contained in the List of Output Files will be considered
when running the model.

5: All season hour files will be saved to the default location project directory\projectname.IS\. If you wish to
specify an alternate location for the season hour files, click the button in the Specify Path for
SEASONHR Files panel and select the location to save the files. If you wish to return to the default
location, click the button.

There are a number of buttons available in this window. Their functions are described below:

Click this button to view the contents of the selected file. Please note that you can preview
the season hour file only after running the model.

Click on this button to clear all the files from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to remove the selected file from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to replace the selected file in the List of Output Files with the alternate
parameters specified.

Click on this button to add the specified file parameters to the List of Output Files window.

137
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Rank Files

AERMOD Only

The Rank Files screen allows you to output values by rank for use in Q-Q (quantile) plots. Select Output
Pathway - Rank Files from the tree located on the left side of the Output Pathway dialog, to display the
available options.

Output Pathway dialog - Rank Files

If you wish to specify rank files, check the Output Values by Rank for Use in Quantile Plots (RANKFILE)
box. If this box is not checked, no rank files will be generated for the current run, although you still can store
any information already added to the List of Output Files list to be used in later runs.

How to Define Rank Files:

1: Select from the Averaging Period drop-down list the averaging period for the rank file.

Note: In order to use the Rank Files option for a particular averaging period, the
Maximum Values option should first be defined for the averaging period in the
Tabular Outputs window.

2: Specify a value for the No. High Values. This must be less than or equal to the maximum value for the
specified averaging period in the Tabular Outputs window.

3: Enter a file name for the rank file in the File Name panel. The default extension is *.RNK.

Note: At the present time, the original U.S. EPA ISCST3 model can only accept file
names up to eight characters long, with a three character extension to
successfully create the file. The AERMOD and ISC-PRIME models have no such
limitations.

4: The File Unit optional parameter allows you to specify the Fortran logical file unit for the output file. The
user-specified file unit must be in the range of 25-100 inclusive. If the File Unit is left blank, then the model
will dynamically assign a file unit.

138
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

5: Click the button to add the specified rank file to the List of Output Files window. You can repeat
Steps 1-5 as many times as necessary to created all the desired files. The list is used to store all rank files
specified. Only those combinations contained in the List of Output Files will be considered when running the
model.

6: All rank files will be saved to the default location project directory\projectname.AD\. If you wish to specify
an alternate location for the rank files, click the button in the Specify Path for RANKFILES panel and
select the location to save the files. If you wish to return to the default location, click the button.

There are a number of buttons available in this window. Their functions are described below:

Click this button to view the contents of the selected file. Please note that you can preview
the rank file only after running the model.

Click on this button to clear all the files from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to remove the selected file from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to replace the selected file in the List of Output Files with the alternate
parameters specified.

Click on this button to add the specified file parameters to the List of Output Files window.

Evaluation Files

AERMOD Only

In the Evaluation Files screen you have the option to produces evaluation files including arc-maximum
normalized concentration values for each hour of meteorology and for each source specified. The arc groupings
of the receptors must be specified using the Discrete Cartesian (ARC) receptors. Select Output Pathway -
Evaluation Files from the tree located on the left side of the Output Pathway dialog, to display the available
options.

Output Pathway dialog - Evaluation Files

139
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

If you wish to specify evaluation files, check the Output File of Arc-Maximum Normalized Concentration
Values (EVALFILE) box. If this box is not checked, no evaluation files will be generated for the current run,
although you still can store any information already added to the List of Output Files dialog to be used in later
runs.

How to Define Evaluation Files:

1: Select from the Source ID drop-down list source ID for which results are requested in the evaluation file.
The drop-down list contains a list of all Source IDs created in the Source Inputs window.

2: Enter a file name for the evaluation file in the File Name panel. The default extension is *.EVA.

Note: At the present time, the original U.S. EPA ISCST3 model can only accept file
names up to eight characters long, with a three character extension to
successfully create the file. The AERMOD and ISC-PRIME models have no such
limitations.

3: The File Unit optional parameter allows you to specify the Fortran logical file unit for the output file. The
user-specified file unit must be in the range of 25-100 inclusive. If the File Unit is left blank, then the model
will dynamically assign a file unit.

4: Click the button to add the specified evaluation file to the List of Output Files window. You can
repeat Steps 1-5 as many times as necessary to created all the desired files. The list is used to store all
evaluation files specified. Only those combinations contained in the List of Output Files will be considered
when running the model.

5: All evaluation files will be saved to the default location project directory\projectname.AD\. If you wish to
specify an alternate location for the evaluation files, click the button in the Specify Path for
EVALFILES panel and select the location to save the files. If you wish to return to the default location,
click the button.

There are a number of buttons available in this window. Their functions are described below:

Click on this button to display the EVALFILE Viewer dialog. Please note that
you must run the model before you can view the Evaluation Files.

Click this button to view the contents of the selected file. Please note that you can preview
the evaluation file only after running the model.

Click on this button to clear all the files from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to remove the selected file from the List of Output Files window.

Click on this button to replace the selected file in the List of Output Files with the alternate
parameters specified.

Click on this button to add the specified file parameters to the List of Output Files window.

140
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Percentiles/Rolling Average Settings

In the Percentiles/Rolling Average Settings screen you specify the settings in order to generate percentile
plot files. Percentile values are routinely used to express air quality standards in an international setting. Select
Output Pathway - Percentiles/Rolling Average Settings from the tree located on the left side of the
Output Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Output Pathway dialog - Percentiles/Rolling Average - Settings

How to Specify the Percentile and/or Rolling Averages Settings:

1: At the top of the screen you may check either one or both of the following options:

Create Percentiles: Check this box if you wish to generate percentile plots.
Rolling Averages: Check this box to generate rolling or running average plots. This type of average
differs from the U.S. EPA averaging calculations, also known as block averages.

2: If the Create Percentiles option was checked, then you need to specify for which percentiles plotfiles
should be created. Type in the percentile value in the Add New Value field and then click the
button to add this value to the table. You may repeat this for as many percentiles as you wish to add. Only
percentile values added to the table and checked for use will be considered when percentile plotfiles are
generated.

3: When creating the percentile plot files a temporary post file (*.POS) is generated. You have the option to
delete this temporary file by checking the Delete Temporary 1-Hour Binary POSTFILE (*.POS) box.

Note: The percentile and rolling averages plot files are features created by Lakes
Environmental that use the U.S. EPA model-generated POSTFILES. If
POSTFILES are present in your project folder, you can specify different averaging
periods and percentile values without having to run the model again.

4: If the Rolling Averages option was checked, you can specify that calm hours and hours with missing data
should not be considered when calculating the rolling averages. As long as your met data is in the default
format, then AERMOD View will calculate rolling averages by skipping calm hours and hours with missing
data. Check the Rolling average to skip calm hours and hours with missing data check box to use
this option.

141
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

5: Once you have specified your settings continue to the Percentiles/Rolling Average - Contour Plot Files screen
to preview the list of the percentiles/rolling averages plot files to be generated when you run the model.

The following buttons are available for use in this window:

Adds percentile values to the table

Deletes the selected percentile value from the table.

Deletes all the percentile values from the table.

Click this button to check the Use column box for all the percentile entries in the table. Only
the percentile values that are checked will be considered when generating the plotfiles.

Click this button to uncheck the Use column box for all the percentile entries in the table. Any
percentile value that is not checked will not be considered when generating the plotfiles.

Percentiles/Rolling Average Contour Plot Files

The Percentiles/Rolling Average Contour Plot Files screen displays all the possible combinations of
Percentile/Rolling Average plot files that were setup for your project in the Percentiles/Rolling Average Settings
page. Select Output Pathway - Percentiles/Rolling Average Contour Plot Files from the tree located on
the left side of the Output Pathway dialog, to display the available options.

Output Pathway dialog - Percentiles/Rolling Average - Contour Plot Files

Each plot file to be created is displayed in this dialog in tabular format. You can check or uncheck the Create
Percentiles and Rolling Averages boxes to view the corresponding plot files. Described below are each of
the fields in this table -

Active: This field controls whether the plot files should be created or not. AERMOD View will only
generate plot files that are checked or active.
Source Group ID: This field displays the Source Group ID for which the plot files are being created.

142
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 3 - Input Pathways

Averaging Period: This field displays the Averaging Period for which the plot files are being created. A
plot file is created for each short-term averaging period selected for your project in the Pollutant/Averaging
screen in the Control Pathway.
Percentile: This field displays the Percentile value for which the plot file is being created. This field is not
displayed if only the Rolling Averages option is checked.
High Value: This field displays the High Value (1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc.) for which the plot file is being created.
This field will be available if only the Rolling Averages option was selected.
File Name: This field displays the file name for the plotfile to be created.

Tip: The convention for the default name for the plot files for Percentiles is
av_percen_srgp.plt, where:
av = averaging period, the first 2 characters are reserved for defining the
averaging period
percen = percentile, 6 characters are reserved for defining the percentile
srgp = source group, 4 characters reserved for defining the source group
(e.g., GALL, G001, etc.)
Example: 03_P99_50_GALL.PLT
03 = 3 hour averaging period
P99_50 = 99.50 Percentile
GALL = Source Group ALL

Tip: The convention for the default name for the plot files for Rolling Averages
is av_srg_hv.plt, where:
av = averaging period, the first 2 characters are reserved for defining the
averaging period
srg = source group, 3 characters reserved for defining the source group
(e.g. ALL, 001, 002)
hv = high value (e.g. h1, h2, h3..., h10)
Example: 03_ALL_H1.PLT
03 = 3 hour averaging period
ALL = Source Group ALL
H1 = 1st high value

By default, all plot files will be saved to the "Percentile" folder within your project folder - please see the tip
below. If you wish to specify an alternate location for the plot files, click the button in the Specify Path for
Percentiles/Rolling Average PLOTFILES panel and select the location to save the files. If you wish to
return to the default location, click the button.

Tip: The default locations where the plot files are saved are determined
according to the model that is run:
ISCST3 Runs: project directory\projectname.IS\Percentile
ISC-PRIME Runs: project directory\projectname.PR\Percentile
AERMOD Runs: project directory\projectname.AD\Percentile

There are a number of buttons available in this window. Their functions are described below:

Select this option to preview the contents of the selected plot file. Please note that you can
preview the plot file only after running the model.

Click on this button to select all plot files in the list.

143
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 3 - Input Pathways AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Click on this button to unselect any selected plot files in the list.

Click on this button to mark the selected plot files as Active. Only active plot files will be
generated.

Click on this button to mark the selected plot files as inactive.

Click on this button to mark all plot files in the list as Active. Only active plot files will be
generated.

Click on this button to mark the selected plot files as inactive.

Click on this button to regenerate percentile contour plot files without re-running your project.
See note below.

Note: Do not check the Delete Temporary 1-Hour Binary POSTFILE *.POS in the
Percentiles/Rolling Average Settings screen if you would like to use the
Generate option. AERMOD View generates the percentile/rolling average
contour plot files by extracting information from the model generated
POSTFILES.

144
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs

CHAPTER 4 OTHER PROJECT INPUTS

Other Project Inputs

Terrain Options

Building Options

Terrain Options
Terrain Processor

The Terrain Processor allows you to import and process terrain elevation data for your project. You have
access to the Terrain Processor by selecting Data | Terrain Processor... from the menu or by clicking on
the Terrain menu toolbar button.

AERMOD View imports terrain elevations from various digital elevation file formats for three main purposes:
To extract terrain elevations for receptors and base elevations for sources and buildings.
To generate the Terrain Grid (TG) file to be used in the TG Pathway.
To generate visualization of the surrounding terrain in 2D and 3D.

How to Use the Terrain Processor - Overview

1: In the Terrain Options panel, determine whether the terrain will be Flat or Elevated by clicking the
appropriate radio button.

Note: If you are running a project with flat terrain, which is the default, you will not
have to configure any further settings.

2: Select a Map Type from the drop down list. You have the following options:

USGS DEM - Digital elevation model files from the United States Geological Survey (US only)
SRTM3/SRTM1/STRM30 - Shuttle Radar Topography Mission terrain data files
GTOPO30 - Global digital elevation model files
XYZ - Comma delimited text file containing xyz coordinates
AUTOCAD DXF - AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format file containing terrain elevations
UK DTM - Digital terrain model files produced by the United Kingdom Standard Ordnance Survey
UK NTF - National transfer format files produced by the United Kingdom Standard Ordnance Survey

3: Import the appropriate terrain data files in the Terrain tab.

4: Set the extent of the terrain files that should be used when converting the terrain data file to a GridASCII
Terrain File in the Region to Import tab.

5: Assign the terrain elevations to the receptors, sources and buildings in your project in the Import Elevations
tab.

6: Set advanced options for assigning and importing the terrain elevations in the Advanced tab.

7: Click the Process + Run AERMAP button to process the data. Click OK to close the Terrain Processor.

145
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Interface Description

The menu bar at the top of the Terrain Processor dialog allows you to access various options. The Aermap
menu item allows you to easily view input and output files generated by the AERMAP runs. The Tools menu
option lets you browse and edit files.

On the left side of the Terrain Processor dialog is the Preview panel, which displays a preview of the terrain
elevation file boundaries (blue hatched area) you are importing in relation to the project site domain (green
hatched region). This panel contains many annotation tools which allow you manipulate what is visible in the
preview area, zoom in and pan on locations of interest. These tools are also found on the Annotation Toolbar in
the main interface. Also available is the Select Region to Import tool ( ) which allows you to graphically
define the region to import in the preview area.

On the right side of the Terrain Processor dialog you may specify whether the terrain in your modeling area is
flat or elevated. There are four tabs where you can specify all the information to import and process the terrain
elevation data. See the following sections for a description of each tab and their options:

Terrain
Region to Import
Import Elevations
Advanced Options

The following utilities are also found in the Terrain Processor:

Click this button to open the AERMAP screen of the Preferences dialog.

Terrain Processor - Terrain Tab

The Terrain tab of the Terrain Processor dialog allows you to specify the terrain elevation files to be used for
your project.

Terrain Processor - Terrain tab

146
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs

How to Specify Terrain Files to Import

1: Select either Flat or Elevated in the Terrain Options area.

2: Select a Map Type from the drop down list. You have three options:

US ONLY—USGS DEM - Digital elevation model files from the United States Geological Survey (US
only) (About USGS DEM files)
SRTM3/SRTM1/STRM30 - Shuttle Radar Topography Mission terrain data files (About SRTM files)
GTOPO30/STRM30 - Global digital elevation model files (About GTOPO30/STRM30 files)
XYZ - Comma delimited text file containing xyz coordinates (About XYZ files)
AUTOCAD DXF - AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format file containing terrain elevations (About
AUTOCAD DXF files)
UK DTM - Digital terrain model files produced by the United Kingdom Standard Ordnance Survey (About
UK DTM files)
UK NTF - National transfer format files produced by the United Kingdom Standard Ordnance Survey
(About UK NTF files)

3: Specify the digital terrain files. The options available depend on which type of digital elevation file you will
be importing.

To import USGS DEM files

Note: If you have not set the Map Projection information for the project, click the Map
Projection button to set it before downloading files from WebGIS.

1. If you already have a USGS DEM file, click the

Add button and specify that file. You can select
multiple files.
2. If you do not already have the appropriate USGS
DEM file(s), click the WebGIS button. A sub-
menu will display. Choose either Load DEM 1
deg (US ~90m) or Load DEM 7.5 min (US
~30m). The appropriate files will be
automatically downloaded from the WebGIS
website.
3. Once all the files are specified, they appear in
the list. Confirm that the data is correct by
clicking the View button to read the file(s) in
WordPad.
4. If you have specified a file in error, you can
remove it by selecting it and clicking the
Remove button. To remove all files and start
again, click the Clear All button.

5. To locate all files of the specified type on your computer, click the Search button. A sub-menu will
display. You can elect to search the cache folder (see Preferences - Terrain Processor in Chapter
7) or specify a folder/all its sub-folders.

147
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs AERMOD View™ User's Guide

To import SRTM files

Note: If you have not set the Map Projection information for the project, click the Map
Projection button to set it before downloading files from WebGIS.

1. If you already have an SRTM file, click the Add

button and specify that file. You can select
multiple files.
2. If you do not already have the appropriate SRTM
files, click the WebGIS button. A sub-menu will
display. Choose either Load SRTM3 (Global
~90m) or Load SRTM1 (US ~30m). The
appropriate files will be automatically downloaded
from the WebGIS website.
3. Once all the files are specified, they appear in the
list. Confirm that the data is correct by clicking the
View button to read the file(s) in WordPad.

4. If you have specified a file in error, you can

remove it by selecting it and clicking the Remove
button. To remove all files and start again, click
the Clear All button.

5. To locate all files of the specified type on your computer, click the Search button. A sub-menu will
display. You can elect to search the cache folder (see Preferences - Terrain Processor in Chapter
7) or specify a folder/all its sub-folders.

To import GTOPO30/SRTM30 files

Note: If you have not set the Map Projection information for the project, click the Map
Projection button to set it before downloading files from WebGIS.

1. If you already have a GTOPO file, click the Add

button and specify that file. You can select
multiple files.
2. If you do not already have the appropriate GTOPO
file(s), click the WebGIS button. A sub-menu will
display. Choose either Load GTOPO30 (Global
~900m) or Load SRTM30 (Global ~900m). The
appropriate files will be automatically downloaded
from the WebGIS website.
3. Once all the files are specified, they appear in the
list. The extents of the imported terrain file are
displayed in the Preview panel in hatched blue.
Confirm that the data is correct by clicking the
View button to read the file(s) in WordPad. The
following information will be displayed in the
GTOPO30/SRTM30 Files table:

File Location: Displays the name and location of the imported file(s).
Horizontal Datum: Displays the horizontal datum for in the imported file(s).
4. If you have specified a file in error, you can remove it by selecting it and clicking the Remove
button. To remove all files and start again, click the Clear All button.

148
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs

5. To locate all files of the specified type on your computer, click the Search button. A sub-menu will
display. You can elect to search the cache folder (see Preferences - Terrain Processor in Chapter
7) or specify a folder/all its sub-folders.

To import XYZ files

1. Click the Add button.

2. Select the file containing the xyz coordinates. The
XYZ file can be a space, tab, or comma delimited
file (*.txt,*.csv). You can select multiple terrain
files.
3. Once all the files are specified, they appear in the
list. Confirm that the data is correct by clicking the
View button to read the file(s) in WordPad.

4. If you have specified a file in error, you can

remove it by selecting it and clicking the Remove
button. To remove all files and start again, click
the Clear All button.
5. If your XYZ file contains the x and y coordinates in
kilometers, click the Convert X, Y, from Kilometers
to Meters box.

To import AutoCAD DXF files

1. Click the Specify File ( ) button.

2. Select the DXF file containing the terrain data.
You can only select one DXF terrain file.
3. Once the file is specified, the layers in the file are
displayed in the list.
4. If you need to convert the units in the file, click
the Unit Conversion Tab and select from the
following options:
No Conversion: This is the default option
used and is used if the DXF file to be imported
was drawn in meters. The DXF will be
imported without any conversions.

Feet To Meters (0.3048): Use this option if the units in your DXF base map are in feet.
AERMOD View will scale the DXF file by a factor of 0.3048, the equivalent conversion of feet to
meters.
Custom Factor: Use this option if the units in your DXF base map are not in meters or feet.
Allows you to specify a custom conversion factor to be applied to the DXF file. In this case,
AERMOD View converts your base map units automatically to meters using the unit conversion
factor you have specified in the text box.
5. If you have specified a file in error, you can remove it by selecting it and clicking the Clear File
button.

149
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs AERMOD View™ User's Guide

To import UK DTM or NTF files

1. Click the Add button.

2. Select the terrain data file. You can select
multiple terrain files.
3. Once all the files are specified, they appear in
the list. Confirm that the data is correct by
clicking the View button to read the file(s) in
WordPad.
4. If you have specified a file in error, you can
remove it by selecting it and clicking the
Remove button. To remove all files and start
again, click the Clear All button.

4: Once you have specified the digital terrain elevation files to be used, click the Region to Import tab to
specify the portion of the terrain files that should be converted into the GridASCII Terrain File.

About Terrain File Formats

USGS DEM Files

USGS DEM files are digital elevation model files consisting of terrain elevations for ground positions at regularly
spaced horizontal intervals produced by the USGS (U.S. Geological Survey). AERMOD View supports two distinct
digital elevation data products distributed by the USGS in the standard digital elevation model (DEM) tape
format:

7.5-Minute DEM Data

1-Degree DEM Data

About SRTM Terrain Data Files

The Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) obtained elevation data on a near-global scale to generate the
most complete high-resolution digital topographic database of Earth to date. Data for nearly the whole world is
now available for download. Data are divided into one by one degree latitude and longitude tiles in "geographic"
projection. Heights are in meters referenced to the WGS84/EGM96 geoid.

SRTM1 SRTM3
Resolution: ~30 m, 1 arc-sec Resolution: ~90 m, 3 arc-sec
Coverage: United States Coverage: Global
Projection: Geographic Projection: Geographic
Datum: WGS84 Datum: WGS84
Vertical Units: Meter Vertical Units: Meter
Info Info
Quick Start Quick Start
Documentation Documentation
Large Map

You can download the above SRTM data files, free of charge, from the USGS web site, using links provided at
Lakes Environmental web site: http://www.weblakes.com/lakesdem.html

150
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs

Note: The names of individual data tiles refer to the latitude and longitude of the
lower-left (southwest) corner of the tile. For example, the coordinates of the
lower-left corner of tile N40W118.hgt are 40 degrees North latitude and 118
degrees West longitude.

About GTOPO30/SRTM30 Terrain Files

The GTOPO30/SRTM30 Terrain data tab allows you to specify GTOPO30 and SRTM30 terrain files for processing:

GTOPO30: a global digital elevation model (DEM) with a horizontal grid spacing of 30 arc seconds
(approximately 1 kilometer) and was developed to meet the needs of the geospatial data user community
for regional and continental scale topographic data. GTOPO30 is a global data set covering the full extent of
latitude from 90 degrees south to 90 degrees north, and the full extent of longitude from 180 degrees west
to 180 degrees east.

You can download the above GTOPO30 data files, free of charge, from the USGS web site, using links
provided at Lakes Environmental web site: http://www.webgis.com/terr_world.html

SRTM30: The Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) obtained elevation data on a near-global scale to
generate the most complete high-resolution digital topographic database of Earth to date. Data for nearly
the whole world is now available for download. Data are divided into one by one degree latitude and
longitude tiles in "geographic" projection. Heights are in meters referenced to the WGS84/EGM96 geoid.

You can download the above SRTM30 data files, free of charge, from the USGS web site, using links
provided at Lakes Environmental web site: http://www.weblakes.com/lakesdem.html

GTOPO30 SRTM30
Resolution: ~1 km, 30 arc-sec Resolution: ~1 km, 30 arc-sec
Coverage: Global Coverage: Global
Projection: Geographic Projection: Geographic
Datum: WGS84 Datum: WGS84
Vertical Units: Meter Vertical Units: Meter
Info Info
Documentation Quick Start
Documentation
Large Map

Note: While SRTM30 has the same resolution as GTOPO30, it can be considered a
more accurate global digital data set compared to GTOPO30 because of its
seamless and uniform representation, due to the fact that it was created over a
short period of time from a single source rather than from the numerous sources
spanning many decades that went into creating the GTOPO30 data set. However,
it must be noted that the SRTM30 does not cover the poles north and south of
approximately 60° latitude. Therefore, data for Antarctica, for example, must be
obtained from the GTOPO30 data set.

About XYZ Files

An XYZ file is a comma delimited text file containing just xyz coordinates. This file type can be used for
extracting the raw XYZ coordinates for elevation data.

151
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs AERMOD View™ User's Guide

About AutoCAD DXF Files

The AutoCAD DXF (Drawing Interchange Format) file is a standard format which can be used to import terrain
elevations in AERMOD View.

About UK DTM and UK NTF Files

The UK DTM (Digital Terrain Model) and UK NTF (National Transfer Format) files are produced by the United
Kingdom standard Ordnance Survey. AERMOD View supports both Land-Form Panorama and Profile NTFs -
DTMS - as well as the DTM data format.

Terrain Processor - Region to Import Tab

Once you have specified the terrain elevation files to be imported in the Terrain tab of the Terrain Processor
dialog, you will need to specify the region to import so that AERMOD View can create a file containing only the
terrain elevations for the defined region. The Region to Import tab allows you to select a region of the terrain
elevation file to be imported.

Terrain Processor - Region to Import tab

How to Specify the Region to Import

1: Set the Region to Import. There are four methods available:

Click the Set to Map Extents ( ) button to import the entire specified terrain map(s),
represented in the Preview panel as the blue hatched region.

Click the Set to Model Extents ( ) button to import portion of the terrain data file that is
within the extents of the modeling domain, represented in the Preview panel as the green hatched
region.

Click the Select Region to Import ( ) tool, and draw a rectangle in the Preview area to represent the
region to import.
Manually specify the X and Y coordinates for the SW Corner, the Width (X dimension), and the Height
(Y dimension) of the region to import.

152
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs

Note: It is possible to select a region that is not completely covered by DEMs, but only
if you are not running AERMAP. AERMAP requires complete coverage of your
modeling area. This option may be used, for instance, when DEM coverage is not
available for certain areas. A warning message will be displayed during
processing and you will be responsible for specifying terrain elevation values for
the receptors that are not covered by DEMs. The Elevations/Flagpole Heights tool
available in the Application Toolbar allows you to easily specify terrain elevations
for receptors that fall within a selected region.

2: You can elect to extend the region by specifying the number of meters to extend the region by and clicking
the Apply button. This is particularly useful if you have chosen the Set to Model Extents option.

Note: The Extend Region by function is additive; if you extend the region by 200
meters and apply the change, and then enter 250 meters in the Extend Region
by box and apply the change again, the total number of meters that you will
extend the modeling area by is 450.

Note: AERMOD View automatically defines the region to import (defined by the red box
in the Preview window) by using the model domain extents. If the terrain
elevation files do not cover your modeling domain at all, then the files will not be
processed.

3: To resample the imported terrain data on a regular grid, which allows you to generate 2D and 3D terrain
visualizations, specify a Mesh Size in the Resampling panel. A default mesh size of 40 is used, but for
visualization purposes a more refined mesh size may be necessary. Please note that as mesh size increases,
the terrain visualization quality improves but computational requirements increase. We recommend that you
resample the terrain data for a mesh size of 40 and only use a more refined mesh if you need to increase
quality for displaying your modeling results.

4: Once you have specified the region to import, process the terrain. Depending on the U.S. EPA model you
are using, there are two ways in which the terrain is processed:

AERMOD: If using the AERMOD model, terrain elevations are defined by AERMAP which is the U.S.
EPA terrain pre-processor developed to process terrain data for use with the AERMOD model.
ISCST3/ISC-PRIME: If using the ISCST3 or ISC-PRIME models you have two options:
Run AERMAP: You can choose to run the AERMAP pre-processor to obtain your terrain elevations.
In this case you will need to check the Run AERMAP box.
Lakes Algorithm: If you do not check the Run AERMAP box, terrain elevations will be imported
directly from the terrain elevation file using the Lakes Algorithm.

Depending on which of the above options you choose, click the or

button. AERMOD View will pre-process your DEM data and create an intermediate database file containing
elevations for the selected imported region. This intermediate file will be used by AERMOD View to extract
terrain elevations for your receptors and is used for the visualization of your terrain in 2D and 3D.

If you are running AERMAP, the AERMAP Options dialog will be displayed. Select the AERMAP options and
click the button. AERMAP will run and display a message once the run has finished.

Note: When the intermediate database file containing elevations for the selected
imported region is created, an overlay is also created called the Imported

153
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Terrain Region overlay. To be able to view this overlay in the drawing area,
you should make this overlay active by checking the corresponding box in the
Tree View - Overlays tab. The Imported Terrain Region overlay can help you
identify whether or not all of your sources and receptors are within the imported
terrain region.

5: Proceed to the Import Elevations tab to assign the terrain elevations to the sources, receptors and buildings
in your project and import the elevations.

Terrain Processor - Import Elevations Tab

After you have processed the terrain elevation files in the Region to Import tab of the Terrain Processor, you will
need to assign the terrain elevations to the receptors, sources and buildings in your project. This can be done in
the Import Elevations tab.

Terrain Processor - Import Elevations tab

How to Assign Elevations

1: In the Assign Elevations To section, choose whether you wish to assign elevations to objects by checking
or unchecking the boxes next to the object type. The list displays all the sources, receptors and buildings in
your project. For example, you can assign terrain elevations to your point sources (check the box) but not
assign elevations to the flare sources (uncheck the box).

2: Select the appropriate option in the Import Elevations From: section:

AERMAP Output: This option will import and assign elevations processed by AERMAP.
Terrain Maps: This option will import and assign elevations directly from the terrain elevation file
using the Lakes Algorithm.

All elevations for buildings will be imported directly from the terrain elevation file using the Lakes Algorithm
regardless of which option you have selected as the AERMAP model only considers sources and receptors.

3: Click the button to assign and import the terrain elevations. If you wish, you may specify some
advanced options for importing and assigning the terrain elevations in the Advanced Options tab.

154
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs

Terrain Processor - Advanced Options Tab

Warning: Advanced Users Only

The Advanced Options tab of the Terrain Processor allows you to specify some advanced options for assigning
and importing the terrain elevations.

Terrain Processor - Advanced Options tab

How to Set Advanced Terrain Options

1: Set the Point Selection Options, which are applied to all non-gridded receptors. Choose one of the following
options:
Use Highest: Uses the highest of the neighboring points as the required elevation.
Inverse Distance (Lakes Recommended): Interpolates the neighboring points using inverse
distance to obtain elevation at desired point.
Arithmetic Mean: Uses a simple arithmetic mean to obtain elevation at desired point.

2: Enter a number in the Number of Points to Consider: field. This represents the number of points
surrounding the desired location that are used on the interpolation scheme.

3: For Grid Receptors, set the Point Sampling (Grid Receptors Only) option, as follows:
N Closest Points: The chosen Point Selection option will apply to the
gridded receptors if this sampling option is selected.
Points in Bounding Polygon: This option imports the highest elevation
from within a bounding polygon. The bounding polygon is defined by half
the distance to adjacent receptor grid nodes.

155
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Building Options
Building Inputs

The Building Inputs dialog allows you to define information for the buildings in your project. You can either
define your buildings in text mode or in graphical mode.

To define buildings in the text mode, simply enter all the necessary information directly into the Building
Inputs dialog. You have access to this dialog by selecting Data | Building Inputs... from the menu or by
clicking on the Building menu toolbar button.

To define buildings in the graphical mode, you can use any of the four building tools located on the Application
Toolbar. The Building Inputs dialog opens automatically with some parameters already defined. Complete
the necessary inputs to finish defining your building. The parameters to be specified change depending on the
type of building you are defining. The parameters are outlined below for each type of building.

The following options in the Building Inputs dialog are always visible and common, independent of the type of
building being defined. See a description of these options below.

Preview Panel

This area displays the location of the buildings already defined. You can also graphically define your buildings in
this area using the building tools, instead of the main drawing area of the interface.

Preview Panel - Building Inputs dialog

Building Tools: You can use any the building tools to graphically define your buildings. See the following
sections in the help for instructions on how to use these tools -
How to Graphically define a Rectangular Building
How to Graphically define an Angled Rectangular Building
How to Graphically define a Circular Building
How to Graphically define a Polygonal Building
Annotation Tools: The annotation tools allow you import base maps, manipulate what is visible in the
preview area, zoom in and pan on locations of interest. These tools are also found on the Annotation
Toolbar in the main interface.

156
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs

Import Buildings

The Building Inputs dialog allows you the option of importing buildings from a BPIP Input File (*.bpi). Simply
click the button and specify the name and location of the file to import.

Record Navigator Buttons

At the bottom of the Building Inputs dialog are the Record Navigator buttons, which will help you manage
information for more than one set of buildings defined.

Rectangular Building Inputs

The following parameters are requested in the Building Inputs dialog to define a rectangular building:

Building Inputs dialog - Rectangular Building Inputs

Building

Active: You have the option of changing your buildings' active status. By default this box will be checked,
making your buildings active. If you do not want the building to be active, then you should uncheck this
box. Inactive buildings are outlined on the drawing area in light gray and are not considered in the
modeling analysis.
ID: AERMOD View automatically places a default ID for the building, BLD_1, BLD_2, ..., or, BLD_n. You
can change this default ID to any name you prefer. The name can have a maximum of 8 characters
including spaces. If you prefer to use the default ID click the button.
Base Elevation: In this field you must input the building base elevation in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. You
can click the button to display the default base elevation.
Description: In this optional field you can provide a description of the building.

Tiers of Current Building

A tier is defined as the section of a building with a constant height. You must define at least one tier and specify
the height of the tier in relation to the building base elevation in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. The tier height is
defined as the distance from the base of the building to the top of the building tier. The following buttons are
found in this panel:

157
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs AERMOD View™ User's Guide

This button allows you to add a tier to your building.

This button allows you to delete the currently selected tier. You will be prompted to confirm
deletion.

This button can be used if you want to convert a tier into a new building or another building
type.

Tier

Type: This identifies the type of building being defined. If you would like to change the building type you
can do so by selecting an alternate building type from the drop-down list.

Reference Point (SW Corner)

X Coordinate: Here you must enter the X coordinate for the SW corner of the selected building tier in
meters.
Y Coordinate: Here you must enter the Y coordinate for the SW corner of the selected building tier in
meters.

Tier Parameters

X-Length: In this field you must enter the length of the selected building tier in the X direction in meters
[m] or in feet [ft].
Y-Length: In this field you must enter the length of the selected building tier in the Y direction in meters
[m] or in feet [ft].
Rotation Angle: If you wish to rotate your building, enter the rotation angle in degrees. The default is
zero.

158
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs

Polygonal Building Inputs

The following parameters are requested in the Building Inputs dialog to define a polygonal building:

Building Inputs dialog - Polygonal Building Inputs

How to Graphically define a Polygonal Building

Building

Active: You have the option of changing your buildings' active status. By default this box will be checked,
making your buildings active. If you do not want the building to be active, then you should uncheck this
box. Inactive buildings are outlined on the drawing area in light gray and are not considered in the
modeling analysis.
ID: AERMOD View automatically places a default ID for the building, BLD_1, BLD_2, ..., or, BLD_n. You
can change this default ID to any name you prefer. The name can have a maximum of 8 characters
including spaces. If you prefer to use the default ID click the button.
Base Elevation: In this field you must input the building base elevation in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. You
can click the button to display the default base elevation.
Description: In this optional field you can provide a description of the building.

Tiers of Current Building

A tier is defined as the section of a building with a constant height. You must define at least one tier and specify
the height of the tier in relation to the building base elevation in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. The tier height is
defined as the distance from the base of the building to the top of the building tier. The following buttons are
found in this panel:

159
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs AERMOD View™ User's Guide

This button allows you to add a tier to your building.

This button allows you to delete the currently selected tier. You will be prompted to confirm
deletion.

This button can be used if you want to convert a tier into a new building or another building
type.

Tier

Type: This identifies the type of building being defined. If you would like to change the building type you
can do so by selecting an alternate building type from the drop down list.

Tier Corners

X Coordinate: In this table you must enter the X coordinate in meters for each corner of the building. If
you have defined your building graphically then this value will be automatically displayed here. You may
adjust the coordinates at any time.
Y Coordinate: In this table you must enter the Y coordinate in meters for each corner of the building. If
you have defined your building graphically then this value will be automatically displayed here. You may
adjust the coordinates at any time.

Circular Building Inputs

The following parameters are requested in the Building Inputs dialog to define a circular building:

Building Inputs dialog - Circular Building Inputs

How to Graphically define a Circular Building

Building

Active: You have the option of changing your buildings' active status. By default this box will be checked,
making your buildings active. If you do not want the building to be active, then you should uncheck this
box. Inactive buildings are outlined on the drawing area in light gray and are not considered in the
modeling analysis.

160
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs

ID: AERMOD View automatically places a default ID for the building, BLD_1, BLD_2, ..., or, BLD_n. You
can change this default ID to any name you prefer. The name can have a maximum of 8 characters
including spaces. If you prefer to use the default ID click the button.
Base Elevation: In this field you must input the building base elevation in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. You
can click the button to display the default base elevation.
Description: In this optional field you can provide a description of the building.

Tiers of Current Building

A tier is defined as the section of a building with a constant height. You must specify the height of the tier in
relation to the building base elevation in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. The tier height is defined as the distance
from the base of the building to the top of the building tier.

The following buttons are found in this panel:

This button allows you to add a tier to your building.

This button allows you to delete the currently selected tier. You will be prompted to confirm
deletion.

This button can be used if you want to convert your building to another building type.

Tier

Type: This identifies the type of building being defined. If you would like to change the building type you
can do so by selecting an alternate building type from the drop down list.

Reference Point (Center)

X Coordinate: Here you must enter the X coordinate for the center of the circular building. If you have
defined your building graphically then this value will be automatically displayed here. You may adjust this
coordinate at any time.
Y Coordinate: Here you must enter the Y coordinate for the center of the circular building. If you have
defined your building graphically then this value will be automatically displayed here. You may adjust this
coordinate at any time.

Tier Parameters

Diameter: In this field you must enter the diameter of the building in meters [m] or in feet [ft]. If you
have defined your building graphically, then this value will be automatically displayed here. You may adjust
the diameter at any time.

161
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 4 - Other Project Inputs AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Running the EPA BPIP Model

When the building data input for your project is complete, you can run the EPA BPIP model. It is advisable that
before you run the model, you verify the completeness of your project.

How to Run the EPA BPIP Model:

1: Select Run | Status | BPIP... from the menu to display the Project Status - BPIP dialog. Verify that all
the options you selected are correct.

2: Click the button to display the Details dialog. Check if there are any errors noted in the list. If
errors are listed, they should be corrected.

3: After correcting all the problems, return to the Project Status - BPIP dialog and then click the
button. A dialog appears on your screen to provide status information about the simulation.

4: When the execution of the BPIP model is completed, the dialog is closed and a dialog asks you if you want
to view the output file.

You can view the BPIP Primary Output File (*.pro) at any time after running you project by selecting
Output | BPIP Output File from the menu or view the BPIP Summary File (*.sup) selecting Output |
BPIP Summary File from the menu.

162
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 5 - Multi-Chemical Run Utility

CHAPTER 5 MULTI-CHEMICAL RUN UTILITY

Multi-Chemical Run Utility

About the Multi-Chemical Run Utility

Setting Up a Multi-Chemical Run

Chemical Setup tab

Output Options tab

Chemical Database

Warnings tab

Information tab

About the Multi-Chemical Run Utility

Warning: Advanced Users Only

The Multi-Chemical Utility is designed to allow each source in a given project to emit multiple chemicals with
each at a specified emission rate, allowing you to model the contributions from each pollutant quickly and
concisely. These chemicals, and emission rates, can be different for each source. This feature is very powerful,
as the alternative is to run separate projects for each different emitted chemical.

The Multi-Chemical Utility works by creating individual batch/input files for each source, running them through
the specified model (ISC, ISC-PRIME or AERMOD), and combining them into a single result to be viewed. The
output is the contribution from each individual pollutant for all the sources. It should also be noted that output
files are created for each source, with unitized emission rates, and that chemical specific output files are not
created.

While it is very useful and can save a lot of time, the Multi-Chemical Utility does have limitations, namely that it
does not support all of the features of the ISC and AERMOD models. Features that are NOT supported include:

Special pollutant options, such as SO2, NOx and PM10 – pos 97 NAAQS
Optional control files, such as Re-Start files
TOXICS/Gas Dry Deposition when the deposition velocity is calculated by the model
TOXICS/SCIM Option
Source groups other than Group ALL
Discrete polar receptors and polar plant boundary receptors
MAXTABLE (Maximum Values) and DAYTABLE (Daily Values) options
Only chemical specific plotfiles are generated, any other type of output file is ignored, for example post-
processing files
The main output files that are generated are specific to only one source with unitized emission rate
Chemical-specific output files are not being generated at this point

Note: Since not all options are supported in a multi-chemical run it is important to
inspect your input files. Any information in the input file not supported by the
Multi-Chemical Run will be commented out (**). If this is information that is
required, you will need to do a regular model run.

163
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 5 - Multi-Chemical Run Utility AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Setting Up a Multi-Chemical Run

Warning: Advanced Users Only

How to Set Up a Multi-Chemical Run:

1: To start the Multi-Chemical Run utility, select Run | Multi-Chemical Run... from the AERMOD View
menu. The Multi-Chemical Run utility will be displayed.

Multi-Chemical Run Utility

2: The sources that were specified in your project will be displayed in the Chemical Setup tab. Check the
active box of all sources that are to be included in the Multi-Chemical run.

3: Before emissions can be assigned to the sources, chemicals will need to be added to the Chemical
Database. Click the button to open the Chemical Database where the names of the
desired chemicals can be entered.

4: Once all of the chemicals have been entered, you may specify chemical-specific emission rates for each of
the sources selected under the List of Sources table.

Note: It is important to inspect your input files as not all options are supported in a
multi-chemical run. You can view the source input file by double clicking on a
source in the List of Sources table or by selecting the source and clicking on
the button. Any information in the input file not supported by the Multi-
Chemical Run will be commented out (**). If this information is required, you
will need to do a regular model run. Always check the Warning and
Information tabs for additional unsupported options.

5: Specify the output options for the run in the Output Options tab; these include Averaging Times, High
Values, etc..

6: Once you have specified the chemicals and emission rates for each source, and your output options, click
the button to open the AERMOD Batcher.

164
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 5 - Multi-Chemical Run Utility

AERMOD Batcher

7: The AERMOD Batcher displays the input files, one for each source, as well as the model that will be used
for the run. Click the button to run the model.

8: Once the run is complete, the AERMOD Batcher will close.

9: The Multi-Chemical Run Utility will automatically generate the required plotfiles. When this process is
complete, the Multi-Chemical Utility can be closed, and the contour plots viewed in the AERMOD View
interface. You may also view the contour plots by clicking on the button within the Multi-
Chemical Utility.

Chemical Setup tab

In the Chemical Setup tab you must specify all the chemicals and their emission rates for each source.

Chemical Setup tab

There are two main panels in the Chemical Setup tab -

List of Sources

This panel displays all of the sources defined in the current project. Sources displayed in red have not been run,
while those in black have been processed. Sources that have been run, but unsuccessfully, will have the
symbol displayed next to it indicating that errors in the output file were detected.

165
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 5 - Multi-Chemical Run Utility AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The following information is displayed for each of the sources -

Active: Check this box if you would like your source to be active and included in the run.
Source ID: Displays the Source ID.
Source Type: Displays the Source type.
No. of Chemicals: This field displays the number of chemicals the source emits. The names of these
chemicals and their emission rates for the selected source are displayed in the List of Chemicals panel. If
a source does not have any chemicals specified for it, then this source will not be processed and will be
highlighted in red.
Description: Displays a description of the source.
Post File: If you have previously run the input file for the source, you may click the button and specify
the Post-Processing file (*.pos) for the source. This allows you to simply generate the plotfiles by clicking
on the button.

The following buttons are available in the List of Sources panel -

Click on this button to remove the results for the selected source. This will permanently delete the
Post-Processing file (*.pos) from the project.

Click on this button to view either the input or output file for the selected source. The output file will
be available only if you have run the source.

Selects all sources.

Unselects all sources.

Checks the Active box for all selected sources.

Unchecks the Active box for all selected sources.

List of Chemicals

This panel displays the list of chemicals to be modeled for the selected source and also allows you to specify the
chemicals emitted by the selected source in the List of Sources panel as well as and their individual emission
rates.

How to Specify the Chemicals for your Sources:

1: In the List of Sources panel, select the source for which you want to specify chemicals and emission rates.

2: Before you can specify the chemicals for the source, you must first populate the chemical database with all
the chemicals for your project. Click the button to open the Chemical Database dialog
where you can set up all the chemicals you will be specifying for your sources.

3: Once you have defined all the chemicals in the Chemical Database you can assign one or more chemicals
that are being emitted by your source using either of the following methods -

166
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 5 - Multi-Chemical Run Utility

4: Click in the Chemical Name cell to display a drop-down list from where you can select a chemical.

5: Click the button to display the List of Chemicals dialog from where you can select a chemical.

6: After selecting the chemical, you must then enter the emission rate in grams per second (g/s) in the
Emission Rate field.

7: To add another chemical for the source, click the button and then specify the chemical and emission rate.

The following buttons are also found in the List of Chemicals panel -

Allows you to clear either the selected chemical or all the chemicals for the selected source.

Allows you to import chemicals and emission rates for your sources. You may import data either from
a *.csv file or from an input file. If you select to import from an input file the Import Emissions from
ISC/AERMOD Input Files dialog will be displayed.

Allows you to export the chemicals and emission rates for your sources.

Output Options tab

The Output Options tab allows you to specify the output options for the Multi-Chemical Run utility. The
output options that were selected in the AERMOD View project will automatically be selected in the Multi-
Chemical Run utility. However, you can change and add to these options.

Output Options tab

The following output options are available in this tab -

Averaging Time Options (Hours): Specify the short term averaging times for which to calculate the
output. Simply check the boxes of the averaging times you wish to use.
Period Averaging: In this panel you may select the Period and Annual averaging options.
Exceedance: Check this box if you wish to specify a threshold value.

167
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 5 - Multi-Chemical Run Utility AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Average Algorithm: Here can select whether you wish to calculate a Block Average or a Rolling Average.
High Values: Check the high values that are applicable to your modeling.
PLOTFILES to be Generated: This list displays all of the possible plotfiles to be generated for every
chemical, according to the selected averaging options and high values. Plotfiles displayed in red have not
been processed while those in black have been processed. You can view a processed plotfile in WordPad by
selecting it and clicking on the button.
Specify Path for Plotfiles: By default, all plot files will be saved to preset locations. If you wish to
specify an alternate location for the plotfiles, click the button in the Specify Path for PLOTFILES
panel and select the location to save the files. If you wish to return to the default location, click the
button.

Tip: The default locations where the plotfiles are saved are determined
according to the model that is run:
ISCST3 Runs: project directory\projectname.IS\
ISC-PRIME Runs: project directory\projectname.PR\
AERMOD Runs: project directory\projectname.AD\

Chemical Database
The Chemical Database allows you to specify all the chemicals for your project. Since sources are all treated
as buoyant gases in AERMOD View, you do not need to specify any chemical properties, only the chemical name.
The Multi-Chemical Run utility allows you to distinguish between the contributions from different components in
a source by entering the emission rate of each component that makes up the source.

You have access to the Chemical Database dialog by clicking on the button in the Chemical Setup
tab or by selecting Data | Chemical Database... from the menu.

Chemical Database dialog

Note: Pollutants SO2, NOx, PM10-Pos 97 NAAQC are treated differently by the model
and therefore cannot be processed through the Multi-Chemical Run utility. If you
would like to include these chemicals, you will have to process it through the
direct model run.

168
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 5 - Multi-Chemical Run Utility

There are a number of buttons available, each of which are described below:

Allows you to specify a new chemical for the database. Click this button to add a new row to
the table where you can then type the name of the chemical in the Chemical Name field.

Removes the selected chemical from the list.

Removes all the chemicals from the database.

Allows you to export the current list of chemicals in text format (*.txt) for future use.

Allows you to import a list of chemicals in text format (*.txt).

Warnings tab
The Warnings tab displays the information that was ignored from the ISC/AERMOD input file by the Multi-
Chemical Run utility. If there are any options listed here that you need to include in your run, you will have to
carry out a regular model run.

Warnings tab

Information tab
The Information tab displays information regarding the options that are not supported in the current version
of the Multi-Chemical Run utility.

Information tab

169
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 5 - Multi-Chemical Run Utility AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The following options are NOT supported:

Special pollutant options, such as SO2, NOx and PM10 – pos 97 NAAQS
Optional control files, such as Re-Start files
TOXICS/Gas Dry Deposition when the deposition velocity is calculated by the model
TOXICS/SCIM Option
Source groups other than Group ALL
Discrete polar receptors and polar plant boundary receptors
MAXTABLE (Maximum Values) and DAYTABLE (Daily Values) options
Only chemical specific plotfiles are generated, any other type of output file is ignored, for example post-
processing files
The main output files that are generated are specific to only one source with unitized emission rate
Chemical-specific output files are not being generated at this point

170
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 6 - Running the U.S. EPA Model

CHAPTER 6 RUNNING THE U.S. EPA MODEL

Running the U.S. EPA Model

Project Status

Details

Running the U.S. EPA EVENT Model

Running the U.S. EPA Model

Project Status
The Project Status dialog provides you with a concise way of viewing all the options selected in your project.
This dialog can be displayed by clicking on the Run menu toolbar button or by selecting Run | Run Model...
from the menu.

Project Status dialog

The Project Status dialog contains a summary of the inputs and options selected for the current project.

On the top section of the dialog, the name of the input file and output file for the selected model is displayed.
The Project Status dialog is composed of six tabs, Control, Source, Receptor, Meteorology, Terrain Grid, and
Output. Each tab summarizes the options you have selected for the specific pathway for the current project run.
Options not defined or not being used will appear as a dashed line (----).

At the bottom of the dialog, a message identifies if your project is complete or not. If your project is incomplete,
you should go to the Details dialog to discern the missing information.

The following buttons are available in the Project Status dialog:

Displays the Help contents for the Project Status dialog.

171
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 6 - Running the U.S. EPA Model AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Displays the Details dialog where you can view any missing project run information.

Click this button to run the U.S. EPA model in the DO NOT RUN mode. This mode allows you
to process the input file through the U.S. EPA model just to check for any errors in the input
data. This option can save you time if a large run is performed with some incorrect input
data.

Click here to run the U.S. EPA model (ISCST3, ISC-PRIME, or AERMOD).

Closes the Project Status dialog.

Note: We strongly recommend installing your software and operating all projects from
a single local hard drive. Since this is database driven software, there is
consistently a large exchange of information from the program to the project
files. Running the software or projects on a network can significantly slow down
the run time of the software, and can slow down your network for other network
users.

Details
The Details dialog is displayed by selecting Run | Details... from the menu, or by pressing the button
from the Project Status dialog.

The Details dialog contains a list of all missing information or errors for the current project. AERMOD View will
detect most of the data that is missing or incorrect, however, it is advisable that you always verify your project
input data. The list is subdivided into pathways, with all the missing inputs for each pathway listed under each
pathway heading.

Details dialog

172
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 6 - Running the U.S. EPA Model

Running the U.S. EPA EVENT Model

The EVENT model is specifically targeted to perform short-term (less than 24 hour) analysis of source
contributions for specific limiting events. A good example of the use of the EVENT model would be to examine
possible violations of an air quality standard from a source contribution over a short-term time period.

This is an optional process. In order to use this model select the EVENT Input File option from the Control
Pathway.

The EVENT model works in conjunction with all the models (ISCST3, ISC-PRIME, and AERMOD). The models
actually generate the input file needed to run the EVENT model as the input file for the EVENT model is based
on the options selected for the model.

The results contained in the EVENT output file will be affected by the selections made in the Tabular Outputs
window, such as the highest values. You can also specify threshold violation files that contain all the information
on occurrences where concentrations of a substance violated the threshold limit for the particular substance.
These files are optional and are specified in the Threshold Violation Files window.

Note: The EVENT model may produce very large files for runs involving a large number
of receptors if a significant percentage of the results exceed the threshold value.
These files can get extremely large in certain circumstances, even up to several
hundred megabytes. Therefore, please be sure you have adequate space on
your hard drive.

How to Run the U.S. EPA EVENT Model:

1: Select the EVENT Input File option from the Control Pathway.

2: Select Run | Run Model... from the menu. After the model run has finished successfully, go to the menu
and select Run | Run EVENT.

3: The Run EVENT model dialog will appear giving you status information. If all the necessary options are
satisfied, click the button to run the EVENT model.

Run EVENT model dialog

4: Once the model run is complete, another dialog will appear asking you if you want to see the EVENT output
file.

173
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 6 - Running the U.S. EPA Model AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Running the U.S. EPA Model

When the data input for your project is complete, you can run the EPA BPIP-PRIME model. It is advisable that
before you run the model, you verify the completeness of your project.

How to Run the U.S. EPA Models:

1: Select Run | Status | Model... from the menu to display the Project Status dialog. Go through all the
pathway tabs to verify that all the options you selected are correct.

2: Click the button to display the Details dialog. Check if there are any errors noted in the list. If
errors are listed, they should be corrected.

3: After correcting all the problems, or if no errors were listed, return to the Project Status dialog and then
click the button. With the Verify Run option (Do Not Run option) the U.S. EPA model will only
process the input runstream (input file) data for errors and summarize the setup information. When the
execution of the model is completed, the dialog is closed and then a dialog is displayed informing you
whether or not your run was successful.

4: If any errors are detected, you should correct them. After correcting all the problems, click the
button from the Project Status dialog.

5: The Run Status dialog is displayed to provide status information about the simulation. In this window, the
model first indicates that setup information is being processed and then gives the Julian day currently being
processed. If at any time you wish to stop the run, click the button.

Run Status dialog

Note: The button will be disabled if AERMOD View detects that the U.S. EPA
model executable version cannot be cancelled during the run.

6: If you have checked the Close after Run box, the Run Status dialog will close automatically after the run
and your results will be displayed in the drawing area (if you selected Contour Plot Files as an output
option). If you did not check the Close after Run box, the Run Status dialog will remain open after the
run, until you close the dialog.

7: You can view the output file at any time after running you project by selecting Output | Model Output
File from the menu.

174
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

CHAPTER 7 OUTPUT

Output

Plotfiles

Graphical Options

Reports

Printing Options

Plotfiles
Contouring in AERMOD View

The data to be contoured are generally treated as collections of arbitrary points. Each point has a 2-d location
(X- and Y-coordinates) and associated value. In the case of AERMOD View these points are receptor locations
and values at them are concentrations.

The X- and Y-extents of such point collection define the rectangular area to be contoured. This area is
subdivided into a number of rectangular cells. The number of cells is the same in X- and Y-direction and equals
the “Mesh Size” parameter in the Contour Smoothing option.

Contours - Smoothing screen of Graphical Options dialog.

The borders of the mesh cells form a grid that is used as a base for actual contouring. The values of
concentration are calculated at the nodes of the grid from values at five closest original data points weighed
according to inverted squared distances from the data points to the grid node. After such resampling, each
rectangular cell is contoured individually based on the calculated values at its corners.

In “Draft” mode, the cell is diagonally split into two triangles, while in “Proof” mode a new center node is
introduced at the center of the cell with the value equal to the average of the four corner values and the cell is
subdivided into four triangles by two diagonals. Each triangle is then treated as a piece of a three-dimensional
plane with the contoured value changing linearly between vertices along the sides of the triangle. Since a
particular level of concentration represents a horizontal plane in X-Y-Value space, this plane will either not cross
the triangle (if the triangle is completely above or below this horizontal plane) or cross the triangle along a

175
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

straight line segment. These line segments are later assembled into continuous contour lines which may form
closed rings or intersect the boundary of the contoured area.

In the case of shaded contours, each color is associated with low and high concentration values which define a
band in the overall range of values. To determine the portion of the triangle that belongs to a particular color
band the logic similar to that described in the previous paragraph is used.

The most
representative
contouring is
produced when
nodes of the
resampling grid
coincide with the
original receptor
points. Figure 1
shows contours for
the case of 20 by 20
Cartesian receptor
grid with contour
“Mesh Size” set to
21 and B-spline
smoothing.

Figure 1 - Grid nodes matching original data points: Mesh Size 21, Draft mode, B-spline smoothing

176
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

In such case
introduction of
center cell nodes
done in “Proof”
mode would only
worsen the contour
representation (see
Figure 2).

Figure 2 - Grid nodes matching original data points: Mesh Size 21, Proof mode, B-spline smoothing.

Use of a denser
mesh may also
introduce unwanted
effects of
interpolation, as
displayed in Figure
4. Note that in
general, for large
number of receptors,
more or less evenly
distributed over the
analyzed area, a
higher “Mesh Size”
will produce a better
contour image.

Figure 3 - Contouring grid denser than original data: Mesh Size 50, Draft mode, B-spline smoothing.

177
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Concentration Converter

The Concentration Converter is a utility that allows you to generate new plotfiles from existing ones without
having to re-run the ISCST3/AERMOD models. This utility allows you to apply a multiplier or an additive to the
concentration values, change the averaging period, or change the concentration units to parts per million (ppm).

Note: The Concentration Converter utility can only be used for concentration
values, not for deposition.

You have access to this dialog by selecting Tools | Concentration Converter... from the menu.

Concentration Converter

The following options are available:

Original Plotfile

Specify the plotfile you wish to apply the changes to. Click the button to specify the name and location of
the plotfile you wish to use. If a plotfile is currently being displayed in the AERMOD View window, by default the
name and path of this open plotfile will be displayed in this panel.

Destination Plotfile

Here you must specify a name and location for the new plotfile that will be created after the conversion has
been applied to the original plotfile. Click the button to specify where you would like to save the file and
under what name.

Concentration Scale Converter

Check the Concentration Scale Converter box if you would like to apply a multiplicative or additive factor to
the concentration values. This can be useful, for example, when you want to take into account background
concentrations. Simply specify a value for the concentration multiplier and concentration additive.

178
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Averaging Time Converter

Check the Averaging Time Converter box if you wish to specify a different averaging period for the selected
plotfile. You must then specify the following:

Original Averaging Time: Specify the averaging period for your original plotfile in either hours or
minutes. Your plotfile will be in one of the following averaging periods:

Averaging Period Total No. of Minutes

1 hour 60 min
2 hours 120 min
3 hours 180 min
4 hours 240 min
6 hours 360 min
8 hours 480 min
12 hours 720 min
24 hours 1,440 min
Month 43,200 min
Annual 525,600 min
Period Dependent on total number of
years of met data

New Averaging Time: Enter the averaging period you want your plotfile to be converted to. The new
averaging time can be given in either hours or minutes.
Conversion Factor: You will need to either specify or calculate a conversion factor upon which the
averaging time conversion will be based -
User Specified: Specify in the text box a value for the conversion factor.

Calculated: In the Decay Factor text box specify the decay factor to be used and click the
button to calculate the conversion factor. The calculated value will be displayed in the panel. The
decay factor can be from 0.17 and 0.20, recommended in some jurisdictions to be 0.28. This is applied
to the following equation (Wark, K. and C. Warner, 1981):

where:

Cnew = desired concentration

Cold = original concentration

Tnew = new averaging time

Told = original averaging time

q = decay factor

Convert Concentration in Micrograms per Cubic Meter to PPM

At some point, you may wish to convert concentrations in micrograms per cubic meter (ug/m3) to concentrations
in parts per million (ppm) or parts per billion (ppb). For example, the ISC and AERMOD models generate output
in ug/m3 while you may need results in ppm.

179
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The conversion can be achieved using the following equations:

Cppb = Cug/m3x 24.45/MW

Cppm = Cug/m3 x 0.02445/MW

where:

C = Concentration of the pollutant

MW = Molecular weight of pollutant

24.45 = Constant representing the volume, in liters, of one mole of a gas at standard temperature (25°C)
and pressure of 1 atm (101.3kPa).

Cppm = 100 x 0.02445/64

Cppm = 0.0382 ppm = 38.2 ppb

AERMOD View is capable of performing the conversion of your plotfile concentration results from micrograms per
cubic meter (ug/m3) to parts per million (ppm). Simply go to Tools | Concentration Converter and select Convert
Concentrations in ug/m3 to PPM. The units in the original plotfile will be displayed in the panel, allowing you to
verify whether this conversion is possible. All you need to do is specify the molecular weight (MW) in grams per
mole of the specific pollutant you are modeling and click Convert. This will generate a new plotfile with
concentrations in ppm.

After you have specified your conversion options you must click the button in order to generate the new
plotfile. A message will be displayed indicating the conversion was successful.

Click the button to close the Concentration Converter. You can then open and view your new
plotfile.

Note: The conversion done by AERMOD View assumes a temperature of 25°C and
1 atmosphere pressure. If you want to make a conversion using specific temperature and
pressure values, you will need to do this outside the interface using the following
equations:
Cppb = Cug/m3 x (MV/MW)
MV = 22.4 x (T/273) x (101.3/P)
where:
C = Concentration of the pollutant
MV = Molecular volume
MW = Molecular weight of pollutant
22.4 = This is the number of liters in one mole of an ideal gas at 0° Celsius (273°
Kelvin).
T = Temperature in Kelvin
P = Pressure in Kilopascal (kPa)

Please be aware that the values at each receptor in a plotfile can potentially be from different elevations and
times. Thus it is necessary to take care when choosing temperature and pressure values.

180
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Import a Blanking File

A blanking file allows you to mask a specified portion of your plot file. You can, for example, mask the area
within your plant boundary and view only the contours beyond the plant boundary.

Imported Blanking File

How to Import a Blanking File:

1: Select Import | Blanking File... from the menu. This option allows you to select a blanking file (*.rpb) to
import into your project. This could be a plant boundary file generated from another project or a file you
created yourself.

2: The Import Blanking File dialog is displayed. Specify the name and path of the blanking file and click the
button. The blanking file will be imported into your project.

Tip: You can use the Overlay Control option to move layers above or below the
masked area of the blanking file.

181
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Graphical Options
The Graphical Options dialog contains options to enhance the appearance of your project. Within the
Graphical Options dialog you can define options such as contour levels, shading, contour line thickness and
color, and labels.

You have access to the Graphical Options dialog by select Output | Graphical Options... from the menu or
by clicking on the Graphical Output Options ( ) tool located on the Annotation Toolbar.

The Graphical Options dialog uses a two-pane view. The tree, located on the left side of the dialog, is used
for navigation and item selection. Select an item (marked as ) in the tree to display the available options on
the right panel.

The Graphical Options dialog contains several options. These options are explained in the following sections.

Graphical Options - Levels

In the Levels page, you specify the contour levels for the current contour plot. Select either Contours - Levels
or Terrain Contours - Levels from the tree located on the left side of the Graphical Options dialog, to display
the options available for contour levels, shading, and colors.

The Levels options are the same for both Contours and Terrain Contours.

indicates you are working on the contour settings for your results.

indicates you are working on the contour settings for your terrain data.

Graphical Options dialog - Levels

Contour Level Options

Shade Style: Allows you to define the shading style for your contours. See Contour Shade Styles for a
description of available options.
Alpha Level: When you have selected the Alpha Blend Shade Style, the Alpha Level option becomes
available. Adjusting the alpha setting allows you to change the shading of the plots in your project.
Max.: This is the maximum value you want to be displayed on your contours. If you click the Default
button, the maximum value found in your model results is displayed in this field.

182
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Min.: This is the minimum value you want to be displayed on your contours. If you click the Default
button, the minimum value found in your model results is displayed in this field.

Level Options

Level Options: Some options are available to help you define the contour levels. These options can be
selected under the Mode drop-down list. See Level Mode for a description of available options.
Default: This button will get the minimum and maximum values available for the current model results.
Calculate: This button will apply the selected Level Options to the table. Once these values are applied,
they can be customized in the Levels table.
Use Cut Off: The Use Cut Off option allows you to specify no shading for contours below a certain value.
This is useful when you want, for example, to mask regions of a plume where the concentration or
deposition is near zero.

Levels

The following buttons are available from the Levels panel:

Adds another level to bottom of the table.

Inserts a level above the selected level.

Deletes the selected level from the table.

Clears the table.

See Specifying Colors for a description on selecting colors for each contour level, saving color palettes, and
specifying the number of color shades.

Graphical Options - Smoothing

Select either Contours - Smoothing or Terrain Contours - Smoothing from the tree located on the left side
of the Graphical Options dialog, to display the options available to control the smoothing of the contour lines, the
size of the contour mesh, and the color and thickness of the contour lines.

The Smoothing options are the same for both Contours and Terrain Contours.

indicates you are working on the contour settings for your results.

indicates you are working on the contour settings for your terrain data.

183
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Graphical Options dialog - Smoothing

The following options are available:

Smoothing

Default: This sets your smoothing selections to the default.

Quality

Draft: Select this option to generate contour plot lines with no smoothing applied to it. The rendering of the
contour plots is much faster when using this draft mode.
Proof: Select this option to get smooth contour lines. This option however will delay the rendering of the
contour plots.
B-Spline Smoothing: Checking this option to get smoother contour lines. This option should be used to
get high quality printed outputs.
Mesh Size: This option determines the size of the mesh (grid) used to generate the contour plots. AERMOD
View uses a mesh of 50x50 as the default. However, this can be changed at any time. This option is not
found in the Terrain Contours - Smoothing page, only under the Contours - Smoothing page.

Contour Method

Triangulation: Combines points of triangles and linearly interpolates between points in a triangle to create
values which are then connected to create contours. If this option is selected then you need to specify the
Quality Rate.
Quality Rate: This option is only available when you have selected the triangulation contour method.
For increased quality, additional points may be added in between the existing points, creating a finer
resolution and a smoother result.
B-Spline Smoothing: Check this option to get smoother contour lines. This option should be used to get
high quality printed outputs; however, it can also be used for other purposes.
Resampling: This option creates a regular grid and calculates values in each grid node using given points.
If this option is selected then the Mesh Size should be specified.
Mesh Size: This option is available when you have selected the resampling contour method. The mesh
size determines the size of the grid used to generate the contour plots. Each of the points in the mesh
takes its value from the surrounding points. IRAP-h View uses a mesh of 50x50 as the default;
however, this can be changed at any time.

Note: The higher the quality rate or mesh size, the longer it takes to render contours.

184
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Contour Lines

This option allows you to turn on or off the display of contour lines, but still displaying the color shading.

Line Thickness: Here you specify the thickness of the contour lines.
Line Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog where you can select the color for the contour
lines.

Sample

As you make selections for the line thickness and color, the sample is updated to reflect the changes.

Graphical Options - Labeling

Select either Contours - Labeling or Terrain Contours - Labeling from the tree located on the left side of
the Graphical Options dialog, to display the options available for contour labels. In the Labeling screen of the
Graphical Options dialog, you control the font type, font size, style, and color of the contour labels.

The Labeling options are the same for both Contours and Terrain Contours.

indicates you are working on the contour settings for your results.

indicates you are working on the contour settings for your terrain data.

Graphical Options dialog - Labeling

Labels

Label Contours: Check this box if you want labels to be displayed at your contour lines.

185
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Default: This button sets your Labeling selections to the default.

Font: Select a font for the contour labels from the list of fonts installed on your Windows system.
Size: Select a font size from the list of valid sizes for the font you selected.
Style: Define a style for the selected font (Normal, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic).
Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog where you can select the color for the contour labels.

Format

Allows you to specify the numeric format to use when displaying values for your contour labels.

Scientific Notation: Check this box if you want the contour labels to be written in scientific notation.
No. Decimal Places: Specify the number of decimal places for the contour labels.
Sample: As you make selections for color, font, size, and style, the sample is updated to reflect the
changes.

Orientation

Automatic: Check this box if you want the orientation of the contour labels to be displayed using the
default settings (in-line with the contours).
Manual: Check this box if you want to manually specify the orientation of the contour labels in your
project. If you check this option, you must select the angle that you would like to orient the labels.

Spacing

There are a number of spacing options available for your contour labels. From the drop-down list, select the
spacing option that best suits your needs. The available options are:

Very Infrequent
Infrequent
Normal
Frequent
Very Frequent

Sample

As you make selections for color, font, size, and style, the sample is updated to reflect the changes.

Graphical Options - Color Ramp

The Color Ramp screen of the Graphical Options dialog displays the options available for customizing the
display of the color ramp. Here you control the display, font type, font size, style, color and format of the color
ramp labels.

The Color Ramp panel can be displayed in the following ways:

Select the Color Ramp option under the Contours or Terrain Contours folder from the tree located on
the left side of the Graphical Options dialog.
Double-click the Color Ramp located in the application main window.
Right-click the Color Ramp and select Edit from the pop-up menu.

186
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Graphical Options dialog - Color Ramp

See below the description of each one of these options:

Color Ramp

Show Color Ramp: Check this box if you would like the Color Ramp to be displayed in the main
application window.
Default: This returns all the color ramp settings to the default values.
Font: Select a font from the list of fonts installed on your Windows system.
Size: Select a size from the list of valid sizes for the font you selected.
Style: Select a style for the selected font (Normal, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic).
Font Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog where you can select a color for the color ramp
labels.
Line Color: Click the Color bar to display the Color dialog where you can select the color for the for the
lines used on the color ramp.
Label Unit: This option allows you to specify a label that identifies the unit for the values displayed on the
color ramp. The button allows you to get the default unit label for the displayed contour values.

Note: Plotfiles from Lakes Environmental AERMOD View version 5 and up contain
information regarding units for concentration and deposition values, either the
default output units or the units specified in the Emission Output Unit window. If
you have imported a plotfile from a version earlier than Lakes Environmental
AERMOD View version 5 or from another source, the default output unit of
ug/m3 (micrograms per cubic meter) for concentration values and the default
output unit g/m2 (grams per square meter) for deposition values will be used.
You are responsible for specifying the appropriate units.

Title: This option allows you to specify a title that describes the color ramp. The button allows you to
get the default title for the color ramp.

Format

Allows you to specify the numeric format to use when displaying values on the color ramp.

Scientific Notation: Check this box if you want the color ramp labels to be written in scientific notation.

187
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

No. Decimal Places: Specify the number of decimal places to display on the color ramp.
First Label: Specifies the first color interval on the color ramp that is labeled. A value of 0 means that the
first label will be placed at the minimum color interval.
Label Angle: Specifies the angle at which the labels are displayed on the color ramp.
Label Frequency: Specifies the interval in the color ramp between labels. A value of 1 means every
contour level interval will be labeled.
Sample: As you make selections for color, font, size, and style, the sample is updated to reflect the
changes.

Graphical Options - Posting

In the Posting page, you control the display of posting values. Select Posting from the tree located on the left
side of the Graphical Options dialog, to display the options available for posting of model results.

Graphical Options dialog - Posting

The following options are available:

Post Labels

Show Post Values: Check this box if you would like the Post Values to be displayed at each receptor node.
You can also turn on and off the display of posting with the Show Concentrations tool on the Graphical
Output Toolbar.
Default: This sets your Posting selections to the default values.
Font: Select a font for the post value labels from the list of fonts installed on your Windows system.
Size: Select a size from the list of valid sizes for the font you selected.
Style: Select a font style for the post value labels (Normal, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic).
Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select a color for your post value
labels.
Max: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select a color to represent the
maximum post value.
Threshold: Specify a threshold value which can then be labeled in a different color for easy identification.
Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select a color for your threshold
post value labels.

188
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Format

Scientific Notation: Check this box if you want post values to be written in scientific notation.
No. Decimal Places: Specify the number of decimal places for the post values.
Marker: You can specify the style of the marker to be used to mark the location where posting values are
available (e.g, receptor nodes).
Label Orientation: Specify the location of the post values relative to the marker by clicking on the button
that best corresponds to the desired orientation.
Nodes to Skip Labeling: This option allows you to specify a skip factor for posting of results. When the
nodes to skip labeling in X and Y direction are set to 0, posting labels are shown at every node. If you set
the values for X and Y directions at 2 for example, two posting labels are skipped between nodes.
Sample: As you make selections for color, font, size, and style, the sample is updated to reflect the
changes.

Graphical Options - Ruler Options

The Ruler Options screen of the Graphical Options dialog allows you to make changes to the axis labels along
the top and left side of the drawing area. Here you can change the font, size, color of the ruler and apply axis
titles.

Graphical Options dialog - Ruler Options

At any time, you can click on this button to return to the default settings.

Scale Font

In this frame you can determine the display of the scale font. The following options are available:

Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.

Size: Select a font size from the drop-down list.
Style: Select a font style from the drop-down list.
Color: Click the color bar to open the Color dialog from where you can select a color for your text.

189
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Axis

Specify axis titles and make selections for color, font, size, and style for your text. The following options are
available:

X-Axis Title: Enter a title for the X-Axis.

Y-Axis Title: Enter a title for the Y-Axis.
Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.
Size: Select a font size from the drop-down list.
Style: Select a font style from the drop-down list.
Color: Click the color bar to open the Color dialog from where you can select a color for your text.

Graphical Options - Color Mappings

The Color Mappings screen of the Graphical Options dialog enables you to change the color and display of
objects in the drawing area. Changes made to the an object are specific to the object. This option is available
only for discrete receptors within your project or if you have imported a shapefile into your project.

Graphical Options dialog - Color Mappings

Color Mapping

Uniform Color: If this option is selected, then object will be displayed in the fixed, uniform color you have
selected. Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select the desired color. For
discrete receptors, all receptors will be displayed in the color you have selected.
Color by Attribute: This option allows you to select one of the object’s attributes from the drop-down list
as the color scheme. Click the Customize Colors... button to display the Custom Attribute Colors dialog
from where you can define colors for each attribute class or range. In the Legend Title field you can
specify a title for your legend which will be displayed in the Tree View - Overlays tab. If you wish to return
to the default legend title click the button.

Style

Outline: To display the outline of each object, check the Outline box. You can then click the color bar to
display the Color dialog from where you can select a color for the outline.
Shade Style: From the Style drop-down list you can select a style to apply to the object.
Size: Here you may specify here the size of the marker.

190
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Graphical Options - Labels

The Labels screen of the Graphical Options dialog enables you to change the appearance of the labels for the
objects in the drawing area. The selections available in the Labels tab are the same, regardless of which object
type you are changing the labels for. Changes to your labels are object specific. For example, if you change the
label settings for your point sources, the label settings of the other objects will not be changed.

Graphical Options dialog - Labels

The following options are available:

Labels

Default: Click on this button to return all your font settings to the default.

Note: The default that is applied to the labels are the default settings you specified in
the Default Settings screen of the Preferences dialog.

Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.

Size: Select a font size from the drop-down list.
Style: Select a font style from the drop-down list.
Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select a color for the labels.
Label Orientation: Specify the location of the labels relative to the object marker by clicking on the button
that best corresponds to the desired orientation.

Format

Angle: If you would like your label placed at an angle relative to the marker, enter the angle value here.
Offset X: This is the X distance between the marker and the label. The default is 5, but you can change
this at any time.
Offset Y: This is the Y distance between the marker and the label. The default is 5, but you can change
this at any time.
Background Color: Check the Background Color box if you would like to change the background color just
around the label. Click the color bar to open the Color dialog from where you can select a background color.

Anchor

191
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Origin Point: Select this option if you would like the label anchored around the origin
point. The origin point is the SW corner of the object, such as a building or grid.

Center Point: Select this option if you would like the label anchored around the
center point of the object.

Sample

As you make selections for color, font, size, and style for your labels, the sample is updated to reflect the
changes.

Graphical Output Toolbar

The Graphical Output Toolbar allows you to easily turn on and off contouring, posting of results, and acts as
a quick reference to the to the maximum result value. This toolbar also allows you to select the desired plotfiles
and output type to be displayed. As you select different output types, the drawing area is refreshed and results
are displayed for the new option.

Graphical Output Toolbar

Show Contours tool ( ): With this tool, you have the option of turning on or off the display of the
contours.

Show Concentrations tool ( ): With this tool, you have the option of turning on or off the display of
the result values at each receptor location.

Show Terrain tool ( ): If you have elevated terrain, this tool gives you the option of turning on or off
the display of the terrain contours.

Preview Tool ( ): With this tool, you have the option of previewing the contents of the selected plotfile
in WordPad.
Plotfile List: This drop-down list contains all the plotfiles generated for the current run. Select from this list
the plotfile you wish to be displayed.
Output Type: The Output Type drop-down list displays the output types available for the current AERMOD
Plotfile. This depends on what output options you selected in the Dispersion Options screen in the Control
Pathway. The possible output types for each plotfile are:
CONC: Select this option to show concentration results for the current plotfile.
DEPOS: Select this option to show deposition results for the current plotfile.
DDEP: Select this option to show dry deposition results for the current plotfile.
WDEP: Select this option to show wet deposition results for the current plotfile.

Select the desired output type from the drop-down list. The plotfile for the selected output will be displayed in
the drawing area.

Max: AERMOD View reads the plotfile, which gives the calculated concentration and/or deposition values at
each receptor location, and then displays in the Max panel the maximum concentration or deposition value
along with the X and Y coordinates for the position of receptor where this maximum value occurs.

192
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Note: Plotfiles from Lakes Environmental AERMOD View version 5 and up contain
information regarding units for concentration and deposition values, either the
default output units or the units specified in the Emission Output Unit window. If
you have imported a plotfile from a version earlier than Lakes Environmental
AERMOD View version 5 or from another source, the default output unit of
ug/m3 (micrograms per cubic meter) for concentration values and the default
output unit g/m2 (grams per square meter) for deposition values will be used.
You are responsible for specifying the appropriate units, if different than the
default, in the Color Ramp screen in the Graphical Options dialog.

Reports
The Reports dialog allows you to produce reports on the input options for your project. You have access to this
dialog by selecting File | Reports from the menu or by clicking on the Reports menu toolbar button.

Reports dialog

Select Model to Print

In this panel you can select the model for which you wish to generate the report. You may choose ISCST3, ISC-
PRIME or AERMOD.

Select Reports to Print

A report can be generated for each pathway. Here you can select the reports you wish to print by checking the
appropriate box. If you wish to preview the report click the button.

Click on this button to select all the available reports to print.

Once you have made your selections, click on this button to print the reports.

193
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Printing Options
Print Preview

Before you can print the contents of the drawing area, AERMOD View displays the Print Preview dialog. Here
you can select printing options and preview how your printouts will look. AERMOD View prints the contents of
the drawing area into templates. These templates were designed so you can have important information about
your project automatically added to your printouts.

The Print Preview dialog is displayed every time you click the Print button located on the Menu Toolbar or
when you select File | Print… from the menu.

Print Preview dialog

The Print Preview dialog contains the following options:

Title: AERMOD View places the name of your project as the default title. However, you have the option of
specifying different titles. To specify different titles, uncheck the Default Titles box and type in the titles.
User Defined Scale: Here you can change the scale for your printout. A default scale is automatically
calculated but if you wish to change the scale, check the User Defined Scale box which then allows you to
select the scale you wish to use from the drop-down list. You can also type in a scale and click the
button to apply it.
Orientation: This is the orientation for your printout. Note that the preview area can preview your results
in either orientation- portrait or landscape, depending on which option is selected.
Comments: In this field you can type any comments or notes you want to be printed along with your
printouts.
Project No.: In this field you can specify your project number.

Print Mode: Displays which Print Mode option you are using. Click on to open the Print Mode dialog
where you can select whether to print in Normal or Bitmap Mode.

At the lower right corner of the dialog a series of buttons are available. See the function of these buttons below:

194
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Zoom In: If you select this tool, your mouse pointer changes to a magnifying glass. On the
Preview area, click the location you want to zoom in. Click as many times as necessary, until
you have the right magnification.

Zoom Out: Select this tool to go back to the original image size.

Copy to Metafile: Select this tool if you want to copy the image to the clipboard as a
Windows Metafile. You can then paste into any Windows application that supports pasting of a
Windows Metafile from the clipboard.

Save to File: Select this option if you want to save the print preview image to a file. The
printout will be saved as an Enhanced Windows Metafile (*emf).

Displays the help contents for the options contained in the Print Preview dialog.

Displays the Preferences dialog where you can specify printing and labeling options for your
printouts.

Displays the Print Setup dialog where you can specify printing options such as paper size and
orientation

Displays the Print dialog where you can specify printing options such as printer and number
of copies

Closes the Print Preview dialog.

Preferences

In the Preferences dialog you can define default options for your printouts and various other preferences for
your project.

Note: In the Preferences dialog you are defining your global preferences. This means
that the options you have selected in this dialog will be used as the default for
every printout, for your current project or any other project you open.

You have access to the Preferences dialog by selecting File | Preferences from the menu or clicking on the
button located in the Print Preview dialog.

The Preferences dialog contains several options. These options are explained in the following sections.

195
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Preferences - General

The General screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to select the display size of the Menu Toolbar Buttons
and the Select tool properties.

Preferences - General

Standard Toolbar

Here you can select whether you wish to display large or small buttons on the Menu Toolbar.

Select Tool Properties

When an object in the drawing area is selected using the Select Tool it is outlined and filled for easy
identification. In this panel you can select the following selection properties:

Line Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select a color for the outline
of the selected object.
Line Width: Specify the width of the outline.
Fill Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select a fill color for the
selected object.
Fill Style: From the drop-down list, select a fill style for the selected object.

Group Toolbar Buttons

Check this option to allow toolbar buttons to be grouped together based on common functionality. This allows
for simplification of both the Annotation and Application Toolbars.

196
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Preferences - Appearance

The Appearance screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to hide inactive buildings so they will not be
displayed on your printout. Simply check the Hide Inactive Buildings box.

Preferences dialog - Appearance

Preferences - Terrain Processor

The Terrain Processor screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify the location to where you wish to
save map files that are downloaded from WebGIS when using the Terrain Processor. Both USGS DEM files and
SCROTUM files are cached after being downloaded.

Preferences dialog - Terrain Processor

Terrain Processor (DEM & SRTM files only)

The Terrain Processor panel displays:

the Map Server URL address from which USGS DEM and SRTM terrain data files are downloaded when the
WebGIS button in the Terrain Processor dialog is clicked

the location of the Map Cache Folder where downloaded files are saved, and the size of the map cache

197
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

In the Terrain Processor panel, you can:

Change the location of the Map Cache folder by clicking the Specify ( ) button.

Reset the location of the Map Cache folder to the default by clicking the Restore to Default ( ) button
Open the cache folder to view or delete specific files by clicking the Open button.
Clear all files from the cache by clicking the Delete All Files in Map Cache button.

Use Proxy

This option can be used if you have a proxy server and wish to specify the proxy address and port. Check the
Use Proxy box to make this panel active and specify the required information.

Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - AERMOD

The EPA Models/Limits - AERMOD screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify which AERMOD
executable model should be used to run your project and displays the storage limits of the selected executable.
The latest version of the U.S. EPA model AERMOD is supplied with the AERMOD View interface. You can also
download the latest model from the U.S. EPA web site or from the Lakes Environmental web site.

The U.S. EPA AERMOD model allocates data storage as needed based on the number of sources, receptors,
source groups, and other input requirements, up to the maximum amount of memory available on a particular
computer.

Preferences dialog - EPA Models/Limits - AERMOD

By default the original EPA executable is specified for the model. The default executables are located in the
Models folder of your AERMOD View installation directory.

To select an alternative model executable, select the User-Specified option click the Specify ( ) button to
specify the name and location of the model to be used. Please make sure to specify the new storage limits for all
the parameters listed on the table. The storage limits for all user-specified model executables will be the same
as the original by default, unless these limits are changed.

Note: All AERMOD View data validation is based on the storage limit values. Therefore,
it is important that the correct limits be specified for the user-specified model
executables.

198
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - AERMAP

The EPA Models/Limits - AERMAP screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify which AERMAP
executable model should be used for your project and displays the storage limits of the selected executable. The
latest version of the U.S. EPA model AERMAP is supplied with the AERMOD View interface. You can also
download the latest executable from the U.S. EPA web site or from the Lakes Environmental web site.

Preferences dialog - EPA Models/Limits - AERMAP

By default the original EPA executable is specified. The default executable is located in the Models folder of
your AERMOD View installation directory.

To select an alternative model executable, select the User-Specified option click the Specify ( ) button to
specify the name and location of the executable to be used. Please make sure to specify the new storage limits
for all the parameters listed on the table. The storage limits for all user-specified model executables will be the
same as the original by default, unless these limits are changed.

Note: All AERMOD View data validation is based on the storage limit values. Therefore,
it is important that the correct limits be specified for the user-specified model
executables.

Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - ISCST3

The EPA Models/Limits - ISCST3 screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify which ISCST3
executable model should be used to run your project and displays the storage limits of the selected executable.
The latest version of the U.S. EPA model ISCST3 is supplied with the AERMOD View interface. You can also
download the latest model from the U.S. EPA web site or from the Lakes Environmental web site.

The U.S. EPA ISCST3 model allocates data storage as needed based on the number of sources, receptors,
source groups, and other input requirements, up to the maximum amount of memory available on a particular
computer.

199
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Preferences dialog - EPA Models/Limits - ISCST3

By default the original EPA executable is specified for the model. The default executable is located in the
Models folder of your AERMOD View installation directory.

To select an alternative model executable, select the User-Specified option click the Specify ( ) button to
specify the name and location of the model to be used. Please make sure to specify the new storage limits for all
the parameters listed on the table. The storage limits for all user-specified model executables will be the same
as the original by default, unless these limits are changed.

Note: All AERMOD View data validation is based on the storage limit values. Therefore,
it is important that the correct limits be specified for the user-specified model
executables.

200
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - ISC-PRIME

The EPA Models/Limits - ISC-PRIME screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify which ISC-PRIME
executable model should be used to run your project and displays the storage limits of the selected executable.
The latest version of the U.S. EPA model ISC-PRIME is supplied with the AERMOD View interface. You can also
download the latest model from the U.S. EPA web site or from the Lakes Environmental web site.

Unlike the ISCST3 model, the original U.S. EPA model for ISC-PRIME has some limitations on some of the
parameters such as the number of sources, receptors, and source groups. Due to these restrictions, a project
containing more than 1200 receptors can not be run using the original U.S. EPA ISC-PRIME executable model
(ISCP3.EXE).

Preferences dialog - EPA Models/Limits - ISC-PRIME

However, the U.S. EPA ISC-PRIME models make use of a static storage allocation design and the FORTRAN code
for these models can be modified and recompiled to accept higher storage limits for many parameters. Lakes
Environmental Software recompiled ISC3P.EXE to accept higher storage limits and the new executable was
renamed to PRIMEL.EXE which is used as the default model. The storage limits for the recompiled code
(PRIMEL.EXE) are defined in the Storage Limits tab of the Preferences dialog.

The original U.S. EPA model is located in the Models folder of your AERMOD View installation directory.

To select an alternative model executable, select the User-Specified option click the Specify ( ) button to
specify the name and location of the model to be used. Please make sure to specify the new storage limits for all
the parameters listed on the table.

Note: All AERMOD View data validation is based on the storage limit values. Therefore,
it is important that the correct limits be specified for the user-specified model
executables.

Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - BPIP

The EPA Models/Limits screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify which BPIP model executable
should be used to run your project and displays the storage limits of the selected executable. The latest version
of the U.S. EPA model BPIP-PRIME (BPIPPRM 04274) is supplied with the AERMOD View interface. You can also
download the latest model from the U.S. EPA website or the Lakes Environmental website.

201
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Preferences dialog - EPA Models/Limits

Note: The BPIPPRM 04274 model runs BPIP and BPIP-PRIME.

By default the BPIP-PRIME EPA executable (04274) is specified for the model. The default executable is located
in the Models folder of your AERMOD View installation directory. To select an alternative model executable,
select the User-Specified option click the Specify ( ) button to specify the name and location of the model
to be used.

The Model Limits panel displays the maximum number of buildings, tiers, corners and stacks that a particular
model executable supports. The U.S. EPA BPIP-PRIME model allocates data storage as needed, based on the
number of buildings, tiers, corners and stacks, up to the maximum amount of memory available on a particular
computer.

Parameter Parameter Storage Limit

Name BPIP-PRIME
Version 04274
MB Maximum No. of Buildings Unlimited
MT Maximum No. of Tiers per Unlimited
Building
MTS Maximum No. of Sides per Tier Unlimited
MSK Maximum No. of Stacks Unlimited

If specifying a User-Specified model, please make sure to specify the new storage limits for all the parameters
listed on the table. The storage limits for all user-specified model executables will be the same as the original by
default, unless these limits are changed.

Note: All AERMOD View data validation is based on the storage limit values. Therefore,
it is important that the correct limits be specified for the user-specified model
executables.

With the release of the BPIPPRM 04274 model, new input file flags were introduced. If you try to use older BPIP
or BPIP-PRIME models, the new flags will not be recognized and you will not be able to run your project. The
Advanced User Only panel circumvents this problem by recognizing that an older U.S. EPA BPIP model is
being used and the appropriate input file flags utilized.

202
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

The BPIP model represents circular buildings as uniform polygons. The Number of Circular Vertices option
determines the number of vertices to use when converting circular buildings into a polygon shape when writing
the BPIP Input File. Set the number of vertices according to the requirements of the regulatory agency. The
default, and minimum, value is 8.

Preferences - EPA Models/Limits - Model Input Files

The EPA Models/Limits - Model Input Files screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify whether
the model input file should be updated automatically on exit, or should be updated only when you view the input
file or run the model from within AERMOD View.

If you are using AERMOD View to prepare the model input file, but running the model outside of AERMOD View
(e.g. using Batcher), check this box. If you are running the model from AERMOD View, you may leave the box
unchecked.

Preferences dialog - EPA Models/Limits - Model Input Files

Preferences - Page Layout

The Page Layout screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify the information that will appear on
your printouts.

Preferences dialog - Page Layout

203
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The Page Layout option displays the following:

Company Name: Specify the name of your company to be printed on the printout template.
Modeler: Type the name of the modeler to be printed on the printout template.

Show

From the list box you can select what information you would like displayed on your printout. Check the
appropriate box to display the desired information on the printout.

Template Border Lines

Line Thickness: This is the thickness of all the border lines for the printout templates.

Date Options

This panel allows you to select which date you would like to show on your printout.

Preferences - Labeling

In Labeling screen of the Preferences dialog, you can specify the labeling options for the printout templates.

Preferences dialog - Labeling

Labeling Options for Printouts: Allows you to select the Default or User Defined options. If you select
User Defined, you can change the default label titles for the various sections of the printout layout.

204
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Deletes the labels in the fields of the User Defined column

Copies the default labels into the fields of the User Defined column

Preferences - Font Options

The Font Options screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify the font, size, style, color and position
of the field labels and field text for your printout.

Preferences dialog - Font Options

The following options are available:

Font Options - Tree View: The tree view displays the following options -
Field Label: These are the labels that describe the field content in the printout template boxes. Font
Options will be applied to all field labels.
Field Text: These are the labels used for the content of the printout template box. Under the Field
Text tree item you can select the field text for which you would like to change font options.

Default: The Default button returns all your font settings to the default. Click on this button to display a
floating menu from where you can select All or Selected. If you choose All, then default settings will be
applied to the Field Labels and all the Field Text. If you choose Selected, only the fields you have selected
from the tree list will be returned to the default. You can select items from the tree list by pressing down
the Shift key while you select multiple items in sequence or the Ctrl key to make disjoint selections.
Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.

205
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Size: Select a font size from the drop-down list.

Style: Select a font style from the drop-down list.
Color: Click the color bar to open the Color dialog from where you can select a color for your text.
Position: Click on one of the three buttons to select the alignment of your text. The text can be either left,
center or right aligned.
Sample: As you make selections for color, font, size, and style for your text, the sample is updated to
reflect the changes.

Preferences - Logo

The Logo screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to import an graphic to be used as your logo. This logo
will be displayed on the bottom right side of your printout.

Preferences dialog - Logo

Check the Use Logo box to make the Specify File panel active. Click the Specify ( ) button and specify the
name and location of the graphic file you will be using. The imported graphic will be displayed in the Preview
panel. Several file formats are supported: gif, jpg, jpeg, bmp, emf, and wmf.

The Margin option lets you specify how much white space you would like surrounding your logo. The default
margin is 5%, you can increase or decrease this at any time.

206
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Preferences - Default Settings

In the Default Settings screen of the Preferences dialog, you control the font type, font size, style, and color
of the labels for all the objects in your drawing area such as your facilities or emission release points.

Preferences dialog - Default Settings

Note: If, during your project, you would like to change the labels for a particular object
you can do so in the Labels screen of the Graphical Options dialog. Here you can,
for example, change the label settings of your buildings while leaving the labels
for the other objects at the default settings you have defined here.

The following options are available:

Labels

Allows Overlapping Labels: Check this box if you want to allow for overlapping labels.
Default: Click on this button to return all your font settings to the default.
Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.
Size: Select a font size from the drop-down list.
Style: Select a font style from the drop-down list.
Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select a color for the labels.
Label Orientation: Specify the location of the labels relative to the object marker by clicking on the button
that best corresponds to the desired orientation.

Format

Angle: If you would like your label placed at an angle relative to the marker, enter the angle value here.
Offset X: This is the X distance between the marker and the label. The default is 5, but you can change
this anytime.
Offset Y: This is the Y distance between the marker and the label. The default is 5, but you can change
this anytime.

207
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 7 - Output AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Background Color: Check the Background Color box if you would like to change the background color
just around the label. Click the color bar to open the Color dialog from where you can select a background
color.

Anchor

Origin Point: Select this option if you would like the label anchored around the origin point. The origin
point is the SW corner of the object, such as a building.
Center Point: Select this option if you would like the label anchored around the center point of the object.

Sample

As you make selections for color, font, size, and style for your labels, the sample is updated to reflect the
changes.

Clicking this button immediately applies the changes you have made to your
default settings to the labels in your current project, otherwise your settings will be applied only to future
projects.

Preferences - Default Palette

The Default Palette screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify the colors you would like to use for
the default palettes for your projects. You may specify the colors for the Contours and Terrain Contours palettes.

The selections available in the Default Palette screen are the same, regardless for which palette you are
changing the colors. Changes to your colors are palettes specific. For example, if you change the colors for your
Terrain Contours palette, you should note that the color settings of the other palettes will not be changed.

Preferences dialog - Default Palette

Note: If, during your project, you would like to change the colors for your default
palette you can do so in the Levels screen of the Graphical Options dialog.

The Default Palette for Contours dialog displays the default colors for the contours. You can double click on
a color bar to open the Color dialog where you can select an alternate color, or you can use the following
buttons to customize the palette:

208
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 7 - Output

Click this button to display the Color dialog where you can select the desired color. The new
color will be added at the end of the table.

Click this button to insert a color above the selected color.

Deletes the selected color from the custom palette.

Moves the selected color up one level in the color order.

Moves the selected color down one level in the color order.

Click on this button to restore the program default palette.

209
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

CHAPTER 8 USER INTERFACE REFERENCE

User Interface Reference

Menu Options

Menu Toolbar Buttons

Annotation Toolbar

Application Toolbar

Menu Options
The menu options available in AERMOD View are outlined in the following sections.

Menu Option - File

File (Alt, F)

New Project...: Displays the New Project dialog, where you can specify the name and location for a new
project file *.isc).
Open Project...: Displays the Open Project dialog, where you can specify an existing project file (*.isc)
to open.
Close Project: Closes the currently open project currently.
Save: Saves the current project file (*.isc) to your AERMOD View project file.

211
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Save Project As...: Displays the Save Project As dialog, allowing you to save the current project with a
different name and/or location.
Backup: Displays the following submenu options:
Save to ZIP: Allows you to backup your entire project adding all files from your project to an archive
(ZIP file). The Backup Options dialog is displayed allowing you to add any extra files you need to the
zip file.
Extract from ZIP: Extracts your project files from the archive file (ZIP file).
Import: Displays the following submenu options:
BPIP Input File...: Imports a BPIP Input File.
AERMOD Input File...: Imports an AERMOD Input File.
ISCST3 Input File...: Imports an ISCST3 Input File.
ISC-PRIME Input File...: Imports an ISC-PRIME Input File.
Repair Project...: Displays the Project Repair dialog allowing you to repair database files for a project that
may be corrupted.
Reports...: Displays the Reports dialog from where you can preview and print reports of all the input
options for the current project.
Print...: Displays the Print Preview dialog where you can preview and print the contents of the drawing
area.
Print...: Displays the Print dialog where you can print the contents of the dialog.
Preferences...: Displays the Preferences dialog, where you can specify preferences, such as company
name, modeler & model default settings.
List of Files: Displays a list of up to four of the most recently used project files
Exit: Closes the program.

Menu Option - Model

Model (Alt, M)

AERMOD: Select this menu option if you want to change to the AERMOD model. A check indicates which
model is being used.
ISCST3: Select this menu option if you want to change to the ISCST3 model. A check indicates which
model is being used.
ISC-PRIME: Select this menu option if you want to change to the ISC-PRIME model. A check indicates
which model is being used.

212
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Menu Option - View

View (Alt, V)

Overlay Control: Displays the Overlay Control dialog, where you can control which base maps and objects
are being currently displayed in the drawing area. It also controls the order in which maps and objects are
displayed.
Site Domain...: Displays the Site Domain dialog, where you can define the extents of your modeling area.
3D View...: Launches 3D View where you can visualize your project in 3D.
Application Toolbar: This turns on and off the Application Toolbar. A check indicates that the toolbar is
currently active.
Annotation Toolbar: Displays or hides the Annotation Toolbar. A check indicates that the toolbar is
currently active.
Tree View...: This turns on and off the display of the Tree View. A check indicates that the Tree View is
currently displayed.
Contour Color Ramp: This turns on and off the display of the Contour Color Ramp.
Structure Influence Zone (SIZ): Show/Hides the Structure Influence Zone. A check indicates the
Structure Influence Zone is currently displayed.
GEP 5L Area of Influence: Show/Hides the GEP 5L Area of Influence. A check indicates the GEP 5L Area
of Influence is currently displayed.
Wind Flow Vector: Displays the Wind Flow Vector dialog. A check indicates the Wind Flow Vector dialog
is currently displayed.

213
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Menu Option - Import

Import (Alt, I)

Base Maps: Displays the following submenu options -

Bitmap...: Displays the Importing Bitmap Base Map dialog.
DLG...: Displays the Importing DLG Base Map dialog.
DXF...: Displays the Importing DXF Base Map dialog.
JPEG...: Displays the Importing JPEG Base Map dialog.
LULC...: Displays the Importing LULC Base Map dialog.
MrSID...: Displays the Importing MrSID Base Map dialog.
Shapefile...: Displays the Importing ArcView Shapefile dialog.
TIFF/GeoTIFF...: Displays the Importing TIFF Base Map dialog.
Search Base Maps...: Displays the Found Georeferenced Base Maps dialog.
Blanking File: This option allows you to Import a Blanking File (*.rpb) that was created previously.
Plot Files...: Allows you to import contour plot files into your project.
Sources...: Allows you to Import Sources into your project.
Receptors...: Allows you to Import Receptors into your project.
Buildings...: Displays the following submenu options -
AutoCAD DXF...: Displays the Import Buildings from DXF dialog where you can import building
locations and dimensions from an AutoCAD DXF file.
BPIP Input File...: Allows you to import buildings from a BPIP Input File (*.bpi, *.inp) into your
project.
Elevations...: Allows you to import terrain elevations.

214
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Menu Option - Export

Export (Alt, E)

Copy to File: Displays the following sub-menu options -

Bitmap.....: Displays the Export As Bitmap dialog, allowing you to save the contents of the drawing
area as a Windows bitmap.
Metafile...: Displays the Save Enhanced Metafile dialog, allowing you to save the contents of the
drawing area as a Windows metafile.
Copy to Clipboard: Displays the following sub-menu options
Bitmap.....: Copies the contents of the drawing area to the clipboard, allowing you to paste these
contents into another windows application as a Windows bitmap.
Metafile...: Copies the contents of the drawing area to the clipboard, allowing you to paste these
contents into another windows application as a Windows metafile.
Shapefiles...: Displays the Export Layer to Shapefile dialog allowing you to select a layers to export as a
shapefiles.
Pathway to File: Allows you to save the inputs written for a specific pathway to a separate file called a
Partial Input File.
Buildings and Stacks to DXF...: Opens the Export DXF Base Map dialog allowing you to export the
buildings and stacks in the drawing area to an AutoCAD DXF.
Plotfile to Surfer...: Allows you to save your plotfiles as a *.gdr file, which can be imported into Surfer.

Menu Option - Data

Data (Alt, D)

Control Pathway...: Displays the Control Pathway dialog where you can specify the overall job control
options.

215
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Source Pathway...: Displays the Source Pathway dialog where you can specify the source input
parameters and source group information.
Receptor Pathway...: Displays the Receptor Pathway dialog where you can specify receptor information
for your project.
Meteorology Pathway...: Displays the Meteorology Pathway dialog where you can specify the input
meteorological data for your project.
Terrain Grid Pathway...: Displays the Terrain Grid Options screen where you may define the input
terrain grid data used in calculating dry depletion in elevated or complex terrain. This option is available
only for the ISCST3 and ISC-PRIME models.
Output Pathway...: Displays the Output Pathway dialog where you can specify the output options for a
particular run.
Building Inputs...: Displays the Building Inputs dialog where you specify your building parameters.
Terrain Processor...: Displays the Terrain Processor dialog where you can import and process digital
terrain elevation data into your project.

Menu Option - Run

Run (Alt, R)

Status...: Displays the following sub-menu options -

BPIP...: Displays the Project Status - BPIP dialog, which displays a summary of all the BPIP options
selected for the current project.
Model...: Displays the Project Status dialog, which displays a summary of all the model options
selected for the current project.
Details...: Displays the following sub-menu options -
BPIP...: Displays the Details dialog which lists any missing data for the current project that is required
to run the BPIP model.
Model...: Displays the Details dialog, which lists any missing data for the current project that is
required to run the selected U.S. EPA model.
View Input File: Displays the following sub-menu options -
BPIP...: Displays the BPIP Input File (*.bpi) for the current project in WordPad.
Model...: Displays the Input File for the current model using Windows WordPad.

216
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

EVENT...: Displays the EVENT Input File for the current model using Windows WordPad.
Add Comments: Displays the Add Comments to Input File dialog allowing you to specify comments for
each pathway section of the input file.
Verify Model Run: This option allows you to process the U.S. EPA model to verify the completeness of
your project, checking for any fatal errors or warning messages before running the model.
Run BPIP...: Displays the Project Status - BPIP dialog from where you can run the BPIP model.
Run Model...: Displays the Project Status dialog from where you can run the U.S. EPA model.
Run EVENT...: Runs the EVENT model.
Batcher...: Launches the AERMOD Batcher utility, which allows you to run any one of the models outside
the AERMOD View interface. Ideal for running multiple projects in an unattended mode.
Multi-Chemical Run...: Launches the Multi-Chemical Run utility which can be used to model sources
emitting multiple pollutants.

Menu Option - Risk

ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME Only

Risk (Alt, K)

Risk Mode (ON): Select this option to turn ON the Risk Mode. This allows you to specify options for
preparing input files according to the U.S. EPA Human Health and Ecological Risk Assessment Protocols.
Risk Mode (OFF): Select this option to turn OFF the Risk Mode.
Risk Grid...: Select this option if you want to define a Risk Grid according to the U.S. EPA Human Health
and Ecological Risk Assessment Protocols.
Risk Emission Phase Data...: Displays the Risk Mode - Gas & Particle Data screen where you can specify
source emission information for all the three phases (vapor, particle, and particle-bound phases) required
under the U.S. EPA OSW Human Health and Screening Level Ecological Risk Assessment Protocols (HHRAP
& SLERAP). The information specified in this dialog will not be placed in the ISCST3 input file created by
AERMOD View. This information, however, is used by Lakes "ISC Risk Generator", when creating all the
necessary files for your risk assessment project.
Run RiskGen...: This option displays the ISC Risk Generator utility. RiskGen sets up all the required
ISCST3 input files needed for your risk project following the requirements of the U.S. EPA - OSW Human
Health Risk Assessment Protocol and Screening Level Ecological Risk Assessment Protocol (HHRAP &
SLERAP).

217
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Menu Option - Output

Output (Alt, O)

Graphical Options...: This opens the Graphical Options dialog where you can customize the appearance
of your project.
Contour Clipping...: Displays the Contour Clipping dialog which allows you the option of using contour
clipping.
BPIP Output File...: Displays the BPIP Primary Output File (*.pro) for the current project in WordPad.
BPIP Summary File...: Displays the BPIP Summary File (*.sup) for the current project in WordPad.
Model Output File...: Displays the Output File for the current model using Windows WordPad. The
output file is created when you run your project.
EVENT Output File...: Displays the EVENT Output File for the current model using Windows WordPad.
This output file is created only if you have run the EVENT model.
GDEP Output File...: Displays the GDEP.DAT File produced during an AERMOD run. This output file is
created only when you run AERMOD.
PDEP Output File...: Displays the PDEP.DAT File produced during an AERMOD run. This output file is
created only when you run AERMOD.
Error Listing File...: Displays the Error Listing File for the current model using Windows WordPad. This
file is created only if you have selected the Error Listing File option in the Control Pathway and have run the
model.
Other File...: Displays the Open Text File dialog from where you can specify any text file to view using
Windows WordPad.

Menu Option - Aermap

Aermap (Alt, A)

218
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Run AERMAP...: Displays the Terrain Processor, where you can define the DEM files to be used by
AERMAP.
Source Output File...: Displays the source output file (*.sou) generated by AERMAP that contains the
source data, including source elevations.
Receptor Output File...: Displays the receptor output file (*.rou) generated by AERMAP that contains the
receptor data, including receptor elevations and height scales.
Summary File...: Displays the output message file containing an echo of the input file and a listing of any
warning or error messages generated by AERMAP.

Menu Options - Tools

Tools (Alt, T)

Move Site...: This option displays the Move Site By... dialog which allows you to shift the coordinates of
your sources, receptors, and buildings by a specified amount.
Rotate Site...: This option displays the Rotate Site By... dialog which allows you to rotate your building
from plant to true north coordinates. This tool allows you to import drawings from plant north.
Convert Grids to Discrete...: Displays the Convert Receptor Grids to Discrete Receptors dialog
where you can easily convert receptor grids into discrete receptors.
MAXTABLE Viewer...: Opens the MAXTABLE Viewer where you can view and export all the Maximum
Value Tables within your output file.
Ozone File Maker...: Displays the Ozone File Maker utility which allows you to create your own ozone files
(*.dat).
Coordinate Converter...: Displays the Coordinate Converter utility where you can convert between
geographic and projected cartesian coordinates.
Concentration Converter...: Displays the Concentration Converter utility, which allows you to modify
existing plotfiles to generate new plotfiles without having to re-run the EPA model.
MAXIFILE Converter...: Opens the MAXIFILE Converter where you can convert a MAXIFILE into a
plotfile.
Aermet View...: Launches Aermet View which preprocesses your met data for use with the AERMOD
model.
Rammet View...: Launches Rammet View which preprocesses your met data for use with the ISCST3 and
ISC-PRIME models.

219
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

WRPLOT View...: Launches WRPLOT View which generates wind rose statistics and plots of your
meteorological data.
Percent View...: Launches Percent View which generates percentile plots of a given averaging period
contained within a Post-Processing File (POSTFILE), and allows you to perform rolling averages.
POST View...: Launches POST View where you can view and customize multiple contour plots.
Browse...: Opens a Microsoft® Windows® Explorer dialog allowing you to browse through files.
Editor...: Opens Microsoft WordPad for easy access to a text editor.

Menu Option - Help

Help (Alt, H)

Contents: Displays Help Contents, from which you can select topics.
Team...: Displays information on the program development team.
Technical Support...: Displays a dialog containing available Technical Support options for the program.
Web Links...: Displays a dialog containing links to sites useful to the user.
Register for Updates...: Displays a dialog containing the link to the Product Registration screen on our
support site where you can register your software. This ensures that you will be able to download new
versions of Lakes Environmental software free of charge while in maintenance, and be notified of important
news and updates.
FAQs: Displays the Frequently Asked Questions screen on our support site using your default browser.
ISCST3 Technical Guide: Displays the ISCST3 Tech Guide using your default browser.
AERMOD Technical Guide: Displays the AERMOD Tech Guide using your default browser.
About...: Displays the copyright notice and version number for the interface.

220
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Menu Toolbar Buttons

The Menu Toolbar Buttons are shortcuts to some of the menu commands. The function of each one of these
buttons is explained below and the equivalent menu bar command is indicated:

File | New Project: Lets you create a new AERMOD View project (*.isc).

File | Open Project: Opens an existing AERMOD View project (*.isc).

File | Print: Displays the Print Preview dialog, where you can preview what will be sent to
the printer.

Run | Run Model: Displays the Project Status dialog from where you can check the status
of your project and run the model.

Data | Control Pathway: Displays the Control Pathway dialog.

Data | Source Pathway: Displays the Source Pathway dialog.

Data | Receptor Pathway: Displays the Receptor Pathway dialog.

Data | Meteorology Pathway: Displays the Meteorology Pathway dialog.

Data | Output Pathway: Displays the Output Pathway dialog.

Data | Building Inputs: Displays the Building Inputs dialog.

Data | Terrain Processor: Displays the Terrain Processor dialog.

221
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Output | Graphical Options: Displays the Graphical Options dialog.

File | Reports: Displays the Reports dialog from where you can view and print reports of all
the input data for the current project.

View | 3D View: Displays the 3D View dialog from where you can see your project in 3D.

Help | Contents: Displays the Help Contents, from where you can select topics.

222
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Annotation Toolbar
The Annotation Toolbar contains tools that allow you import base maps, manipulate what is visible on the
drawing area, zoom in on locations of interest and make annotations that enhance the appearance of your
project. The Annotation Toolbar can be moved anywhere on your screen by left-clicking your mouse and
dragging the toolbar to where you would like it. See the following sections for a description of each of these
tools.

Select Tool Arrow Annotation Tool

Zoom In Tool Web Annotation Tool

Zoom Out Tool North Arrow Annotation Tool

Pan Tool Measure Distances and Areas Tool

View Min. Extents Tool Map Import Tool

View Max. Extents Tool Site Domain Tool

Eagle Watch View Tool Map Projection Dialog

Delete Objects Tool Overlay Control Tool

Rectangle Annotation Tool Graphical Options Tool

Circle Annotation Tool Impact Tool

Polygon Annotation Tool Cross Section Tool

Text Annotation Tool Identify Tool

Marker Annotation Tool

Note: There is an option in the Preferences - General page to allow toolbar buttons to
be grouped together based on common functionality. This allows for
simplification of the Annotation Toolbar.

223
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Select Tool

With the Select tool, you can select an object from the drawing area and right-click on it to display a floating
menu from which you can perform several tasks such as move, resize, edit, delete, and label the object. The
available options in the floating menu will be dependent on the type of object being selected.

Move: Select this option if you would like to move the object to another location.
Resize: This option allows you to resize the selected object.
Edit/Add Points: If you have selected a polygonal object such as a facility or area sub process, this
option allows you to graphically edit or add one or more nodes of the object you have defined.
Delete Points: If you have selected a polygonal object such as a facility or area sub process, you can
graphically delete one or more nodes of the object you have defined.
Edit: Select this option if you would like to edit your object. Usually opens the object specific input dialog.
Delete: Deletes the selected object. You can also delete an object by selecting it with the Select tool and
pressing the Delete key.
Label: Displays or hides the label for the object. A check indicates the label is currently displayed.

Zoom In Tool

The Zoom In tool allows you to magnify a portion of the drawing area. To zoom into a portion of the drawing
area, click the Zoom In tool located on the Annotation Toolbar, move the cursor into the drawing area, holding
down the mouse left button, drag up or down on a diagonal until you cover the area you want to magnify, and
release the mouse left button.

You can also zoom in on an area of interest by clicking the left mouse button on the drawing area. The drawing
area will be magnified and re-centered on the point where the mouse cursor was clicked.

Clicking the right mouse button over the drawing area will generate a pop-up menu providing further zoom
control. The following menu options appear on this pop-up menu:

Zoom In Menu
Zoom Last: Returns the drawing area to your previous view.

224
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Minimum Extents: Zooms the drawing area to the minimum project extents as defined by model objects.
Site Domain Extents: Zooms the drawing area out to your entire site modeling area.
Cancel: Closes the pop-up menu allowing you to return to the drawing area.

Zoom Out Tool

The Zoom Out tool allows you to zoom out of a portion of the drawing area. To zoom out, click the Zoom Out
tool located on the Annotation Toolbar, move the cursor into the drawing area over the area of interest and click
the left mouse button.

Clicking the right mouse button over the drawing area will generate a pop-up menu providing further zoom
control. The following menu options appear in this pop-up menu:

Zoom Out Menu

Minimum Extents: Zooms the drawing area to the minimum project extents as defined by model objects
such as your sources and buildings.
Site Domain Extents: Zooms the drawing area out to your entire site modeling area.
Cancel: Closes the pop-up menu allowing you to return to the drawing area.

Pan Tool

The Pan tool lets you pan the view of your project easily by dragging the display in any direction with the
mouse. This is useful if you zoom in and can no longer see the entire drawing area. The Pan tool becomes
active only after you have used the Zoom In tool.

To pan, click the Pan tool located on the Annotation Toolbar and the hand cursor appears. Move the cursor
anywhere over the drawing area, press and hold down the left mouse button and drag in the desired direction.
Release the mouse button when you reach the desired display.

View Min. Extents Tool

Clicking on this tool sets your view to the minimum extents which encompasses only the objects in you modeling
area such as your point and area sources.

View Max. Extents Tool

Clicking on this tool sets your view to the maximum extents as defined by model objects (i.e. point and area
sources) and all other layers in your modeling project (i.e. base maps).

Eagle Watch View Tool

The Eagle Watch View tool displays a small window showing the full extents of your modeling domain with a red
rectangle marking the area that is currently being showed in the main graphical area. This tool can be especially
useful as it allows you to zoom into an area in context with the entire modeling domain.

225
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

How to Use the Eagle Watch Tool:

1: Click the Eagle Watch View tool located on the Annotation Toolbar to open the Eagle Watch View dialog,
which displays a preview of your modeling site.

2: Using the mouse, left-click to draw a red box around the area you wish to preview. Notice that when you
release the mouse button, the selected area will be displayed in the drawing area of the main interface.

Eagle Watch View Window

3: When the desired area is displayed in the drawing area, click the red close button on the top right corner of
the Eagle Watch View dialog.

Delete Objects

The Delete tool can be used to delete or remove an object from the drawing area. Click the Delete tool located
on the Annotation Toolbar and then click the desired object to be deleted. A message box appears requesting
confirmation that you want to delete the selected object.

When selecting multiple objects, click and drag a box around the objects you wish to delete. The Delete
Objects dialog appears listing all the objects that have been specified for deletion. A check box can be found
beside each object allowing you to uncheck any objects in the list that you may not want to be deleted.

Delete Objects dialog

226
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Button Guide

You can easily check or uncheck items from the list using the buttons located at the bottom of the dialog.

Select All: Selects all items in the list.

Unselect All: Unselects all items in the list.

Check Selected: Checks all currently selected items.

Uncheck Selected: Unchecks all currently selected items.

Rectangle Annotation

The Rectangle Annotation tool is used to draw rectangles on the drawing area.

How to Draw a Rectangle on the Drawing Area:

1: Click the Rectangle Annotation tool located on the Annotation Toolbar.

2: Click the left mouse button on the drawing area in the location where you want to place one of the corners
of the rectangle. Holding down the left mouse button, draw a rectangle on the drawing area by dragging
the mouse up or down on a diagonal. Release the left mouse button. The Rectangle Annotation dialog is
displayed.

Rectangle Annotation dialog

3: The X and Y coordinates of the SW corner of the rectangle, as well as the width and height of the rectangle
is displayed in the Geometry panel. You can change these values at any time if you desire.

4: In the Colors and Styles panel, choose the color and width for the line, the fill color and style of the
rectangle and click the OK button.

5: The rectangle is placed on the drawing area in the location and style you have previously selected.

Circle Annotation

The Circle Annotation tool is used to draw circles on the drawing area.

227
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

How to Draw a Circle on the Drawing Area:

1: Click the Circle Annotation tool located on the Annotation Toolbar.

2: Click the left mouse button on the drawing area in the location where you want to place the circle. Holding
down the left mouse button, draw a circle on the drawing area by dragging the mouse. Release the left
mouse button when you have reached the desired circle size. The Circle Annotation dialog is displayed.

Circle Annotation dialog

3: The X and Y coordinates of the origin of the circle as well as the radius of the circle is displayed. You can
change these values at any time.

4: Choose the color for the line, the line width, the fill color and style of the circle and click the OK button.

5: The circle is placed on the drawing area in the location and style you have selected.

Polygon Annotation

The Polygon Annotation tool is used to draw rectangles on the drawing area.

How to Draw a Polygon on the Drawing Area:

1: Click the Polygon Annotation tool located on the Annotation Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the location for one of the corners of the polygon.
Release the left mouse button. Drag the mouse pointer to the location of the next (adjacent) corner and
click the left mouse button. Follow this procedure until you digitize all corners. To close the polygon, left-
click with the mouse pointer inside the small box that marks the starting corner, or click the right mouse
button. The Polygon Annotation dialog is displayed.

Polygon Annotation dialog

228
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

3: In the Colors and Styles panel, choose the color and width for the line, the fill color and style of the
polygon and click the OK button.

4: The polygon is placed on the drawing area in the location and style you have previously selected.

Text Annotation

The Text Annotation tool is used to write text on the drawing area. This allows you to add more information
to your printouts.

How to Write Text on the Drawing Area:

1: Click the Text Annotation tool located on the Annotation Toolbar.

2: Click the left mouse button on the drawing area where you want the beginning of the text to be placed. The
Text Annotation dialog is displayed.

Text Annotation dialog

3: Type the text in the dialog and click the Font button if you want to select different font options such as
type, style, size, and color. If desired, check the Background Color box to change the background color
of the text. You can click the color bar to open the Color dialog where you can select a color of your choice.

4: Click the OK button. The text is placed on the drawing area in the location you have previously selected.

Marker Annotation

The Marker Annotation tool is used to draw markers on the drawing area.

How to Draw Markers on the Drawing Area:

1: Click the Marker Annotation tool on the Annotation Toolbar.

2: Click the left mouse button on the drawing area, where you want the marker to be placed. The Marker
Annotation dialog is displayed.

3: The X and Y coordinates of the marker are displayed in the Location panel. You can change these values
at any time if you desire. Select the marker style, color and size, and the outline color if desired and click
the OK button.

229
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Marker Annotation dialog

4: The marker is placed on the drawing area in the location you have previously selected.

Arrow Annotation

The Arrow Annotation tool is used to draw arrows or lines on the drawing area.

How to Draw Arrows and Lines on the Drawing Area:

1: Click the Arrow Annotation tool located on the Annotation Toolbar.

2: Click the left mouse button on the drawing area in the location where the arrow head should start. Holding
down the left mouse button, draw a line on the drawing area. Release the left mouse button. The Arrow
Annotation dialog is displayed.

Arrow Annotation dialog

3: Change the angle, the line color, style and width, and select if you want the arrow head to be displayed.
Click the OK button.

4: The arrow or line is placed on the drawing area in the location and direction you have previously selected.

Web Annotation Tool

The Web Annotation tool allows you to draw a polar grid with the option to specify rings, rays, and labels at
specific distances for annotation purposes only. This annotation tool can be especially useful when used as a
scaling tool for graphical visualization of the modeling area and its dimensions.

How to Draw a Web Annotation on the Drawing Area:

1: Click the Web Annotation tool located on the Annotation Toolbar.

230
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

2: Click the left mouse button on the drawing area in the location where you want the center point of the web
annotation to originate from. Holding down the left mouse button, draw a circle on the drawing area by
dragging the mouse. Release the left mouse button when you have reached the desired web annotation
size. The Web Annotation dialog is displayed.

Web Annotation dialog

3: The following web annotation parameters can be changed in the Web Annotation dialog:

Center Point
Coordinate X: Specify the X Coordinate for the center point of your web annotation.
Coordinate Y: Specify the Y Coordinate for the center point of your web annotation.

Ring Parameters
Number of Rings: Specify the number of rings you would like displayed in the web annotation.
Distance Between Rings: Specify the distance between each ring displayed in the web annotation.

Ring Labels
Default: Click on this button to return to all of the default Ring Label settings.
Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.
Size: Select a font size from the drop-down list.
Style: Select a font style from the drop-down list.
Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select a color for the labels.
Label Location
At Angle [deg]: Specify the angle location where you want the ring label displayed.
Units of Measure: Specify the measurement unit for the ring label. The unit of measure must be
the same as the one specified in the drawing area (e.g., meters for UTM coordinates, degrees for
geographic coordinates).

Line Options
Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog where you can select the color for the lines in the
web annotation.

231
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Style: Select a line style from the drop-down list.

Width: Specify the thickness of the lines in the web annotation.

Ray Parameters

Number of Rays: Specify the number of rays you would like displayed in the web annotation.

Note: If you specify 4 rays, your web annotation will be divided into 8 sectors.

Ray Labels
Default: Click on this button to return to all of the default Ray Label settings.
Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.
Size: Select a font size from the drop-down list.
Style: Select a font style from the drop-down list.
Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select a color for the labels.
Label Location
At Ring Number: Select this option if you want the label to be placed on a specific ring.
Distance from Center Point: Select this option if you want to specify the distance from the
center point of the ray where you want the ray label displayed.

4: Once you have finished defining the parameters of your web annotation, click OK. The following is an
example of how your drawing area will appear now that you have generated a web annotation.

Web Annotation Preview

232
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

North Arrow Annotation

The North Arrow Annotation tool allows you to indicate the orientation of your modeling domain.

How to Draw a North Arrow on the Drawing Area:

1: Click the North Arrow Annotation tool located on the Annotation Toolbar.

2: Click the left mouse button on the drawing area in the location where you want to place the north arrow
annotation. The North Arrow Manager dialog is displayed:

North Arrow Manager dialog

3: From this dialog you have the option to select the arrow style, orientation, text style and size of the north
arrow.

4: Click the OK button. The north arrow is placed on the drawing area in the location you have previously
selected.

Measure Distances and Areas Tool

This tool allows you to measure both distances and areas.

How to Measure Distances:

To measure distances or the length of objects, simply click the start point where you wish to measure from and
drag the cursor to the end point. A line will be formed showing what you are measuring and a length readout
will appear on the status bar in the lower left corner of the window. The units of measurement are meters. Right
click or press the Esc button to cancel or terminate the operation.

233
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

How to Measure Areas:

To measure areas, left-click with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the location for one of the corners of
the polygon area. Release the left mouse button. Drag the mouse pointer to the location of the next (adjacent)
corner and click the left mouse button. Follow this procedure until you digitize all corners. To close the polygon,
left-click with the mouse pointer inside the small box that marks the starting corner. A perimeter and area
readout will appear on the status bar. The units of measurement are in square meters. Right click or press the
Esc button to cancel or terminate the operation.

Map Import

Use the Map Import tool located on the Annotation Toolbar to import one or more base maps to be displayed
in the drawing area. You can import:

Bitmap, JPEG, TIFF/GeoTIFF and MrSID Base Maps

DLG Base Maps
DXF Base Maps
LULC Base Maps
ArcView Shapefiles

Importing Bitmap, JPEG, TIFF and MrSID Images

You can import graphical images to be used as base maps. These formats of graphics do not contain information
on the site coordinates and extents of the image. However, you will be prompted for this information. If your
image file has a world file associated with it, and is in the same directory as you image file, then the information
in the world file will be used and you will not be prompted for site coordinates and extents.

How to Import Bitmap, JPEG, TIFF and MrSID Base Maps:

1: Select Import | Base Maps | BMP..., JPEG..., TIFF.... or MrSID... from the menu or click the Map
Import tool ( ) located on the Annotation Toolbar. A floating menu is displayed. Select either BMP...,
JPEG..., TIFF/GeoTIFF.... or MrSID... from the menu. The Import Base Map dialog is displayed.

2: Enter the name and path for the base map file (*.BMP, *.JPG, *.TIF or *.SID ) and click the OK button. The
Define Map Extents dialog is displayed containing the image you have imported.

234
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Define Map Extents dialog

3: Click the Zoom In tool to select the Zoom In option. Your mouse pointer changes to a magnifying glass.
Click the location you want to zoom in. Click as many times as necessary, until you are at the desired
magnification. To go back to the original size, right click the image and select Zoom Out from the floating
menu. You can also use the Zoom Out tool.

4: Click the 1st Point button and then click the image where the location of your first point is. The Location
dialog appears asking you to input the X and Y coordinates for the first point. Repeat this for the second
point, by clicking on the 2nd Point button. Note that a yellow cross defines the location of your first point
and a green cross defines the location of your second point. The specified coordinates for these two points
are displayed in a text boxes on the right hand side of the dialog below the 1st Point button and the 2nd
Point button respectively. You can adjust the displayed coordinates at any time.

Location dialog

5: The Transparent Color option allows you to select a color in the bitmap that will be transparent when
displayed in the drawing area. This option is usually used for black and white bitmaps, making the white
portion of the map transparent. You can, however, click the color bar to display the Color dialog from
where you can select the color to make transparent.

6: After defining the two points, Click the OK button. The imported image will be displayed as an overlay on
the drawing area using the coordinates of the two points you have specified.

Importing DLG Base Maps

Digital Line Graph (DLG) is line map information in digital form produced by the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS).
DLG files include information on planimetric base categories, such as transportation, hydrography, and
boundaries.

235
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

How to Import DLG Base Maps:

1: Select Import | Base Map | DLG... from the menu or click the Map Import tool ( ) located on the
Annotation Toolbar. A floating menu is displayed. Select DLG... from the menu. The Import DLG Base
Map dialog is displayed.

2: Enter the name and path for the DLG base map file (*.DLG) and click the OK button.

3: The base map you selected will be placed as an overlay on the drawing area.

DLG Base Map

Note: It is important to note that the extents of the imported base map should be
within the site/project domain area. Your base map will be placed on the same
coordinates defined in your map file. If the extents of the base map are outside
the defined site/project domain, then this base map will not be displayed on the
drawing area.

Importing DXF Base Maps

For easy reference and visualization of your results, you can import one or more digitized base maps for the area
you are modeling. The function of the base map is to place the modeling results in context with the area to be
modeled. The DXF (Drawing Interchange Format) file is a standard format for exchanging data between CAD
systems. For instance, you can use AutoCAD software to convert your base map into the DXF format.

Note: The Import DXF Base Map utility can only read DXF objects that are
consistent with the DXF Release 12 or earlier format. If your AutoCAD DXF file
was created in a more recent release than R12, please re-save it as an R12 file
before you attempt to import the file.

How to Import DXF Base Maps:

1: Select Import | Base Map | DXF... from the menu or click the Map Import tool ( ) located on the
Annotation Toolbar. A floating menu is displayed. Select DXF... from the menu. The Import DXF Base
Map dialog is displayed.

236
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Import DXF Base Map dialog

The Import DXF Base Map dialog provides you with detailed control over the import of DXF files. Options
available in this dialog include:

DXF File Name: Clicking on the Specify File ( ) button allows you to specify the name and location
of the DXF file you wish to import.
Preview: The Preview window shows a preview of the DXF base map that has been specified. The
axes of the preview area update automatically to the coordinates contained in the DXF base map.
Unit Conversion: This section allows you to option of converting the existing units of the DXF base
map. For the unit conversion, three options are available:
o No Conversion: This is the default option used and the DXF will be imported without any
conversions.
o Feet To Meters: Will scale the DXF file by a factor of 0.3048, the equivalent conversion of feet to
meters.
o Custom: Allows you to specify a custom conversion factor to be applied to the DXF drawing.

Note: It is important to note that the extents of the imported base map should be
within the site/project domain area. Your base map will be placed on the same
coordinates defined in your map file. If the extents of the base map are outside
the defined site/project domain, then this base map will not be displayed on the
drawing area.

Specify Layers to Import: Enables you to specify a particular layer from the DXF be imported rather
than all of the layers contained in the entire DXF. The default option imports all layers. After making a
layer selection you may wish to click the Update Preview button, which will visually show you in the
Preview window what layers you are importing.

2: After specifying any import options, click the OK button to import the DXF into your project. Your DXF base
map will be placed as an overlay on the drawing area.

Note: The following objects are recognized from DXF files imported into your
project:
Lines and Poly lines Text
Point Objects Circle
Solid Face3D
Arc

237
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Importing LULC Base Maps

You can import Land Use and Land Cover (LULC) digital data to be used as base maps.

How to Import LULC Base Maps

1: Select Import | Base Map | LULC... from the menu or click the Map Import tool ( ) located on the
Annotation Toolbar. A floating menu is displayed. Select LULC... from the menu. The Import LULC Base
Map dialog is displayed.

2: Enter the name and path for the LULC base map file (*.LUC) and click the OK button.

3: The base map you selected will be placed as an overlay on the drawing area.

LULC Base Map

Note: It is important to note that the extents of the imported base map should be
within the site/project domain area. Your base map will be placed on the same
coordinates defined in your map file. If the extents of the base map are outside
the defined site/project domain, then this base map will not be displayed on the
drawing area.

Land Use and Land Cover digital data provide information on nine major classes of land use such as urban,
agricultural, or forest. Land Use and Land Cover data compilation is based upon the classification system and
definitions of Level II Land Use and Land Cover. See the table on the next page.

238
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Table 1: Common USGS Land Cover Classification Categories

Code Subcode
10 Urban or Built-Up 11 Residential
Land 12 Commercial and Services
13 Industrial
14 Transportation, Communications and Utilities

15 Industrial and Commercial Complexes

16 Mixed Urban or Built-Up Land

17 Other Urban or Built-Up Land
20 Agricultural Land – 21 Cropland and Pasture
Unirrigated 22 Orchards, Groves, Vineyards, Nurseries and Ornamental Horticultural
Areas
23 Confined Feeding Operations
24 Other Agricultural
- Agricultural Land – -21 Cropland and Pasture
20 Irrigated -22 Orchards, Groves, Vineyards, Nurseries and Ornamental Horticultural
Areas

-23 Confined Feeding Operations

-24 Other Agricultural
30 Rangeland 31 Herbaceous Rangeland
32 Shrub and Brush Rangeland
33 Mixed Rangeland
40 Forest Land 41 Deciduous Forest
42 Evergreen Forest
43 Mixed Forest
50 Water 51 Streams and Canals
52 Lakes
53 Reservoirs
54 Bays and Estuaries
55 Oceans and Seas
60 Wetland 61 Forested Wetland
62 Nonforested Wetland
70 Barren Land 71 Dry Salt Flats
72 Beaches
73 Sandy Areas other than Beaches
74 Bare Exposed Rock
75 Strip Mines, Quarries and Gravel Pits
76 Transitional Areas
77 Mixed Barren Land
80 Tundra 81 Shrub and Brush Tundra
82 Herbaceous Tundra
83 Bare Ground
84 Wet Tundra
85 Mixed Tundra
90 Perennial Snow and 91 Perennial Snowfields
Ice 92 Glaciers

239
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Importing ArcView Shapefiles

ArcView shapefiles store the geometric location and attribute information of geographic features.

How to Import ArcView Shapefiles:

1: Select Import | Base Maps | Shapefile from the menu or click the Map Import tool ( ) located on the
Annotation Toolbar. A floating menu is displayed. Select Shapefile... from the menu. The Import
ArcView Shapefile dialog is displayed.

Import ArcView Shapefile dialog

2: Click the Specify File ( ) button and specify the name and location of the shapefile (*.shp) you want to
import. The Preview area displays the shapefile to be imported. The axes of the preview area update
automatically to the coordinates contained in the shapefile.

3: The following graphical properties are available for you to customize the display of your shapefile:
Color Mapping: You have two options in this panel -
Color Uniform: This option is the default. If this option is selected, then your shapefile will be
imported in the fixed color you have selected. Click the color bar to display the Color dialog where
you can select a color of your choice.
Color by Attribute: This option allows you to select one of the shapefile’s attributes as the color
scheme. For example, suppose you have an attribute called LUCODE for your shapefile, which
contains land use features such as residential areas, industrial areas, water and agricultural land
following the Land Use and Land Cover classification system. If you select this attribute from the
drop-down list, then random colors will be assigned for each geographic feature. This means that
all the residential area will be in one color, the industrial areas in another color, and so on. Click
the button to display the Custom Attribute Colors dialog from where you can
define colors for each attribute class.
Style: In this panel you can customize the style of your shapefile. From the Style drop down list you
can select a style to apply to the shapefile. If you would like to display the outlines of the shapefile,
check the Outline box. The color bar becomes active which you can click on to display the Color dialog
from where you can select a color for the outline.
4: Click the OK button to import your shapefile.

240
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Site Domain

In the Site Domain dialog you define the domain extents of your modeling area. Initially, your domain extents
are automatically setup but you can change the size of the initial domain at any time.

You have access to the Site Domain dialog by selecting View | Site Domain... from the menu or by clicking
the Site Domain tool located on the Annotation Toolbar. In the Site Domain dialog, you can redefine the
domain extents of your project area.

The Site Domain dialog contains the following options:

Site Domain tab: Specify the X and Y coordinates for the southwest (SW) corner and the northeast (NE)
corner of your domain and/or enter the width and height of your domain.

Site Domain tab

Layer Diagnostics tab: This tab is available to help you identify potential problems with the locations of
your modeling objects. All objects that are used in the modeling are assigned a layer in the domain. For
example, a project containing sites and emission release points will contain two layers in the Layer
Diagnostics tab.

Layer Diagnostics tab

If one of the layers contains objects that are located far away from the rest of the modeling objects, it will
be highlighted in blue in the table. This could result from one set of objects being entered in UTM
coordinates while another set is entered in Cartesian coordinates. If the extents of a particular layer seems
too large it will be highlighted in red. You can zoom to a layer by selecting a layer and then clicking on the
Zoom to Layer ( ) button.

Import Base Maps: You can import base maps in various file formats. To import a base map, click the
Open button to display a floating menu from which you can select the type of base map to import. The
imported files are displayed in a list box. To display a base map, select the desired base map and check the
box. The base map will be displayed in the Preview panel. At any time you may uncheck this box to turn
off the display of the base map.

241
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Import Base Maps panel

Preview Panel: The Preview panel provides you with a preview of what your drawing area will look like.

Preview panel

If you have imported a base map and it is displayed in the Preview panel you can do one of the following:

Use the outer extents of the imported base maps as your domain extents. To select this option, click
the Set Site Domain to Maximum Extents button.
Use the Choose Extents tool located below the Preview area to graphically select your domain
extents. Click the Choose Extents tool and, holding down the left mouse button, draw a rectangle on
the preview area to define your domain area. Release the left mouse button. Note that the selected
domain area is represented by a grey dotted box. The coordinates for the selected domain area are
displayed in the Site Domain tab.

An explanation of all the tools found in the Preview panel is available below:

Zoom In tool: Allows you to zoom in on a selected region in the preview area.

Zoom Out tool: Allows you to zoom out in the preview area. Right-clicking displays a pop-up
menu with additional zoom options.

Expand tool: Increases the preview area.

Shrink tool: Decreases the preview area.

242
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Choose Extents tool: Gives you the ability to graphically define your view. Holding down the
left mouse button, draw a rectangle on the preview area to define your domain area extents.
Release the left mouse button.

Set Site Domain to Minimum Extents: This button sets the site domain extents to encompass only the
modeling objects (i.e. point sources, release points) in the open project.

Set Site Domain to Maximum Extents: This button sets the site domain extents to encompass all the
modeling objects in the project as well as any base maps that are available.

Overlay Control Tool

From time to time, during your project, you may wish to remove some objects/overlays from the drawing area.
For example, you can view or print only the desired objects in your drawing area. From the Overlay Control
dialog, you can specify which objects should be displayed or not on the drawing area.

Note: You also have access to the options available in the Overlay Control dialog
through the Tree View - Overlays tab.

How to Turn On or Off the Display of Overlays:

1: Click the Overlay Control tool located on the Annotation Toolbar or select View | Overlay Control from
the menu. The Overlay Control dialog is displayed.

Overlay Control dialog

2: All the objects defined in your project are listed in this dialog. The checked/unchecked boxes indicates if the
object is being displayed or not in the drawing area. You can easily turn on or off the display of these
objects using the buttons located at the bottom of the dialog.

Button Guide

You can easily check or uncheck items from the list using the buttons located at the bottom of the dialog.

Select All: Use this button to select all of the layers listed.

243
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Unselect All: Use this button to unselect all of the layers listed.

Check Selected: Use this button to make all selected layers active.

Uncheck Selected: Use this button to make all selected layers inactive.

Move Down: Use this button to move the selected layer down a level.

Move Up: Use this button to move the selected layer up a level.

Delete Selected: Use this button to delete the selected layers. You can only delete the layers containing
base maps.

You can display the list of layers in different ways. You can show only the active overlays by selecting Active
Overlays, or show only the inactive overlays by selecting Inactive Overlays.

Graphical Options

The Graphical Options dialog contains options to enhance the appearance of your project. Within the
Graphical Options dialog you can define options such as contour levels, shading, contour line thickness and
color, and labels. The Graphical Options dialog is described fully in Chapter 7.

Impact Tool

The Impact tool allows you to draw a radius of impact, outside of which there are no concentration/deposition
values that are greater than a specified threshold value. This tool would be useful from a regulatory standpoint,
as a "radius of impact" could be drawn on the contour plots for areas of concern such as a school.

How to Use the Impact Tool:

1: Click the Impact tool ( ) located on the Annotation Toolbar.

2: Click the left mouse button on the drawing area in the location where you want the center of the radius to
be located. The Impact Tool Options dialog is displayed.

244
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Impact Tool Options dialog

3: The X and Y coordinates of the reference point is displayed. You can change these values at any time if you
desire. Alternatively, you may select from the Sources drop-down list a source to be considered as the
reference point. This drop-down list contains all the sources defined in your current project and also
provides an All Sources option, which is the centroid all sources.

4: In the Threshold Value panel, specify a threshold value.

5: Choose the color for the line, the line style and width and click the OK button.

6: The impact radius will be placed on the drawing area for the location, threshold value and style you have
selected.

245
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Note: In certain cases the threshold value provided will result in a radius that extends
to the farthest discrete receptor in your project. This does not necessarily mean
in this case that any concentration/deposition values outside radius of impact is
less than a specified threshold value as there are no receptors beyond this radius
to detect values. We recommend you add receptors or extend your receptor
grid, re-run your project and then use the impact tool to determine whether the
radius of impact will change or remain the same.

Cross Section Tool

The Cross Section tool is used to graphically define a line segment within the modeling domain, in order to
view available data for the points on that line. Available data includes terrain elevations and concentration
results, and can be displayed in either a table or graph format.

How to Define a Line Segment:

1: Click the Cross Section tool located on the Annotation Toolbar.

2: Click the left mouse button on the drawing area at the location for one end of the cross section line. Drag
the mouse pointer to the end point of the cross section line and click the left mouse button. The Cross
Section Tool dialog is displayed.

246
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Cross Section Tool dialog

3: From the Select Scene drop-down list, select the scene you want (e.g. model results, terrain elevations)
and click the Apply ( ) button. The results will be displayed below as a table (Table tab) or graph
(Graph tab).

4: In order to see different views of the data, in the Parameters section you can change the following
parameters:

X1, X2, Y1, Y2: Change the length/location of the cross section by editing the X1, X2, Y1, and Y2
fields
Interval (m): Change the interval of data points along the cross section.
Points: Change the number of points along the cross section.

After each change, click the Apply ( ) button. The table or graph will display the updated data.

Button Guide

The following controls are available on the bottom of the dialog:

If you are viewing the results as a table:

Export: Clicking on the Export ( ) button allows you to export the displayed data to a comma-delimited
file (.csv).

If you are viewing the results as a graph:

Use Scientific Notation for Y Axis: Check this box if you want the labels on the graph's Y axis to be
written in scientific notation.

Export: Clicking on the Export ( ) button allows you to export the displayed data to a comma-delimited
file (.csv).

247
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Print: Clicking on the Print ( ) button opens the Print dialog which allows you to select options to print
your graph.

Options: Clicking on the Graph ( ) button opens the Graph Options dialog, which allows you to select
various display options for your graph. You can also enhance the appearance of your graph by clicking the
right mouse button anywhere within the graph and choosing any one of the available Graph Menu Options.

Identify Tool

The Identify tool allows you to obtain information about objects in the drawing area. Click the Identify tool
( ) located on the Annotation Toolbar and select an object in the drawing area. The object will be surrounded
by a grey outline and a popup text box will appear containing information about the selected object.

248
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Application Toolbar
The tools available in the Application Toolbar allow you to graphically define the location of project objects
such as your sources, receptors, buildings and plant boundary. If you have imported a base map into the
drawing area, the digitization of objects will be very easy. The Application Toolbar can be moved anywhere
on your screen by left-clicking your mouse and dragging the toolbar to a new location and you can turn on and
off the display of the Application Toolbar in the View Menu. See the following sections for a description of each
of these tools.

Point Source Tool Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid Tool

Flare Source Tool Uniform Polar Grid Tool

Area Source Tool Non-Uniform Polar Grid Tool

Angled Area Source Tool Nested Grid Receptors Tool

Open Pit Source Tool Plant Boundary Tool

Volume Source Tool Elevations/Flagpole Heights Tool

Circular Area Source Tool Rectangular Building Tool

Polygon Area Source Tool Angled Rectangular Building Tool

Line Source Tool Circular Building Tool

Discrete Cartesian Receptor Tool Polygonal Building Tool

Discrete Polar Receptor Tool Show/Hide Structure of Influence Zone

(SIZ) Tool

Discrete Cartesian Receptor (ARC) Tool Show/Hide GEP 5L Area of Influence Tool

Uniform Cartesian Grid Tool

Note: There is an option in the Preferences - General screen to allow toolbar buttons to
be grouped together based on common functionality. This allows for
simplification of the Application Toolbar.

249
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Point Source Tool

The Point Source tool allows you to graphically define the location of a point source on the drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Point Source:

1: Click the Point Source tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the desired location of the point source. Note that as
you move the mouse the current coordinates are displayed on the status bar.

3: The Source Inputs dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust the coordinates, if necessary, and define
additional point source information.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the OK button. A marker ( ) will be placed at
the selected location for the point source.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular source, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired source, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Source
Inputs dialog will be displayed.

Flare Source Tool

The Flare Source tool allows you to graphically define the location of a flare source on the drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Flare Source:

1: Click the Flare Source tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the desired location of the flare source. Note that as
you move the mouse the current coordinates are displayed on the status bar.

3: The Source Inputs dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust the coordinates, if necessary, and define
additional flare source information.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button. A marker ( ) will be placed
at the selected location for the flare source.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular source, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired source, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Source
Inputs dialog will be displayed.

250
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Area Source Tool

The Area Source tool allows you to graphically define the location of an area source on the drawing area.

How to Graphically Define an Area Source:

1: Click the Area Source tool located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Position the mouse pointer where one corner of the area source is located and left click. Drag the mouse at
any angle you wish to the next corner of the area source and left click. You can then left drag up or down
and left click when you reach the desired size of your area source. Note that as you move the mouse the
current angle and coordinates are displayed on the status bar.

3: The Source Inputs dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust the coordinates, if necessary, and define
additional area source information.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the OK button. A representation of the area
source ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area at the specified location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular source, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired source, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Source
Inputs dialog will be displayed.

Angled Area Source Tool

The Angle Area Source tool allows you to graphically define the location of an area source on the drawing
area that is at an angle.

How to Graphically Define an Angled Area Source:

1: Click the Angled Area Source tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Click at the location where the first corner of the area source is located. Then click at the second corner.
Drag up or down on a diagonal, until you reach the desired size and shape, then click to finalize the shape.
Note that as you move the mouse the current coordinates are displayed on the status bar.

3: The Source Inputs dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust the coordinates, if necessary, and define
additional area source parameters.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button. A representation of the area
source ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area with the specified dimension and location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular source, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired source, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Source
Inputs dialog will be displayed.

251
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Open Pit Source Tool

The Open Pit Source tool allows you to graphically define the location of an open pit source on the drawing
area.

How to Graphically Define an Open Pit Source:

1: Click the Open Pit Source tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Position the mouse pointer where one corner of the open pit source is located. Holding down the mouse
left button, drag up or down on a diagonal, until you reach the desired size and shape. Note that as you
move the mouse the current coordinates are displayed on the status bar.

3: The Source Inputs dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust the coordinates, if necessary, and define
additional open pit source information.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button. A representation of the open

pit source ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area with the specified dimension and location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular source, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired source, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Source
Inputs dialog will be displayed.

Volume Source Tool

The Volume Source tool allows you to graphically define the location of a volume source on the drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Volume Source:

1: Click the Volume Source tool located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Position the mouse pointer where one corner of the volume source is located and left click. Drag the mouse
at any angle you wish to the next corner of the volume source and left click. You can then left drag up or
down and left click when you reach the desired size of your volume source. Note that as you move the
mouse the current angle and coordinates are displayed on the status bar.

3: The Source Inputs dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust the coordinates, if necessary, and define
additional volume source information.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the OK button. A representation of the volume
source ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area with the specified dimension and location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular source, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired source, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Source
Inputs dialog will be displayed.

252
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Circular Area Source Tool

The Circular Area Source tool allows you to graphically define the location of an circular area source on the
drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Circular Area Source:

1: Click the Circular Area Source tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Position the mouse pointer on the drawing area, where the center of the circular area source is located.
Holding down the left mouse button, drag until you reach the desired size. As you drag with the mouse,
the current radius of the circle being drawn and the coordinates of the center of the circular area source are
displayed on the status bar. When you have reached the desired size release the left mouse button.

3: The Source Inputs dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust the coordinates, if necessary, and define
additional circular area source information.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button. A representation of the
circular area source ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area with the specified dimension and location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular source, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired source, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Source
Inputs dialog will be displayed.

Polygon Area Source Tool

The Polygon Area Source tool allows you to graphically define the location of an polygon area source on the
drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Polygon Area Source:

1: Click the Polygon Area Source tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the location for one of the corners of the polygon
area source. Release the left mouse button. Drag the mouse pointer to the location of the next (adjacent)
corner and click the left mouse button. Follow this procedure until you digitize all corners. To close the
polygon, left-click with the mouse pointer inside the small box that marks the starting corner, or click the
right mouse button.

3: The Source Inputs dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust the coordinates, if necessary, and define
additional polygon area source information.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button. A representation of the
polygon area source ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area at the specified location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular source, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired source, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Source
Inputs dialog will be displayed.
dialog will be displayed.

253
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Line Source Tool

The Line Source tool allows you to graphically define the location of a line source on the drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Line Source:

1: Click the Line Source tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, at the location for one end of the line source. Drag
the mouse pointer to the location of the end of the line and release the left mouse button. Continue to
create line segments as needed. When you are finished, click the right mouse button.

3: The Source Inputs dialog is displayed, allowing you to adjust the coordinates, if necessary, and define
additional source information.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the OK button. A representation of the line
source ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area at the specified location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular source, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired source, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Source
Inputs dialog will be displayed.

Discrete Cartesian Receptor Tool

The Discrete Cartesian Receptor tool allows you to graphically define the location of discrete Cartesian
receptors.

How to Graphically Define a Discrete Cartesian Receptor:

1: Select the Discrete Cartesian Receptor tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the desired location for the discrete Cartesian
receptor. To graphically define multiple discrete Cartesian receptors at once, keep the Shift key pressed
down while you click with the left mouse button. When defining the last receptor, release the Shift key.

3: The Discrete Cartesian Receptors dialog is displayed allowing you to adjust the coordinates if necessary, and
to define additional receptor information.

4: When you finish entering all the required information click the Close button. A cross marker ( ) will be
placed at the selected location for the discrete Cartesian receptor.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular receptor click the
Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired receptor, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Discrete
Cartesian Receptors dialog will be displayed.

254
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Discrete Polar Receptor Tool

The Discrete Polar Receptor tool allows you to graphically define the location of discrete polar receptors.

How to Graphically Define a Discrete Polar Receptor:

1: Select the Discrete Polar Receptor tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the desired location for the discrete polar receptor.
To graphically define multiple discrete polar receptors at once, keep the Shift key pressed down while you
click with the left mouse button. When defining the last receptor, release the Shift key.

3: The Select Reference Source for Polar Receptor dialog is displayed where you must select the
reference source for the polar receptor. Select the desired source from the drop-down list. Click the OK
button.

4: The Discrete Polar Receptors dialog is displayed allowing you to adjust the coordinates if necessary, and to
define additional receptor information.

5: When you finish entering all the required information click the Close button. A cross marker ( )
will be placed at the selected location for the receptor with a dashed line attaching the receptor to the
reference source.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular receptor click the
Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired receptor, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Discrete
Polar Receptors dialog will be displayed.

Discrete Cartesian Receptor (ARC) Tool

AERMOD Only The Discrete Cartesian Receptor (ARC) tool allows you to graphically define the location of
discrete Cartesian ARC receptors.

How to Graphically Define a Discrete Cartesian Receptor (ARC):

1: Select the Discrete Cartesian Receptor (ARC) tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the desired location for the receptor. To graphically
define multiple receptors at once, keep the Shift key pressed down while you click with the left mouse
button. When defining the last receptor, release the Shift key.

3: The Discrete ARC Receptors dialog is displayed allowing you to adjust the coordinates if necessary, and to
define additional receptor information.

4: When you finish entering all the required information click the Close button. A cross marker ( ) will be
placed at the selected location for the receptor.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular receptor click the
Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired receptor, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Discrete
ARC Receptors dialog will be displayed.

255
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Uniform Cartesian Grid Tool

The Uniform Cartesian Grid tool allows you to graphically define the location of a uniform Cartesian receptor
grid on the drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Uniform Cartesian Receptor Grid:

1: Select the Uniform Cartesian Grid tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the desired location for one of the grid corners.
Holding down the left mouse button drag the mouse pointer diagonally until you reach the desired grid
size. Release the left mouse button.

3: The Uniform Cartesian Grid dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust if necessary the origin coordinates,
number of X and Y points, and spacing.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button. A representation of the
uniform Cartesian grid ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area at the specified location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular grid click the
Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired grid, click the
right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Uniform
Cartesian Grid dialog will be displayed.

Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid Tool

The Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid tool allows you to graphically define the location of a non-uniform Cartesian
receptor grid on the drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid:

1: Select the Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the desired location for one of the grid corners.
Holding down the left mouse button drag the mouse pointer diagonally until you reach the desired grid
size. Release the left mouse button.

3: The Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust if necessary the origin
coordinates, number of X and Y points, and spacing.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button. A representation of the non-
uniform Cartesian receptor grid ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area at the specified location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular grid click the
Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired grid, click the
right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Non-Uniform
Cartesian Grid dialog will be displayed.

256
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Uniform Polar Grid Tool

The Uniform Polar Grid tool allows you to graphically define the location of a uniform polar grid on the
drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Uniform Polar Grid:

1: Select the Uniform Polar Grid tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Position the mouse pointer on the drawing area, where the center of the receptor grid should be. Holding
down the mouse left button, drag until you reach the desired size. As you drag with the mouse, the current
radius of the uniform polar grid being drawn and the coordinates are displayed on the status bar. When
you have reached the desired release the left mouse button.

3: The Uniform Polar Grid dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust if necessary the origin coordinates, number
of X and Y points, and spacing.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button. A representation of the
uniform polar receptor grid ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area at the specified location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular grid click the
Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired grid, click the
right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Uniform Polar
Grid dialog will be displayed.

Non-Uniform Polar Grid Tool

The Non-Uniform Polar Grid tool allows you to graphically define the location of a non-uniform polar receptor
grid on the drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Non-Uniform Polar Grid:

1: Select the Non-Uniform Polar Grid tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Position the mouse pointer on the drawing area, where the center of the receptor grid should be. Holding
down the mouse left button, drag until you reach the desired size. As you drag with the mouse, the current
radius of the non-uniform polar grid being drawn and the coordinates are displayed on the status bar.
When you have reached the desired release the left mouse button.

3: The Non-Uniform Polar Grid dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust if necessary the origin coordinates,
number of X and Y points, and spacing.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button. A representation of the non-
uniform polar receptor grid ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area at the specified location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular grid click the
Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired grid, click the
right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Non-Uniform
Polar Grid dialog will be displayed.

257
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Nested Grid Receptors Tool

The Nested Grid Receptors tool allows you to graphically define the location of a nested receptor grid on the
drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Nested Grid:

1: Select the Nested Grid Receptors tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, and holding down the left mouse button, drag the
mouse pointer diagonally until you graphically define a box around the sources in your project. Release the
left mouse button.

3: The Nested Grid Receptors dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust if necessary the origin coordinates,
size, and receptor spacing.

4: When you finish entering or reviewing the required information, click the Close button. A representation of
the Nested Grid Receptors will be displayed on the drawing area at the specified location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular click the Select
tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired grid, click the right
mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Nested Grid
Receptors dialog will be displayed.

Plant Boundary Tool

The Plant Boundary tool allows you to graphically define the location of a plant boundary or fenceline on the
drawing area.

How to Graphically Define a Plant Boundary:

1: Select the Plant Boundary tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the location for one of the corners of the plant
boundary. Release the left mouse button. Drag the mouse pointer to the location of the next (adjacent)
corner and click the left mouse button. Follow this procedure until you digitize all corners. To close the
polygon, left-click with the mouse pointer inside the small box that marks the starting corner, or click the
right mouse button.

3: The Cartesian Plant Boundary dialog is displayed to allow you to adjust if necessary the coordinates for the
corners of the plant boundary polygon.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button. A representation of the plant
boundary ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area at the specified location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a plant boundary click the
Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the plant boundary, click
the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The Cartesian
Plant Boundary dialog will be displayed.

258
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Elevations/Flagpole Heights Tool

The Elevations/Flagpole Heights tool allows you to graphically define terrain elevations and/or flagpole
heights for discrete receptors. The Elevations/Flagpole Heights tool does not apply to the following types of
receptors:

Uniform and Non-Uniform Cartesian Grids

Uniform and Non-Uniform Polar Grids
Primary Receptors for the Cartesian Plant Boundary
Polar Plant Boundary Receptors

Note: In order to use the Elevations/Flagpole Heights tool for the Cartesian and Polar
grid receptors, you must first convert them to discrete receptors.

How to Graphically Define Elevations/Flagpole Heights:

1: Select the Elevations/Flagpole Heights tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the location for one of the corners of the polygon.
Release the left mouse button. Drag the mouse pointer to the location of the next (adjacent) corner and
click the left mouse button. Follow this procedure until you digitize all corners of the polygon. To close the
polygon, left-click with the mouse pointer inside the small box that marks the starting corner, or click the
right mouse button.

3: The Terrain Elevations/Flagpole Heights dialog is displayed to allowing you to specify the terrain elevation
and/or flagpole height to be applied to each discrete receptor that falls within the defined polygon area.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the Close button.

Rectangular Building Tool

The Rectangular Building tool allows you to draw buildings that are rectangular or square in shape.

How to Graphically Define a Rectangular Building:

1: Select the Rectangular Building tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Position the mouse pointer where one corner of the building is located. Holding down the mouse left button,
drag up or down on a diagonal, until you reach the desired size and shape. Note that as you move the
mouse the current coordinates are displayed on the status bar.

3: The Building Inputs dialog is displayed. Complete the information and if necessary, adjust the coordinates
and dimensions of the building.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the OK button. A representation of the
rectangular building ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area for the selected dimensions and location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular building, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired building,
click the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The
Building Inputs dialog will be displayed.

259
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Angled Rectangular Building Tool

The Angled Rectangular Building tool allows you to draw buildings that are rectangular or square in shape at
an angle.

How to Graphically Define an Angled Rectangular Building:

1: Select the Angled Rectangular Building tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Position the mouse pointer where one corner of the building is located and left click. Drag the mouse at any
angle you wish to the next corner of the building and left click. You can then left drag up or down and left
click when you reach the desired size of your building. Note that as you move the mouse the current angle
and coordinates are displayed on the status bar.

3: The Building Inputs dialog is displayed. Complete the information and if necessary, adjust the coordinates,
angle and dimensions of the building.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the OK button. A representation of the angled
rectangular building ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area for the selected dimensions and location.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular building, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired building,
click the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The
Building Inputs dialog will be displayed.

Circular Building Tool

The Circular Building tool allows you to draw buildings with a circular shape such as a tank.

How to Graphically Define a Circular Building:

1: Select the Circular Building tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Position the mouse pointer on the drawing area, where the center of the building is located. Holding down the
left mouse button, drag until you reach the desired size. As you drag with the mouse, the current radius of
the circle being drawn and the coordinates of the center of the building are displayed on the status bar.
When you have reached the desired size release the left mouse button.

3: The Building Inputs dialog is displayed. Complete the information and if necessary, adjust the diameter and
coordinates for the building.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the OK button. A representation of the circular
building ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area at the selected location and at the specified diameter.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular building, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired building,
click the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The
Building Inputs dialog will be displayed.

260
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference

Polygonal Building Tool

The Polygonal Building tool allows you to draw buildings of any shape, except rounded buildings.

How to Graphically Define a Polygonal Building:

1: Select the Polygonal Building tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar.

2: Left-click, with the mouse pointer on the drawing area, the location for one of the corners of the polygonal
building. Release the left mouse button. Drag the mouse pointer to the location of the next (adjacent)
corner and click the left mouse button. Follow this procedure until you digitize all corners. To close the
polygon, left-click with the mouse pointer inside the small box that marks the starting corner, or click the
right mouse button.

3: The Building Inputs dialog is displayed. Complete the information and, if necessary, adjust the coordinates
and dimensions of the building.

4: When you finish entering all the required information, click the OK button. A representation of the polygonal
building ( ) will be displayed on the drawing area at the selected location and dimensions.

Note: If you want to review or modify any information for a particular building, click
the Select tool ( ) on the Annotation Toolbar, select the desired building,
click the right mouse button and select Edit from the floating menu. The
Building Inputs dialog will be displayed.

Show/Hide Structure Influence Zone (SIZ) Tool

This tool allows you to view the Structure Influence Zone (SIZ) for a selected wind direction. Click the
Show/Hide Structure Influence Zone (SIZ) tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar. The Structure
Influence Zone is displayed for any buildings in the drawing area and the Wind Direction dialog is opened.
You can click the up/down arrows to change the orientation of the wind flow or you can simply click on any of
the markers around the arrow to select the desired wind flow vector. This changes the orientation of the SIZ.

261
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 8 - User Interface Reference AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Show/Hide GEP 5L Area of Influence Tool

Click the Show/Hide GEP 5L Area of Influence tool ( ) located on the Application Toolbar to display or
hide the GEP 5L Area of Influence on the drawing area.

As the wind rotates full circle, each direction-specific Structure Influence Zone (SIZ) changes and is integrated
into one overall area of influence termed the GEP 5L Area of Influence.

262
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 9 - Tools & Utilities

CHAPTER 9 TOOLS & UTILITIES

Tools & Utilities

Move Site

Rotate Site

MAXTABLE Viewer

Ozone File Maker

Coordinate Converter

MAXIFILE Converter

Move Site
The Move Site function allows you to move your entire site to a new location. This is especially useful if you
started your project, for example, in a local Cartesian coordinate system and later on you need to change to the
UTM coordinate system. When you use the Move Site tool, the following objects will be automatically moved:

Sources
Receptors
Annotations
Bitmaps

Note: Any contour plot files will be permanently deleted from your project if you use
the move site function, as they will no longer be valid. You will have to re-run
your project to generate new contour plot files.

How to Move Your Site:

1: Select Tools | Move Site... from the menu.

Tools Menu

263
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 9 - Tools & Utilities AERMOD View™ User's Guide

2: The Move Site By... dialog is displayed.

3: Specify the distance, in meters, that the site should be moved in the X and Y directions and click the
button.

Note: Please note that base maps which contain information on the coordinates and
extents of the image, such as DXF, DLG, LULC, and Shapefiles, will not be moved
to a new location when you use the Move Site tool. If for instance, you have an
AutoCAD DXF base map for your site in a local coordinate system, and if you are
moving your site to a UTM coordinate system, you will need convert your DXF
base map to the new coordinate system using the program that you used
developed your original base map.

Rotate Site
The Rotate Site tool allows you to rotate certain objects (e.g. buildings and point sources) within your project.
This tool is especially useful if the Plant North of your base map displaying your buildings does not coincide with
True North. In this case, after digitizing or importing buildings from an AutoCAD (*.dxf) file, you would need to
rotate your buildings in order to properly run the BPIP/BPIP-PRIME, ISCST3, ISC-PRIME and AERMOD models.
All of these models expect that your modeling objects (e.g. buildings, sources, receptors) are displayed in the
drawing area with True North pointing upward.

Note: Any contour plotfiles will be permanently deleted from your project if you use the
rotate site tool, as they will no longer be valid. You will have to re-run your
project to generate new contour plot files.

How to Rotate Your Site:

1: Select Tools | Rotate Site... from the menu.

Tools Menu

2: A Confirmation dialog is displayed noting that, by rotating your site you will loose existing contour
plotfiles. Click Yes if you want to proceed.

264
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 9 - Tools & Utilities

Confirmation Dialog

3: The Rotate Site By... dialog is displayed.

Rotate Site By... Dialog

4: Specify the objects to rotate, the rotation angle in degrees and the X and Y coordinates for the center of
rotation. Click the button to rotate your site. A dialog will appear telling you that the rotation was
successful. Click OK to exit.

Note: Positive rotation angles will result in counter clockwise rotations while negative
rotation angles will produce clockwise rotations.

Note: Output files are only updated after you run your project. In order for your
changes to take effect you must re-run your project after rotating your site.

265
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 9 - Tools & Utilities AERMOD View™ User's Guide

MAXTABLE Viewer
The MAXTABLE Viewer reads your AERMOD Main Output file (*.ado) or ISC Main Output file (*.out or *.pou)
and displays all the available Maximum Value Tables within your output file allowing you to better analyze your
results. You have access to this utility by selecting Tools | MAXTABLE Viewer... from the menu.

MAXTABLE Viewer

The following options are available:

Specify ISC/AERMOD Main Output File: If you have already run your project and an output file is
available, it will be automatically loaded into the MAXTABLE Viewer. However, you can click the button to
specify any output file you wish to view. If your output does not contain Maximum Values Tables, the
output file will not be opened.
Averaging Period: You can select from the drop-down list the averaging period you wish to view.
Year: Select from the drop-down list the year you wish to view.
Output Type: Select from the drop-down list the output type you wish to view.
Source Group: If you have configured Source Groups, select from the drop-down list the source group
you wish to view.
Display Window: The results of your selection are displayed in a tabular format. It is possible to sort the
data by Rank, Concentration or Date/Hour simply by clicking on the column header.
MOE Reg. 419/05 Discarded/Highest Values: This option was developed according to the Air
Dispersion Modelling Guideline for Ontario (ADMGO), Canada, which states that the eight hours with the
highest 1-hour average predicted concentrations in each single met year may be discarded. With a five year
met file, this means that the Ontario MOE will consider for compliance assessment the highest concentration
after the elimination of these forty highest hours over the five year period from the modelling results. Note
that repeat listings of the same hour should be treated as one hour eliminated. When this option is
checked, the highest (discarded) 8 hours are highlighted in green and the final accepted value highlighted in
red.

266
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 9 - Tools & Utilities

MAXTABLE Viewer - MOE Reg. 419/05 option

Click on this button to export the MAXTABLE results to a CSV file that can be opened in Excel.

Ozone File Maker

The Ozone File Maker utility allows you to create hourly ozone data files. You have access to this utility by
selecting Tools | Ozone File Maker... from the menu or by clicking on the button in the NOx to
NO2 screen of the Control Pathway.

Ozone File Maker Utility

How to Use the Ozone File Maker:

1: From the Specify Data Period panel, select the Start and End Dates for the file. Click the button.
The specified data period will be displayed in the window.

267
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 9 - Tools & Utilities AERMOD View™ User's Guide

2: In the Ozone Concentration panel, specify the ozone concentration. Click the button to apply
this value to the selected rows (hours).

Tip: You may select multiple rows in sequence by pressing down the Shift key
or press the Ctrl key to make disjoint selections. To select all rows, press
the Shift key + Screen Down + Ctrl + End.

Note: A missing indicator of -99 will be applied to any hours for which you have not
specified an ozone concentration.

3: Save the file by selecting File | Save As... from the menu or by clicking on the button. The Save As
dialog will open allowing you to specify a name and location to save the ozone file (*.ozn). You may now
use this file in the NOx to NO2 screen of the Control Pathway if you wish.

Coordinate Converter
The Coordinate Converter utility allows you to convert between geographic coordinates and projected
Cartesian coordinates. You have access to this utility by selecting Tools | Coordinate Converter... from the
menu or from the Terrain Processor dialog.

Coordinate Converter utility

How to Convert Geographic Coordinates to Projected Cartesian Coordinates:

1: In the Coordinate System 1 panel, select the type and datum of your coordinates from the drop-down
list.

2: Under the Parameters panel, you must specify the latitude and longitude of your coordinates. The latitude
and longitude can be entered in either decimal degrees or in sexagesimal format. You can click the
button to choose between formats. This button will also convert between formats so that if you enter your
coordinates in decimal degrees, you can click on this button to convert to the sexagesimal format and vice
versa.

3: Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 in the Coordinate System 2 panel.

4: Click the button to convert your geographical coordinates to projected Cartesian coordinates.

268
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 9 - Tools & Utilities

MAXIFILE Converter
The MAXIFILE Converter allows you to convert any Threshold Violation Files (MAXFILEs) from any external
projects into PLOTFILES. Plotfiles created from MAXIFILES contain information on the number of times a
specified threshold was exceeded at each receptor location.

MAXIFILE Converter

Select the MAXIFILE you wish to convert and specify a location to save the created plotfile. Click the
button to convert the MAXIFILE to a plotfile.

269
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 10 - Risk

CHAPTER 10 RISK

Risk

Risk Mode

Starting a Project

RiskGen Interface Overview

Status Tab

Warning Tab

The Sources Tab

The Met Files Tab

The Risk Input File Tab

The Generate & Run Tab

Risk Mode
ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME Only

This Risk Mode option is used to guide you on preparing the ISCST3 input files according to the U.S. EPA OSW
Human Health Risk Assessment (HHRAP) and Screening Level Ecological Risk Assessment (SLERAP) Protocols.

The Risk Mode was implemented in AERMOD View as an add-on to users of IRAP-h View (Industrial Risk
Assessment Program – Human Health) and EcoRisk View (Ecological Risk Assessment Program). The uses of the
Risk Mode option allows you to quickly and easily comply with the U.S. EPA OSW HHRAP and SLERAP protocols.
For more information on these programs, please contact Lakes Environmental Software.

How to Use the Risk Mode:

1: Select Risk | Risk Mode (ON) from the menu.

2: A Confirmation dialog is displayed asking confirmation to continue. Click Yes to continue.

The following options will be automatically setup in your AERMOD View project:

A 1-hour and annual averaging period

Pollutant Type will be selected as Other
Option to read entire met data file selected

271
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 10 - Risk AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Met data file must include variables for dry & wet deposition
Specify risk emission phase data - for vapour, particle and particle-bound phase

3: Select Risk | Risk Grid from the menu. This will display the Multi-Tier Grid window. From this window, you
can automatically setup the risk grid according to the U.S. EPA OSW protocols.

4: Select Risk | Risk Emission Phase Data from the menu. This will display the Gas & Particle Data screen
in the Source Pathway. From this screen you should specify vapor phase, particle phase, and particle-bound
phase data for all your sources, regardless of the output type options you selected in the Control Pathway.

5: Select Risk | Run RiskGen from the menu. This will display the ISC Risk Generator (RiskGen) utility. This
utility allows you to setup all ISCST3 input files you will need for your risk project.

Note: More information on the ISC Risk Generator utility can be found on RiskGen’s
Help file.

Risk Mode - Gas & Particle Data

ISCST3 & ISC-PRIME Only

If you are using the Risk Mode, you must specify the vapor phase, particle phase, and particle-bound phase
data for all your sources in the Gas & Particle Data screen of the Source Pathway.

The parameters requested in the Gas & Particle Data screen depend on the source phase being modeled.
There are three tabs available for the Risk Mode, see the following sections for the information to be specified in
each tab:

Vapour Phase

In this panel you must specify the liquid and frozen scavenging coefficients.

Scavenging Coefficient - Liquid: Specify the scavenging coefficient for liquid precipitation.
Scavenging Coefficient - Frozen: Specify the scavenging coefficient for frozen precipitation.

Particle Phase

You must specify the following information for the particle-phase of a source:

272
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 10 - Risk

No.: Identifies the number of particle size categories specified for a particular source. You can specify up to
a maximum of 20 categories. You may add a category by clicking on the button after you have
entered information for the previous category.
Particle Diameter: Enter in this column the particulate diameter in microns for each particle size category,
up to a maximum of 20. Note that the current total number of particle size categories is displayed on the
bottom of the table.
Mass Fraction: In this column, you should define the mass fractions (between 0 and 1) for each of the
categories you have defined. The mass fraction for each source must add up to 1.0 (within 2%). Note that
the current total for the mass fraction is displayed on the bottom of the table.
Particle Density: Here you can define the particle density in grams per cubic centimeter for each of the
categories you have defined.
Scavenging Coefficient - Liquid: Enter in this column the particulate scavenging coefficient for liquid
precipitation. The liquid scavenging coefficient should be entered for each particle size category.
Scavenging Coefficient - Frozen: Enter in this column the particulate scavenging coefficient for frozen
precipitation. The frozen scavenging coefficient should be entered for each particle size category.

Particle-Bound

The information to be specified in the Particle-Bound Phase tab is the same information as in the Particle Phase
tab except for the Mass Fraction. You can click the button to copy the information from the
Particle Phase tab.

273
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 10 - Risk AERMOD View™ User's Guide

In the Particle-Bound phase, the Mass Fraction is equivalent to the Fraction of Total Surface Area that is
available. The Fraction of Total Surface Area is calculated in the following way:

where:
Pi = (6 / Di) x Mass Fraction in Particle Phase
Di = particle diameter in the particle phase for particle category i
SUM = The sum of all Pi

Gas & Particle data can be specified for more than one source. The buttons at the bottom of the Gas & Particle
Data screen called the Record Navigator buttons will help you manage information for multiple sources defined.

Starting a RiskGen Project

How to Start a Project:

1: Create a project in AERMOD View. Make sure you are in the ISCST3 Mode by selecting Model | ISCST3 from
the AERMOD View menu. RiskGen is only available for projects created in the ISCST3 and ISC-PRIME
modes.

2: Select Risk | Risk Mode (ON) from the AERMOD View menu. Select Yes for the Confirmation message.
Complete all the required data for your risk project (e.g., source parameters, risk grid, met files, etc.).

3: Select Risk | Risk Emission Phase Data, from the AERMOD View menu, and complete the required Gas &
Particle data for all your sources (vapor phase, particle phase, and particle-bound phase).

4: Check your project data for any missing information by selecting Run | Details from the AERMOD View
menu. Complete any required information and then select Risk | RiskGen from the AERMOD View menu.

5: The ISC Risk Generator main window displays. Wait a few seconds as your ISC Master Risk File loads and is
checked. The ISC Master Risk File is taken from the project that is currently open in AERMOD View. A
message is displayed to advise you that your project load was completed.

274
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 10 - Risk

6: Note that information about your ISC Master Risk File is displayed in the Status tab (see Status Tab for
more information on this topic).

7: The Risk Generator main window contains 6 tabs. The contents of each one of these tabs can be found in
the following sections.

RiskGen Interface Overview

The components of the RiskGen dialog are shown and briefly described below:

1: Menu bar: Displays the menu names (see Menu Options).

2: Toolbar buttons: Provide quick access to some menu commands.

3: Tabs: Provide access to the data inputs required to process the data.

4: Input Area: This area displays the content of each input tab

275
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 10 - Risk AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Status Tab
Once you open an ISCST3 Input File, RiskGen displays information about this input file in the Status tab. The
information is related to whether options present in your ISCST3 Input File are considered or are supported
when generating the necessary ISC Risk Input Files. For easy reference, the information is grouped under the
five Pathways (Control Pathway, Source Pathway, Receptor Pathway, Meteorology Pathway, Output Pathway).

Warning Tab
The Warning tab displays information and options supported in RiskGen. For easy reference, the information is
grouped under the five Pathways.

276
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 10 - Risk

The Sources Tab

Three types of sources are currently being supported under the 1998 U.S. EPA Human Health Risk Assessment
Protocol: point, area, and volume sources. The information read from the ISC Risk Input File for these three
source types will be available in the following tabs:

Point Sources tab

Area Sources tab
Volume Sources tab
Gas Dry Deposition tab

Three types of sources are currently being supported under the 1998 U.S. EPA Human Health Risk Assessment
Protocol: Point, Area, and Volume sources.

Sources created in your AERMOD View project are checked to see if they have required vapor, particle, and
particle-bound data. Sources with at least one of these parameters are then placed in the appropriate field in
RiskGen. The Status tab provides a warning about any sources without vapor, particle, and/or particle-bound
data.

Point Sources tab

All the point sources that are present in your project and that contain the required information for at least one
emission phase (vapor mercury, vapor, particle, or particle-bound) are displayed in the Include these Point
Sources list.

The Exclude these Point Sources list can be used to store the sources that, for any reason, should not be
included into your final ISC Risk Input Files. Use the buttons located between both lists to transfer sources from
one list to the other.

For each source included in any one of these lists, the following will be displayed:

Source ID: the source ID specified in your ISC project.

Emission Rate (g/s): the unit emission rate of 1.0 g/s is used regardless of what you have specified in your
ISC project. The HHRA Protocol specifies that a unit emission rate be used for the ISCST3 runs.
VM: represents the Vapor Mercury emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a
run for this phase, a mark is placed in this column.
V: represents the Vapor emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a run for this
phase, a mark is placed in this column.

277
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 10 - Risk AERMOD View™ User's Guide

P: represents the Particle emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a run for
this phase, a mark is placed in this column.
B: represents the Particle-Bound emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a
run for this phase, a mark is placed in this column.

When checking for the emission phase information for a source, RiskGen tries to find the following information:

Emission Phase Particle Information Scavenging Coeff. Gases Scavenging Coeff. Particulates

Vapor

Particle

Particle-Bound

Note: The emission phase information required by RiskGen is only available if you have
specified emission data by selecting Risk | Risk Emission Phase Data from the
AERMOD View menu.

Area Sources tab

Fugitive emission sources to be evaluated should be represented as either Area or Volume source types. All the
Area sources that are present in your project and that contain the required information for at least one emission
phase (vapor mercury, vapor, particle, or particle-bound) will be displayed in the Area Sources tab under the
List of Ungrouped Area Sources.

When setting up ISCST3 runs for a risk assessment following the U.S. EPA OSW HHRAP, one run is required for
each emission source. Some fugitive emission sources are modeled as a combination of Area sources. In these
cases, however, these sources should be included in a single run. RiskGen allows you to specify which Area
sources must be combined in a single ISCST3 run by placing them into a group. A group name is automatically
set up (e.g. GRPAREA1).

How to Group Area Sources:

1: In the List of Ungrouped Area Sources, select the sources you want group together (e.g., they represent the
same fugitive source). To select more than one source from the list hold down the Shift key and select with
the mouse pointer all the sources.

2: Click the single arrow button ( ) to move the selected sources to the Group list. As you move Area
sources to the Group list, RiskGen redefines a new emission rate for each source This emission rate is
proportionately allocated for each Area source based on the area of each individual source.

278
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 10 - Risk

3: To define a new group, click the New button. To ungroup an existing group, click the Remove button. To
ungroup all the existing groups, click the Ungroup All button.

4: For fugitive sources represented by only one Area source, you can do one of the following: leave this source
in the List of Ungrouped Area Sources or set up a group containing only this source.

5: If you want to exclude certain Area sources from the final ISC Risk Input Files than you have to leave these
sources in the List of Ungrouped Area Sources and check the Ignore Ungrouped box.

The following information is available for Area sources contained in any one of the lists:

Source ID: this is the source ID you specified in your ISC project.
Emission Rate (g/(s-m2)): the unit emission rate of 1.0 g/s is used regardless of what you have specified
in your ISC project. The HHRA Protocol specifies that a unit emission rate be used for the ISCST3 runs.
VM: represents the Vapor Mercury emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a
run for this phase, a mark is placed in this column.
V: represents the Vapor emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a run for this
phase, a mark is placed in this column.
P: represents the Particle emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a run for
this phase, a mark is placed in this column.
B: represents the Particle-Bound emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a
run for this phase, a mark is placed in this column.

When checking for the emission phase information for a source, ISC Risk Generator tries to find the following
information:

Emission Phase Particle Information Scavenging Coeff. Gases Scavenging Coeff. Particulates

Vapor

Particle

Particle-Bound

Note: The emission phase information required by RiskGen is only available if you have
specified emission data by selecting Risk | Risk Emission Phase Data from the
AERMOD View menu.

279
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 10 - Risk AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Volume Sources tab

Fugitive emission sources to be evaluated should be represented as either Area or Volume source types. All the
Volume sources that are present in your project and that contain the required information for at least one
emission phase (vapor mercury, vapor, particle, or particle-bound) will be displayed in the Volume Sources tab
under the List of Ungrouped Volume Sources.

When setting up ISCST3 runs for a risk assessment following the U.S. EPA OSW HHRAP, one run is required for
each emission source. Some fugitive emission sources are modeled as a combination of Volume sources. In
these cases, however, the sources should be included in a single run. ISC Risk Generator allows you to specify
which Volume sources must be combined in a single ISCST3 run.

How to Group Volume Sources:

1: In the List of Ungrouped Volume Sources, select the sources you want group together (e.g., they represent
the same fugitive source). To select more than one source from the list hold down the Shift key and select
with the mouse pointer all the sources.

2:Click the single arrow button ( ) to move the selected sources to the Group list. As you move Volume
sources to the Group list, RiskGen redefines a new emission rate for each source This emission rate is
proportionately allocated for each Volume source based on the area of each individual source.

3: To define a new group click the New button. To ungroup an existing group click the Remove button. To
ungroup all the existing groups, click the Ungroup All button.

4: For fugitive sources represented by only one Volume source, you can do one of the following: leave this
source in the List of Ungrouped Volume Sources or set up a group containing only this source.

5: If you want to exclude certain Volume sources from the final ISC Risk Input Files than you have to leave
these sources in the List of Ungrouped Volume Sources and check the Ignore Ungrouped box.

The following information is available for Volume sources contained in any one of the lists:

Source ID: this is the source ID you specified in your ISC project.
Emission Rate (g/(s-m2)): the unit emission rate of 1.0 g/s is used regardless of what you have specified
in your ISC project. The HHRA Protocol specifies that a unit emission rate be used for the ISCST3 runs.
VM: represents the Vapor Mercury emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a
run for this phase, a mark is placed in this column.

280
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 10 - Risk

V: represents the Vapor emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a run for this
phase, a mark is placed in this column.
P: represents the Particle emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a run for
this phase, a mark is placed in this column.
B: represents the Particle-Bound emission phase. If RiskGen found the necessary information to set up a
run for this phase, a mark is placed in this column.

When checking for the emission phase information for a source, ISC Risk Generator tries to find the following
information:

Emission Phase Particle Information Scavenging Coeff. Gases Scavenging Coeff. Particulates

Vapor

Particle

Particle-Bound

Note: The emission phase information required by RiskGen is only available if you have
specified emission data by selecting Risk | Risk Emission Phase Data from the
AERMOD View menu.

Gas Dry Deposition

The gas dry deposition velocity of Mercury and of Organics, Chlorine and HCI can be specified if they are
different from the values specified in the Human Health Risk Assessment Protocol (HHRAP). By default, HHRAP
specifies the following gas dry deposition velocities:

0.029 meters per second (m/s) for Mercury

0.005 m/s for Organics, Chlorine, and HCI

RiskGen supplies these default values automatically.

To change the gas dry deposition velocity of either mercury or organics, chlorine and HCI, enter the value in
the appropriate field.

To revert to the default values specified in the HHRAP, click the revert button ( ) to the right of the
appropriate field.

281
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 10 - Risk AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The Met Files Tab

In the Met Files tab, you specify the 5 years of meteorological data to be used for your risk assessment project.
This is specified in the format of meteorological data files specified in the AERMOD View Master Risk Project File.
When you specify the file(s), RiskGen places them in the Met Data Files list. In RiskGen, you can specify one of
the following:

Combined: You can specify only one met data file if it contains the combined 5-years of met data (each
year must be complete with a full year of data).
Individual: You can also specify five individual met data files, one for each year. In this case, you will need
to add each file to the Met Data Files list. To add one or more met data files click the Add button (see
Anemometer Height below).

Met Data Files list

In the Met Data Files list the following information is available for each specified met data file:

Year: This is the year for the specified met data file.
MH Station: This is the mixing height station number for the specified met data file.
SA Station: This is the surface air station number for the specified met data file.
Met Data File: This is the location and name for the specified met data file.

Note: You can view the contents of any specified met data file using Windows WordPad
by selecting the met data file from the list and double-clicking it.

Anemometer Height

For sites where the anemometer height changed during the 5-year period, you should use the five years of
meteorological data separately so you can specify the correct anemometer height for each year.

282
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 10 - Risk

The Risk Input File Tab

In the Risk Input Files tab, a table details the ISC Risk Input Files that RiskGen will generate. Each column is
explained below.

ISC Risk Input File: This column displays the name of the ISC Risk Input File to be created (see Name
Convention - ISC Risk Input Files).
Source ID: This column displays the source being specified for the ISC Risk Input File. Each ISC Risk Input
File must contain information for a single source. Fugitive emissions are modeled either as "area" or
"volume" source types. In many cases, to model these emissions sources, it is required that the area be
subdivided into more than one area or volume source. In those cases, the group of sources that make up
one fugitive emission should be included into the same ISC Risk Input File.
Type: This column displays the source type (Point, Volume, or Area) being specified for the ISC Risk Input
File.
Modeling Phase: This column displays the modeling phase being considered for the ISC Risk Input File.
Three sets of ISC Risk Input Files are required for each source (Vapor phase, Particle phase, and Particle-
Bound phase).
Meteorological Data File: This column displays the met data file being used for each ISC Risk Input File.
If 5 years of meteorological data were specified in individual files instead of in a combined 5-year met data
file, then for each source, modeling phase, and meteorological data file, an ISC Risk Input File must be
created. For example, for each source, 3 ISC Risk Input Files are created (1 source x 3 modeling phases x 1
met data file = 3 input files). On the other hand, 15 ISC Risk Input Files are created if using five data files
for the 5 years of meteorological data (1 source x 3 modeling phases x 5 met data files = 15 input files).
Annual Plotfile: The annual average plotfile must be specified for each ISC Risk Input File (see Name
Convention - Annual Plotfiles).
1-Hour Plotfile: The 1-hour average plotfile must be specified for each ISC Risk Input File (see Name
Convention - 1-Hour Plotfiles).

283
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 10 - Risk AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The Generate & Run Tab

The Generate tab contains the following options:

Specify Path for

You must identify the location where you want the ISC Input Files and ISC Plotfiles to be placed after they are
generated. If you intend to run your ISC Risk Input Files from a network, you should specify a network path. By
default, ISC Risk Generator will use the same path as your ISC Risk Master File.

Tip: For example, you want to use two machines on the network to run your
ISC Risk Input Files, one file from John's machine and one from Mary's.
John originally set up the ISC Risk Input Files using the ISC Risk
Generator. He specified a path for the generated ISC Input Files and
ISC Plotfiles on a shared resources drive (e.g., z:). When Mary sets up
the AERMOD Batcher to run some of the ISC Risk Input Files, the
path of these files will be automatically recognized. If you do not know
how to create a shared resources drive, contact your network manager.

Run Option

The TOXICS Option reduces model runtime; it is optional.

Status

The Status displays information on the status of your project, and warns you if any information is missing.

Generate Input Files

When all requirements are met, the Generate Input Files button is enabled. Click
the button to generate all the necessary ISC Risk Input Files.

Batcher

The Batcher button starts the AERMOD Batcher, which allows you to specify ISC Input Files to be
run in an unattended mode. The Batcher button is enabled only after the necessary ISC Risk
Input files are generated. When the AERMOD Batcher is opens, the ISC Risk Input Files are
automatically set up and can be run immediately.

284
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

CHAPTER 11 3D VIEW

3D View

Viewing 3D Model Results

Interface Overview

Controls

Visualization Tools

Printing

Viewing 3D Model Results

The results output read from the files created after the model run can be viewed in 3D View.

How to View 3D Model Results

1: After a successful run, launch 3D View by clicking the 3D View ( ) button.

2: On the drawing area of 3D View, you will see a 3-dimensional visualization of buildings, sources, monitor
points, calculation grid, and modeling results.

3: You can zoom in and rotate your site, and change the view by setting the rotation and zoom speed, and
vertical exaggeration.

285
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 11 - 3D View AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Interface Overview
3D View features a friendly, intuitive interface which provides easy access to all tools.

The components of the 3D View window are briefly described below.

1: Menu Bar: Displays menu names. To open a menu, move the mouse over the menu name and then click
the left mouse button. A drop-down menu appears displaying a list of related commands.

2: Menu Toolbar: The Menu Toolbar provides quick access to some menu commands.

3: 3D Controls Toolbar: The tools available in the 3D Controls Toolbar used to manipulate the three-
dimensional image in the viewing window.

4: View Control: The View Control dialog allows you to navigate the viewing area.

5: Viewing Area: Displays graphical representation of the sources, receptors, grids, buildings, etc. that are
drawn in the exact locations you defined. The default color for the Viewing Area is white but this can be
changed. Simply double click with the mouse anywhere in the Viewing Area. The Color dialog opens,
allowing you to select the color of your choice.

6: 3D Settings Panel: The 3D Settings Panel displays the zoom speed, rotation speed and vertical
exaggeration

286
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

Controls
3D View Control

By default, the 3D View Control display is shown every time you start 3D View. You can turn on and off the
display of this control by selecting View | 3D View Control from the menu. The 3D View Control allows you
to graphically control the rotation of your 3D models. Pressing down the mouse left button, click the sphere and
drag the mouse pointer in the direction you want the image to rotate.

3D View Control

3D Settings Panel

The 3D Settings Panel displays the zoom speed, rotation speed and vertical exaggeration.

Zoom Speed: This specifies the zoom step for a single click of the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons.
Higher numbers give higher magnification (reduction) effects. This number can be fractional as well as
integer.
Rotation Speed: This specifies the amount of rotation you get for each single click of the rotation button.
Higher numbers give higher rotation amounts.
Vertical Exaggeration: Here you can enter a vertical exaggeration for your 3D view and click the
button to apply the exaggeration. The vertical exaggeration option is usually used to give a more
interesting view of your modeling area. Some extremely high mountains require no vertical exaggeration.
Vertical exaggeration is generally needed for small scale scenes, with low relative relief.

Note: Zoom Speed and Rotation Speed can also be adjusted in the Camera Settings
dialog. Vertical Exaggeration can also be changed by selecting
Exaggeration… from the Options Menu.

287
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 11 - 3D View AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Multimedia Options

You can access the Multimedia Options dialog by selecting Multimedia | Record Animation... from the
menu.

Multimedia Options dialog

How to Record Animations:

1: Click the button to specify the name and location the created animation file (*.AVI) will be saved to.

2: Select the Frame Rate by entering the number directly or by using the arrows. The Frame Rate refers to
the number of frames per second you would like to record.

3: Check or uncheck the Reduce dialog during recording box. When you start recording, the Multimedia
Options dialog will automatically reduce in size if this box is checked. This prevents the dialog from
obstructing your animation.

4: Click the button to open the Advanced Settings dialog where you can define various
advanced settings options.

5: Click the button to start recording

6: Carry out the desired functions you wish to record. Once you have finished, click the button to stop
recording.

Interface Guide

The following buttons are available from the Multimedia Options dialog:

Start Recording: Begins recording the animation.

Pause Recording: Pauses the animation recording.

Stop Recording: Ends the recording of the animation.

Play Animation: Plays the recorded animation.

288
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

Reduce Dialog: Reduces the Multimedia Options dialog, allowing you access to only the dialog
buttons.

Expand Dialog: Expands the Multimedia Options dialog, allowing you access to the entire dialog.

Advanced Settings

The Advanced Settings dialog provides you with additional settings for your multimedia recording options.

Advanced Settings dialog

The following options are available:

Bitmap Color Depth: Select a bitmap color depth from this drop-down list. The default is 24-bit.
Compression: This box is checked by default. Compression refers to the amount your AVI file will be
compressed.

Note: Creating AVI files can be demanding on a computer's resources, and usually
creates quite large files. Increasing the amount of compression applied to
animation recording can reduce the file size without seriously degrading the
quality of the recording.

Video Compressor: Some information about the selected codec is displayed in this panel. If you wish to
change the codec click the button to open the Video Compression dialog.

Click on this button to restore the codec defaults.

Video Compression

The following options are available in the Video Compression dialog:

Video Compression dialog

289
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 11 - 3D View AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Compressor: Select a compressor from the drop-down list.

Compression Quality: Here you can change the compression quality if you wish.
Key Frame Every: You can check or uncheck this option and enter the number of frames.
Data Rate: You can check or uncheck this option and enter the data rate.

Click on this button to display the Configure dialog where you can select your configuration
settings.

Visualization Tools
Base Maps
Importing DLG Base Maps

Digital Line Graph (DLG) is line map information in digital form produced by the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS).
DLG files include information on planimetric base categories, such as transportation, hydrography, and
boundaries.

How to Import DLG Base Maps:

1: Select Import | Base Map | DLG... from the menu or click the Map Import tool ( ) located on the
Annotation Toolbar. A floating menu is displayed. Select DLG... from the menu. The Import DLG Base
Map dialog is displayed.

2: Enter the name and path for the DLG base map file (*.dlg) and click the OK button.

3: The base map you selected will be placed as an overlay on the drawing area.

DLG Base Map

Note: It is important to note that the extents of the imported base map should be
within the site/project domain area. Your base map will be placed on the same
coordinates defined in your map file. If the extents of the base map are outside
the defined site/project domain, then this base map will not be initially displayed
on the drawing area.

Importing DXF Base Maps

For easy reference and visualization of your results, you can import one or more digitized base maps for the area
you are modeling. The function of the base map is to place the modeling results in context with the area to be
modeled. The DXF (Drawing Interchange Format) file is a standard format for exchanging data between CAD
systems. For instance, you can use AutoCAD software to convert your base map into the DXF format.

290
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

Note: The Import DXF Base Map utility can only read DXF objects that are
consistent with DXF Release 12 format or earlier. If your AutoCAD DXF file was
created in a more recent release than R12, please re-save it as an R12 file before
you try importing the file.

How to Import DXF Base Maps:

1: Select Import | Base Map | DXF... from the menu or click the Map Import tool ( ) located on the
Annotation Toolbar. A floating menu is displayed. Select DXF... from the menu. The Import DXF Base
Map dialog is displayed.

Import DXF Base Map dialog

The Import DXF Base Map dialog provides you with detailed control over the import of DXF files. Options
available in this dialog include:

DXF File Name: Clicking on the Specify File ( ) button allows you to specify the name and
location of the DXF file you wish to import.
Preview: The Preview dialog shows a preview of the DXF base map that has been specified. The
axes of the preview area update automatically to the coordinates contained in the DXF base map.
Unit Conversion: This section allows you to option of converting the existing units of the DXF base
map. For the unit conversion, three options are available:
No Conversion: This is the default option used and the DXF will be imported without any
conversions.
Feet To Meters: Will scale the DXF file by a factor of 0.3048, the equivalent conversion of feet to
meters.
Custom: Allows you to specify a custom conversion factor to be applied to the DXF drawing.

Note: It is important to note that the extents of the imported base map should be
within the site/project domain area. Your base map will be placed on the same
coordinates defined in your map file. If the extents of the base map are outside
the defined site/project domain, then this base map will not be displayed on the
drawing area.

291
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 11 - 3D View AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Specify Layers to Import: Enables you to specify a particular layer from the DXF be imported rather
than all of the layers contained in the entire DXF. The default option imports all layers. After making a
layer selection you may wish to click the Update Preview button, which will visually show you in the
Preview dialog what layers you are importing.

2: After specifying any import options, click the OK button to import the DXF into your project. Your DXF base
map will be placed as an overlay on the drawing area.

Note: The following objects are recognized from DXF files imported into your
project:
Lines and Poly lines Text
Point Objects Circle
Solid Face3D
Arc

Scene Manager

From time to time, during your project, you may wish to remove some scenes from the drawing area. For
example, you can view or print only the desired objects in your drawing area. From the Scene Manager
dialog, you can specify which objects should be displayed or not on the drawing area.

Note: You also have access to the options available in the Scene Manager dialog
through the Tree View - Overlays tab.

How to Turn On or Off the Display of Overlays:

1: Click the Scene Manager tool ( ) located on the 3D Controls Toolbar or select View | Scene
Manager... from the menu. The Scene Manager dialog is displayed.

Scene Manager dialog

292
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

2: All the objects defined in your project are listed in this dialog. The checked/unchecked boxes indicates if
the object is being displayed or not in the drawing area. You can easily turn on or off the display of these
objects using the buttons located at the bottom of the dialog.

Select All: Use this button to select all of the layers listed.

Unselect All: Use this button to unselect all of the layers listed.

Check Selected: Use this button to make all selected layers active.

Uncheck Selected: Use this button to make all selected layers inactive.

Delete Selected: Use this button to delete the selected layers. You can only delete the layers
containing base maps.

You can display the list of layers in different ways. You can show only the active scenes by selecting Active
Scenes, or show only the inactive scenes by selecting Inactive Scenes.

List of Views

3D View allows you to save views of your 3D images for future use. This can be done through the List of
Views dialog which allows you to save the 3D view that is currently being displayed in the viewing area and
displays a list of all the previously saved views.

You have access to this dialog by selecting View | List of Views... from the menu or by clicking on the
button on the Menu Toolbar.

List of Views dialog

How to Use List of Views

To view a saved view, simply click the view you want and click the Select button.
To save the 3D view that is currently being displayed in the viewing area, type a small description for the
view you want to save in the Save Current View As box and click the Add button. This view will then be
listed in the List of Views dialog.

293
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 11 - 3D View AERMOD View™ User's Guide

The following buttons are found in the List of Views dialog:

Adds the view you wish to save to the List of Views.

Displays the help for the List of Views dialog.

Closes the List of Views dialog.

Displays the view you have selected.

Deletes the selected view.

Camera Settings

You can access the Camera Settings dialog by clicking on the Camera Settings ( ) tool on the 3D Controls
Toolbar or by selecting Options | Camera Settings… from the menu. The Camera Settings dialog is
displayed.

Camera Settings dialog

The Camera Settings dialog has three functions:

Zoom Speed: This controls the amount of magnification you get for each single click of the zoom button.
Higher numbers give higher magnification amounts.
Rotation Speed: This controls the amount of rotation you get for each single click of the rotation button.
Higher numbers give higher rotation amounts.
Scroll Bars Sensitivity: The scroll bars sensitivity function controls the speed of manipulation of the
image in the viewing window. Higher numbers give higher speeds.

Note: You can also specify zoom speed and rotation speed from the 3D Settings Panel.

294
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

Graphical Options

The Graphical Options dialog allows you to control the display and specify properties for several objects in
your project. You have access to this dialog by clicking on the button located on the 3D Controls Toolbar.

The Graphical Options dialog uses a two-pane view. The tree, located on the left side of the dialog, is used
for navigation and item selection. Select an item (marked as ) in the tree to display the available options on
the right panel. You have the following options in the Graphical Options dialog:

Flat Terrain

The Flat terrain page of the Graphical Options dialog contains options for customizing the display of your 2D
digital terrain data and enables you to specify properties for flat terrain. The flat terrain layer is represented by
a flat plane in space. If your terrain is flat, this plane will represent the ground of your visualization area.

You have access to this dialog by selecting Options | Flat Terrain... from the menu.

Graphical Options dialog - Flat Terrain

The following options are available:

Show Flat Terrain Scene: Checking this box will display the flat terrain scene on the 3D view area.

Z Value

In this panel you can specify the Z value of the flat terrain scene. The following options are available:

0.0 Meters: Select this option if you want the flat terrain to be positioned at elevation 0m.
Bottom of Terrain: This option is only available if terrain data is available. In this case, you can choose
to position the flat terrain scene at the lowest elevation point of the terrain data.
Bottom of Minimum Extents: Select this option if you want the flat terrain to be positioned at the
minimum extents.
Other (Specify): In this option you can specify any elevation value for positioning the flat terrain scene.

XY Extents

This panel allows you to specify the XY extents of the flat terrain. The following options are available:

Terrain Extents: This option will extend the dimensions of the flat terrain scene in the XY direction to the
same extents of the terrain data, if available.

295
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 11 - 3D View AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Minimum Extents: This option will limit the dimensions of the flat terrain scene in the XY direction to the
extents of the modeling objects, also called minimum extents.
Maximum Extents: This option will extend the dimensions of the flat terrain scene in the XY direction to
the size of the maximum extents. The maximum extents usually includes modeling objects, 3D terrain, and
maps.

Texture Options

Specify what type of fill you wish to use on your flat terrain model. The selected fill is displayed in the Preview
panel. The following options are available:

Color: Allows you to define and apply a range of colors for your flat terrain model. Clicking on the Color
button will open the Color dialog where you can select from a range of colors.
User-Defined Texture: Allows you to select a texture for your flat terrain scene in bitmap format. Click
the button to open the Specify Bitmap dialog where you can specify the name and location of the
bitmap file you want to use. A sample of bitmap textures are provided with your product installation.
Bitmap from 2D Site View: This option allows you to use the automatically generated 2D site view
image as a texture for the flat terrain. This image is georeferenced and defines xy extents for the flat
terrain.

Building Options

The Building Options page of the Graphical Options dialog allows you to control the display and appearance of
the buildings in your project. You have access to this dialog by selecting Options | Buildings... from the
menu. If your project has buildings defined it (i.e. AERMOD View project containing building downwash
analysis), then the buildings will appear in 3D with your terrain model.

Building Options dialog

If you choose not to display your Building Scene, you can uncheck the Show Building Scene box and your
buildings will not be displayed.

How to Apply Color or Texture to Your Buildings:

1: Select the building for which you wish to change the properties. You can select multiple items in sequence
by pressing down the Shift key as you make selections. You can also click the button to select all
buildings, and the button to unselect all buildings.

2: Clicking on either the or buttons will open the Color dialog, which allows you to select
the color you wish to have applied to your building. The wall color is previewed in the Preview Building
Wall panel.

296
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

3: Clicking on the button will display the Specify Bitmap dialog, where you can specify a bitmap
image to be applied as a wall texture on a building.

Source Options

The Source Options page of the Graphical Options dialog allows you to control the display of your sources in
the 3D View area. You have access to this dialog by selecting Options | Sources... from the menu.

Graphical Options dialog - Source Options

The following options are available under the Source Options page:

Source Type: This column lists the various source types available in your project
Color: This column displays the colors selected for your source types. To change the color, double click
the color bar or select the source type and click the button to open the Color dialog. From here
you can select an alternate color for your source.

Click on this button to return the settings to the application default.

Selects all sources, allowing you to click the button and to select a color to be
applied to all sources.

Unselects all sources.

297
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 11 - 3D View AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Printing
Print Preview

Before you can print the contents of the drawing area, 3D View displays the Print Preview dialog. Here you
can select printing options and preview how your printouts will look. 3D View prints the contents of the drawing
area into templates. These templates were designed so you can have important information about your project
automatically added to your printouts.

The Print Preview dialog is displayed every time you click the Print button located on the Menu Toolbar or
when you select File | Print… from the menu.

Print Preview dialog

The Print Preview dialog contains the following options:

Title: 3D View places the name of your project as the default title. However, you have the option of
specifying different titles. To specify different titles, uncheck the Default Titles box and type in the titles.
User Defined Scale: Here you can change the scale for your printout. A default scale is automatically
calculated but if you wish to change the scale, check the User Defined Scale box which then allows you to
select the scale you wish to use from the drop-down list. You can also type in a scale and click the
button to apply it.
Orientation: This is the orientation for your printout. Note that the preview area can preview your results
in either orientation- portrait or landscape, depending on which option is selected.
Comments: In this field you can type any comments or notes you want to be printed along with your
printouts.
Project No.: In this field you can specify your project number.

At the lower right corner of the dialog a series of buttons are available. See the function of these buttons below:

Zoom In: If you select this tool, your mouse pointer changes to a magnifying glass. On the
Preview area, click the location you want to zoom in. Click as many times as necessary, until
you have the right magnification.

298
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

Zoom Out: Select this tool to go back to the original image size.

Copy to Metafile: Select this tool if you want to copy the image to the clipboard as a
Windows Metafile. You can then paste into any Windows application that supports pasting of a
Windows Metafile from the clipboard.

Save to File: Select this option if you want to save the print preview image to a file. The
printout will be saved as an Enhanced Windows Metafile (*emf).

Displays the help contents for the options contained in the Print Preview dialog.

Displays the Preferences dialog where you can specify printing and labeling options for your
printouts.

Displays the Print Setup dialog where you can specify printing options such as paper size and
orientation

Displays the Print dialog where you can specify printing options such as printer and number
of copies

Closes the Print Preview dialog.

Preferences

In the Preferences dialog you can define default options for your printouts and various other preferences for
your project.

Note: In the Preferences dialog you are defining your global preferences. This means
that the options you have selected in this dialog will be used as the default for
every printout, for your current project or any other project you open.

You have access to the Preferences dialog by selecting File | Preferences from the menu or clicking on the
button located in the Print Preview dialog.

The Preferences dialog contains several screens. These screens are explained in the following sections.

299
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 11 - 3D View AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Preferences - Appearance

The Appearance screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to hide inactive buildings so they will not be
displayed on your printout. Simply check the Hide Inactive Buildings box.

Preferences dialog - Appearance

Preferences - Page Layout

The Page Layout screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify the information that will appear on
your printouts.

Preferences dialog - Page Layout

The Page Layout option displays the following:

Company Name: Specify the name of your company to be printed on the printout template.
Modeler: Type the name of the modeler to be printed on the printout template.

Show

From the list box you can select what information you would like displayed on your printout. Check the
appropriate box to display the desired information on the printout.

Template Border Lines

Line Thickness: This is the thickness of all the border lines for the printout templates.

300
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

Preferences - Labeling

In Labeling screen of the Preferences dialog, you can specify the labeling options for the printout templates.

Preferences dialog - Labeling

Labeling Options for Printouts: Allows you to select the Default or User Defined options. If you select
User Defined, you can change the default label titles for the various sections of the printout layout.

Deletes the labels in the fields of the User Defined column

Copies the default labels into the fields of the User Defined column

301
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 11 - 3D View AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Preferences - Font Options

The Font Options screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to specify the font, size, style, color and position
of the field labels and field text for your printout.

Preferences dialog - Font Options

The following options are available:

Font Options - Tree View: The tree view displays the following options -
Field Label: These are the labels that describe the field content in the printout template boxes. Font
Options will be applied to all field labels.
Field Text: These are the labels used for the content of the printout template box. Under the Field
Text tree item you can select the field text for which you would like to change font options.

Default: The Default button returns all your font settings to the default. Click on this button to display a
floating menu from where you can select All or Selected. If you choose All, then default settings will be
applied to the Field Labels and all the Field Text. If you choose Selected, only the fields you have selected
from the tree list will be returned to the default. You can select items from the tree list by pressing down
the Shift key while you select multiple items in sequence or the Ctrl key to make disjoint selections.
Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.
Size: Select a font size from the drop-down list.
Style: Select a font style from the drop-down list.
Color: Click the color bar to open the Color dialog from where you can select a color for your text.
Position: Click on one of the three buttons to select the alignment of your text. The text can be either left,
center or right aligned.
Sample: As you make selections for color, font, size, and style for your text, the sample is updated to
reflect the changes.

302
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

Preferences - Logo

The Logo screen of the Preferences dialog allows you to import an graphic to be used as your logo. This logo
will be displayed on the bottom right side of your printout.

Preferences dialog - Logo

Check the Use Logo box to make the Specify File panel active. Click the button and specify the name and
location of the graphic file you will be using. The imported graphic will be displayed in the Preview panel.
Several file formats are supported: gif, jpg, jpeg, bmp, emf, and wmf.

The Margin option lets you specify how much white space you would like surrounding your logo. The default
margin is 5%, you can increase or decrease this at any time.

303
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Chapter 11 - 3D View AERMOD View™ User's Guide

Preferences - Default Settings

In the Default Settings screen of the Preferences dialog, you control the font type, font size, style, and color
of the labels for all the objects in your drawing area such as your facilities or emission release points.

Preferences dialog - Default Settings

Note: If, during your project, you would like to change the labels for a particular object
you can do so in the Labels screen of the Graphical Options dialog. Here you can,
for example, change the label settings of your buildings while leaving the labels
for the other objects at the default settings you have defined here.

The following options are available:

Labels

Allows Overlapping Labels: Check this box if you want to allow for overlapping labels.
Default: Click on this button to return all your font settings to the default.
Font: Select a font from the drop-down list.
Size: Select a font size from the drop-down list.
Style: Select a font style from the drop-down list.
Color: Click the color bar to display the Color dialog from where you can select a color for the labels.
Label Orientation: Specify the location of the labels relative to the object marker by clicking on the button
that best corresponds to the desired orientation.

Format

Angle: If you would like your label placed at an angle relative to the marker, enter the angle value here.
Offset X: This is the X distance between the marker and the label. The default is 5, but you can change
this anytime.
Offset Y: This is the Y distance between the marker and the label. The default is 5, but you can change
this anytime.
Background Color: Check the Background Color box if you would like to change the background color
just around the label. Click the color bar to open the Color dialog from where you can select a background
color.

304
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Chapter 11 - 3D View

Anchor

Origin Point: Select this option if you would like the label anchored around the origin point. The origin
point is the SW corner of the object, such as a building.
Center Point: Select this option if you would like the label anchored around the center point of the object.

Sample

As you make selections for color, font, size, and style for your labels, the sample is updated to reflect the
changes.

Clicking this button immediately applies the changes you have made to your default settings
to the labels in your current project, otherwise your settings will be applied only to future projects.

305
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide References

REFERENCES

References
AERMOD View is an interface for the ISCST3, ISC-PRIME, and AERMOD air dispersion models. We have
referenced from the following publications:

Air/Superfund National Technical Guidance Study Series, Volume 4: Guidance for Ambient Air Monitoring at
Superfund Sites, Revised EPA Number: 451R93007, NTIS number PB93-199214
Air/Superfund National Technical Guidance Study Series: Emission Factors for Superfund Remediation
Technologies. EPA/450/1-91/001, NTIS PB91-190975/XAB.
Eckhoff, P.A., May 1993. Evaluation of Computer Programs For Calculating Projected Building Widths
(Draft). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
Jindal, M., Heinold, D., 1991, "Development of Particulate Scavenging Coefficients to Model Wet Deposition
from Industrial Combustion Sources". Paper 91-59.7, 84th Annual Meeting - Exhibition of AWMA,
Vancouver, BC, June 16-21.
Lee, Russell F., July 1, 1993. Stack-Structure Relationships--Further clarification of our memoranda dated
May 11, 1988 and June 28, 1989. Memorandum to Richard L. Daye.
Memorandum (dated October 10, 1985). Questions and Answers on Implementing the Revised Stack Height
Regulation. From G. T. Helms to Chief, Air Branch Regions I-X.
Ontario Ministry of the Environment, July 2005. Air Dispersion Modelling Guideline for Ontario, Version 1.0.
PIBS#5165e. Ontario Ministry of the Environment, Toronto, Ontario.
Sheih, C.M., M.L. Wesley, and B.B. Hicks, 1979. Estimated Dry Deposition Velocities of Sulfur Over the
Eastern U.S. and Surrounding Regions. Atmos. Environ., 13: 361-368.
Tikvart, Joseph A., May 11, 1988. Stack-Structure Relationships. Memorandum to Richard L. Daye.
Tikvart, Joseph A., June 28, 1989. Clarification of Stack-Structure Relationships. Memorandum to Regional
Modeling Contacts, Regions I-X.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1985. Guideline for Determination of Good Engineering Practice
Stack Height (Technical Support Document for the Stack Height Regulations). Revised EPA-450/4-80-023R.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1986. User’s Guide to the Building Profile Input Program. Revised
EPA-454/R-93-038. U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1987. Guidelines on Air Quality Models (Revised) and Supplement
A. EPA-450/2-78-027R. U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1992. User's Guide For the Industrial Source Complex (ISC2)
Dispersion Models - Volume I. EPA-450/4-92-008a, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1992. Workbook of Screening Techniques for Assessing Impacts of
Toxic Air Pollutants (Revised). EPA-454/R-92-024. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research
Triangle Park, North Carolina.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1992. Screening Procedures For Estimating The Air Quality Impact
Of Stationary Sources (Revised). EPA-454/R-92-019, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research
Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1995. User’s Guide to the Building Profile Input Program. Revised
EPA-454/R-93-038. U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.

307
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
References AERMOD View™ User's Guide

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1995. User’s Guide for the Industrial Source Complex (ISC3)
Dispersion Models - Volume I – User Instructions. EPA-454/B-95-003a. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1995. User’s Guide for the Industrial Source Complex (ISC3)
Dispersion Models - Volume II – Description of Model Algorithms. EPA-454/B-95-003a. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1995a. User’s Guide for the Industrial Source Complex (ISC3)
Dispersion Models - Volume 1 (Revised). EPA-454/B-95-003a. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards,
Research Triangle Park, NC.
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1995b. SCREEN3 Model User’s Guide. EPA-454/B-95-004. Office of
Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1997. Addendum to ISC3 User's Guide - The Prime Plume Rise and
Building Downwash Model. Submitted by Electric Power Research Institute. Prepared by Earth Tech, Inc.,
Concord, MA.
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1998a. Revised Draft - User’s Guide for the AMS/EPA Regulatory
Model – AERMOD. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1998b. Revised Draft - User’s Guide for the AERMOD Terrain
Preprocessor (AERMAP). Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1999. Addendum - User’s Guide for the Industrial Source Complex
(ISC3) Dispersion Models - Volume 1. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park,
NC.
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2002. User’s Guide for the AMS/EPA Regulatory Model - AERMOD.
Revised Draft. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2002. Addendum for the User’s Guide for the Industrial Source
Complex (ISC3) Dispersion Models - Volume 1 – User Instructions. Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2004. User’s Guide to the Building Profile Input Program. Revised
EPA-454/R-93-038. U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC.

U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2006. Addendum - User’s Guide for the AMS/EPA Regulatory Model
- AERMOD. EPA-454/B-03-001. Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, 2006. Addendum - User’s Guide for the AMS/EPA Regulatory Model
- AERMOD: Appendix A - EPA Model Clearinghouse Memorandum, July 1993. EPA-454/B-03-001. Office of
Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC
Wark, K. and C. Warner, 1981. Air Pollution: Its Origin and Control, 2nd Edition, Harper Collins Publishers.

308
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Index

INDEX

Index
Allow Overlapping Labels, 207
3D View, 304
3
Angled Area Source
3D View, 213 Inputs, 48
Controls Tool, 251
Multimedia, 288 Angled Rectangular Building
Settings Panel, 287 Inputs, 157
View Controls, 287 Tool, 260
Interface Overview, 286 Annotation Tools
Preferences Annotation Toolbar, 223
Appearance, 300 Arrow Annotation Tool, 230
Default Settings, 304 Circle Annotation Tool, 227
Font Options, 302
Cross Section Tool, 246
Labeling, 301
Delete Objects Tool, 226
Logo, 303
Eagle Watch View Tool, 225
Overview, 299
Page Layout, 300 Graphical Options, 244
Print Setup dialog, 298 Identify Tool, 248
Viewing Results, 285 Impact Tool, 244
Visualization Tools Map Import Tool, 234
Base Maps, 290 Marker Annotation Tool, 229
Camera Settings, 294 Measure Distances Tool, 233
Graphical Options, 295 North Arrow Annotation Tool, 233
List of Views, 293 Overlay Control Tool, 243
Scene Manager, 292 Pan Tool, 225
Polygon Annotation Tool, 228
Rectangle Annotation Tool, 227
A
Select Tool, 224
About Site Domain Tool, 241
AERMOD Model, 2 Text Annotation Tool, 229
AERMOD MPI, 2 View Max Extents Tool, 225
AERMOD View, 1 View Min Extents Tool, 225
ISC-PRIME Model, 4 Web Annotation Tool, 230
ISCST3 Model, 4 Zoom In Tool, 224
Multi-Chemical Run Utility, 163 Zoom Out Tool, 225
Advanced Options, 155 Appearance Preferences, 197
AERMAP Application Tools, 249
Model Preferences, 199 Angled Area Source, 251
ROU file, 28 Angled Rectangular Building, 260
AERMOD Area Source, 251
Model, 2 Circular Area Source, 253
Preferences, 198 Circular Building, 260
AERMOD View, 1 Discrete Cartesian Receptor, 254
Interface Overview, 5 Discrete Cartesian Receptor (ARC), 255
Discrete Polar Receptor, 255

cccix
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Index AERMOD View™ User’s Guide

Elevations/Flagpole Heights, 259 C

Flare Source, 250
Line Source, 254 Capped Stacks, 20, 44
Nested Grid Receptors, 258 Cartesian Plant Boundary
Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid, 256 Inputs, 101
Non-Uniform Polar Grid, 257 Receptors, 105
Open Pit Source, 252 Chemical Database, 166, 168
Plant Boundary, 258 Chemical Name, 167
Point Source, 250 Circle Annotation Tool, 227
Polygon Area Source, 253
Circular Area Source
Polygonal Building, 261
Inputs, 55
Rectangular Building, 259
Tool, 253
Show/Hide GEP 5L Area of Influence, 262
Circular Building
Show/Hide Structure Influence Zone, 261
Inputs, 160
Uniform Cartesian Grid, 256
Tool, 260
Uniform Polar Grid, 257
Color Mappings, 190
Volume Source, 252
Color Ramp, 186
ARC, 99
Company Name, 203
ArcView Shapefiles, 240
in 3D View, 300
Area Emission Rate, 57
Complex Terrain Only, 29
Area Source
Concentration Converter, 178
Inputs, 48
Concentration Scale Converter, 178
Tool, 251
Conversion Factor, 179
Arrow Annotation Tool, 230
Convert Concentration, 179
Assign Elevations, 154
Decay Factor, 179
AutoCAD DXF, 152, 291 New Averaging Time, 179
Auto-Generated Contour Plot Files, 126 Contours, 175, 182, 186
Auto-Generated Source Groups, 66 Contour Color Ramp, 213
Average Release Height Above Pit Base, 50 Contour Plot Files, 126
Averaging Periods, 26 Rolling Averages, 142
Averaging Time Converter, 179 Contouring in ISC-AERMOD View, 175
Control Pathway, 19
Coordinate Converter, 268
B
Create User Defined Contour Plot Files, 128
Base Elevation, 45, 53 Cross Section Tool, 246
Blanking File, 181
Boundary Distances, 104 D
Bounding Polygon, 155
BPIP, 162 Data Period, 117
Model Preferences, 201 Date Options, 204
B-Spline Smoothing, 183 DAYTABLE, 126
Building Downwash, 61 Debug Files, 36
Building Inputs, 156 Default Palette Preferences, 208
Circular, 160 Default Settings Preferences, 207
Polygonal, 159 Define
Rectangular, Angled Rectangular, 157 Evaluation Files, 140
Post-Processing Files, 132
Rank Files, 138

cccx
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Index

Season Hour Files, 136 EVENT

Threshold Violation Files, 130 Event/Error Files, 35
TOXX Files, 134 Output File, 218
Delete Objects dialog, 226 Exit Velocity, 45, 47
Delete Tool, 226 Export Blanking File, 101
Detailed Error Listing File, 35 Extensive Output Results, 36
Details Dialog, 172 Extents Tool, 225
Digital Terrain Model, 152
Discrete Cartesian Receptor
F
Inputs, 97
Tool, 254 Fenceline
Discrete Cartesian Receptor (ARC) Cartesian Plant Boundary, 101
Inputs, 99 Fenceline Grid, 105
Tool, 255 Polar Plant Boundary, 104
Discrete Polar Receptor Tool, 258
Inputs, 98 Flare Source
Tool, 255 Input, 46
Dispersion Coefficient, 25, 75 Tool, 250
Dispersion Options, 19 Flat Terrain, 28
DLG Base Maps, 235, 290 Flow Rate, 46, 47
DO NOT RUN, 172 Font Options Preferences, 205
Dry Depletion, 24
Dry Deposition, 21, 23
G
Dry Removal, 22, 24
DRYDPLT, 22, 24 Gas & Particle Data, 64
DXF Base Maps, 236, 290 Gas Dry Deposition, 23, 37
General Preferences, 196

E GEP 5L Area, 213, 262

Graphical Options, 244
Eagle Watch View Tool, 225 Color Mappings, 190
Edit Sources, 43 Color Ramp, 186
Effective Release Height, 47 Label Contours, 185
Elevated Terrain, 28 Labels, 191
Levels, 182
Elevations/Flagpole Heights Tool, 259
Posting, 188
Emission Output Unit, 75
Ruler Options, 189
Emission Rate, 45, 47, 54
Smoothing, 183
Emission Unit Label, 75
Graphical Output Toolbar, 188, 192
EPA BPIP Model, 162
Show Concentrations tool, 192
EPA EVENT Model, 173 Show Contours tool, 192
EPA Models/Limits Preferences Show Terrain tool, 192
AERMAP, 199 Graphically Define
AERMOD, 198 Angled Area Source, 251
BPIP, 201 Angled Rectangular Building, 260
ISC-PRIME, 201 Area Source, 251
ISCST3, 199 Circular Area Source, 253
Model Input Files, 203 Circular Building, 260
Evaluation Files, 139 Discrete Cartesian ARC Receptor, 255

cccxi
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Index AERMOD View™ User’s Guide

Discrete Cartesian Receptor, 254 Blanking File, 181

Discrete Polar Receptor, 255 Elevations, 154
Elevations/Flagpole Heights, 259 Receptors, 107
Flare Source, 250 Terrain Files
Line Source, 254 AutoCAD DXF, 149
Nested Grid Receptors, 258 Digital Elevation Map dialog, 150
Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid, 256 GTOPO30/SRTM30, 148
Non-Uniform Polar Grid, 257 SRTM, 148
UK DTM/NTF, 150
Open Pit Source, 252
USGS DEM, 147
Plant Boundary, 258
XYZ, 149
Point Source, 250
Terrain Regions, 152
Polygon Area Source, 253
Inactive Overlays, 244
Polygonal Building, 261
Information Tab, 169
Rectangular Building, 259
Uniform Cartesian Grid, 256 Init File, 32
Uniform Cartesian Receptor Grid, 256 Initial Lateral Dimension, 54
Uniform Polar Grid, 257 Initial Vertical Dimension, 54, 58
Volume Source, 252 Interface Overview, 5
Group Toolbar Buttons, 196, 223 Inverse Distance, 155
GTOPO30 ISC-PRIME
DEM, 151 Model, 4
Digital Terrain dialog, 151 Model Preferences, 201
ISCST3
Model, 4
H
Model Preferences, 199
Hide Inactive Buildings, 197, 300
High Values, 138 J
Horizontal Stacks, 20, 44
Hourly Emission File, 73 JPG, 234
Hourly Emission Rate File, 73
Format, 73
L
Hourly Ozone Data File Options, 30
Labeling
Contours, 185
I
Preferences, 204
Identify Tool, 248 Labels, 301
Impact Tool, 244 Appearance, 191
Options dialog, 244 Orientation, 207
in 3D View, 304
Import
Base Maps Land Use Categories, 40
ArcView Shapefiles, 240 Late Autumn, 39
Bitmap Images, 234 Level Options, 182
DLG Base Maps, 236 License Agreement, 3
in 3D View, 290 Line Source
DXF Base Maps, 236
Inputs, 58
in 3D View, 291
Tool, 254
JPEG Images, 234
LULC Base Maps, 238 Line Thickness, 203
MrSID Images, 234 in 3D View, 300
TIFF Images, 234 Logo Preferences, 206

cccxii
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Index

LULC Base Maps, 238 Multi-Tier Grid Inputs, 93

Multi-Year Analyses Files, 32

M
N
Map Import Tool, 234
Marker Annotation Tool, 229 National Transfer Format, 152
MAXIFILE Converter, 130, 269 Nested Grid Receptor
Maximum Extents, 225, 242 Inputs, 95
Maximum Values, 138, 266 Tool, 258
MAXTABLE Viewer, 124, 266 NO2 Ratios, 24, 76
Measure Distances Tool, 233 Non-Uniform Cartesian Grid
Menu Toolbar Buttons, 221 Inputs, 87
Menus, 211 Receptor Network, 87
AERMAP, 218 Tool, 256
Data, 215 Non-Uniform Polar Grid
Export, 215 Inputs, 91
File, 211 Tool, 257
Help, 220 North Arrow Annotation Tool, 233
Import, 214 NOX to NO2 Conversions, 30, 77, 79
Model, 212
Output, 218
O
Risk, 217
Run, 216 Objects/overlays, 243
Tools, 219 OLM Groups, 30, 77
View, 213
Open Pit Source
Met Profile Debug File, 37 Effective Pit Depth, 51
Meteorology Pathway Emission Rate, 50
Met Input Data, 112 Inputs, 50
Meteorology Data Period, 117 Tool, 252
SCIM Sampling, 121 Orientation Angle, 52
Troubleshooting Met Data Files, 123
Original Averaging Time, 179
Vertical Temperature Gradients, 120
Output
Wind Profile Exponent, 119
Options, 182
Meteorology PathwayWind Speed Categories, 118
Type, 21
Minimum Extents, 225, 243
Output Pathway
Model Debug File, 36 Contour Plot Files, 126
Model Domain, 241 Evaluation Files, 139
Model Input Files Percentile/Rolling Averages
Preferences, 203 Contour Plotfiles, 142
Move Site, 263 Settings, 141
Multi-Chemical Run Post-Processing Files, 132
Chemical Database, 168 Rank Files, 138
Chemical Setup, 165 Season Hour Files, 136
Information Tab, 169 Tabular Outputs, 124
Output Options, 167 Threshold Violation Files, 130
Set-up, 164 TOXX Files, 134
Utility, 163, 164 Output Unit
Warnings Tab, 169 Concentration, 75

cccxiii
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Index AERMOD View™ User’s Guide

Deposition, 75 Default Settings, 207

Overlay Control Tool, 243 EPA Models/Limits
Ozone AERMAP, 199
Concentration, 268 AERMOD, 198
BPIP, 201
Concentration Options, 31
ISC-PRIME, 201
Limiting Method, 30
ISCST3, 199
Ozone File Maker, 267
Model Input Files, 203
Font Options, 205
P General, 196
in 3D View
Page Layout Preferences, 203 Appearance, 300
Pan Tool, 225 Default Settings, 304
Particle-Bound Phase, 272 Font Options, 302
Labeling, 301
Percentile/Rolling Averages
Logo, 303
Contour Plot Files, 142
Overview, 299
Settings, 141 Page Layout, 300
Percentiles/Rolling Average PLOTFILES, 143 Labeling, 204
Pit Base, 51 Logo, 206
Plant Boundary Page Layout, 203
Blanking File, 103 Terrain Processor, 197
Inputs, 101 Print Preview, 194
Tool, 258 in 3D View, 298
Plume Depletion, 22 Print Mode, 194
Plume Volume Molar Ratio Method, 30 Project Status, 171
PM10 National Ambient Air Quality Standard, 27 PSD Groups, 30, 79
PM2.5, 24, 27
Point Source
Q
Input, 44
Tool, 250 Quantile Plots, 138
Polar Plant Boundary
Inputs, 104
Receptors, 104
R
Pollutant/Averaging, 24
Rank Files, 138
Pollutants, 25
Receptor Pathway
Polygon Annotation Tool, 228 About, 82
Polygon Area Source Receptor Summary, 82
Inputs, 57 Receptors
Tool, 253 Discrete
Polygonal Building ARC, 99
Inputs, 159 Cartesian, 97
Tool, 261 Polar, 98
POSTFILES, 133 Fenceline
Posting, 188 Cartesian Plant Boundary, 101
Fenceline Grid, 105
Post-Processing Files, 132
Polar Plant Boundary, 104
Preferences
Grids
About, 195
Multi-Tier, 93
Appearance, 197 Nested, 95
Default Palette, 208 Non-Uniform Cartesian, 87

cccxiv
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
AERMOD View™ User's Guide Index

Non-Uniform Polar, 91 Seasonal Categories, 39

Uniform Cartesian, 85 SEASONHR Files, 137
Uniform Polar, 89 Select Tool, 224
Importing, 107
Set Site Domain, 241
Rectangle Annotation Tool, 227
Set Up Multiple Chemicals Run, 164
Rectangular Building
Shade Style, 182
Inputs, 157
Shapefile, 240
Tool, 259
Short-Term Averaging Periods, 24
Region to Import, 152
Show/Hide GEP 5L Area, 262
Release Height, 45, 53
Show/Hide Structure Influence Zone, 261
Release Point, 44
Simple + Complex Terrain, 28
Reports, 193
Simple Terrain Only, 28
Re-Start/Multi-Year Files, 32
Site Domain tool, 241
Risk
SIZ, 261
Grid, 93
Smoothing, 183
Mode, Menu Item, 217
Risk Mode, 271 Source
Gas & Particle Data, 272 Base Elevation, 42
RiskGen Inputs
About, 274 Area, 48
Generate & Run, 284 Circular Area, 55
Interface, 275 Flare, 46
Met Files Tab, 282 Line, 58
Risk Input File Tab, 283 Open Pit, 50
Sources Tab, 277 Point, 44
Area, 278 Polygon Area, 57
Gas Dry Deposition, 281 Volume, 53
Point, 277 Pathway, 42
Volume, 280 Source Inputs, 43
Status Tab, 276 Summary, 42
Warning Tab, 276 Source Groups, 64, 66
Rolling Average, 142 Stack
Rotate Site, 264 Gas
ROU file, 29 Exit Temperature, 44, 46
Ruler Options, 189 Exit Velocity, 44, 46
Run Inside Diameter, 45, 47
EPA BPIP Model, 162 Structure Influence Zone, 213, 261
EVENT, 173, 217
Menu Item
T
US EPA BPIP Model, 216
US EPA Model, 216
Tabular Outputs, 124
Model, 171
Technical Support, 5
Multi-Chemical Run, 164
Template Border Lines, 204, 300
US EPA Model, 174
Terrain
Calculation Algorithms, 29
S Contours, 182, 183
Options
Sampled Chronological Input Model, 23, 121 Terrain Height Options
SCIM, 23 Control Pathway, 28
Sampling, 121 Receptor Pathway, 83

cccxv
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793
Index AERMOD View™ User’s Guide

Terrain Files Inputs, 89

Formats Receptor Network, 89
AutoCAD DXF, 152 Tool, 257
GTOPO30/SRTM30, 151 Urban
SRTM, 150 Area Name, 24
UK DTM/NTF, 152
Dispersion, 25
USGS DEM, 150
Groups, 68
XYZ, 151
Surface Roughness Length, 24
Importing
AutoCAD DXF, 149 Use AERMAP ROU File, 28
GTOPO30/SRTM30, 148 User Defined
SRTM, 148 Contour Plot Files, 128
USGS DEM, 147 Output Units, 75
XYZ, 149
Terrain Grid
V
Data, 108
Data File, 109 Values
Format, 110
Daily Values, 126
Options, 108
Highest Values, 124
Pathway, 108
Maximum Values, 125
Settings, 109
Variable Emissions, 70
Terrain Processor
Verify Run, 174
Advanced Options Tab, 155
Vertical Temperature Gradients, 120
Import Elevations Tab, 154
View Max Extents Tool, 225
Interface, 146
Overview, 145 View Min Extents Tool, 225
Preferences, 197 Violation Files, 130
Region to Import Tab, 152 Volume Source
Terrain Tab, 146 Inputs, 53
Text Annotation Tool, 229 Tool, 252
Threshold Value, 244
Threshold Violation Files, 130 W
Tier
Parameters, 161 Warnings Tab, 169
Tiers, 161 Web Annotation Tool, 230
Toolbar Buttons, 221 Wet Deposition, 21, 23
Total Deposition, 21 Wet Removal, 22
TOXICS, 23 WETDPLT, 22, 24
TOXX Model Input Files, 134 Wind
Transitional Spring, 39 Direction dialog, 261
Tree View, 213 Flow Vector, 213
Profile Exponent, 119, 120
Speed Categories, 118
U WINTER, 40

UK NTF, 152
Uniform Cartesian Grid Z
Inputs, 85
Tool, 256 Zoom In Tool, 224
Uniform Polar Grid Zoom Out Tool, 225

cccxvi
© 1996-2009 Lakes Environmental Software. All Rights Reserved.
www.WebLakes.com • [email protected]
Tel.: (519) 746-5995 - Fax: (519) 746-0793